Altimatic Iiic Service Manual

PIPER
ALTIMATIC IIIC
Se,vice Manual
PIPER AIRCRAFT CORPORATION
761 602
Piper Aircraft Corporation; Vero Beach, Florida
U.S. A.
Published by
PUBLICATIONS DEPARTMENT
Piper Aircraft Corporation
761 602
Issued: November 1974
PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
REVISIONS ISSUED
Current, Permanent and Temporary Revisions to this AltiMatic mc
Service Manual issued November 1974 are as follows:
761 602 (PR750613)
761 602 (PR770415)
761 602 (PR78031O)
761 602 (PR78081O)
761 602 (PR791130)
761602 (PRRIIOI6)
REVISED: 10/16/81
Permanent Revision
Permanent Revision
Permanl;!nt Revision
Permanent Revision
Permanent Revision
Permanent Revision
Dated June 13, 1975
Dated April 15, 1977
Dated March 10, 1978
Dated August 10, 1978
Dated November 30, 1979
Dated October 16, 1981
III
FOREWORD
This Service Manual is provided as a guide for Removal and Installation, Troubleshooting Procedures,
and Set-Up Procedures for the Piper AltiMatic IIIC.
The information presented in this manual has been divided into three parts; Part I contains six (6)
sections, Part II contains six (6) sections and Part III contains three (3) sections.
The information compiled in this manual will be kept current by revisions distributed periodically to
the manual owner through their local Piper Dealer or Distributor.
REVISION
There will be two (2) types of revisions used to keep this manual current. The material compiled in
these revisions will consist of information necessary to maintain the present AltiMatic lIle. Therefore, it is
imperative that this material be inserted in the Service Manual at the time it is received.
I. Temporary Revision
This type revision will be distributed at any time it is necessary to forward Technical Servicing
Information to the field. The temporary revision will usually consist of one or two pages which may be
inserted in the front of the manual. These revisions will include deletions and additions of material
pertinent to different paragraphs of the service manual. Therefore, when the temporary revision is received,
review the manual and mark the affected paragraph with the code date of the latest revision for a ready
reference.
II. Permanent Revision
This type revision will be distributed periodically and will supersede all previous temporary revisions.
These revisions will be of complete page replacement and shall be inserted in the service manual in
accordance with the following instructions:
1. Replace the obsolete pages with revised pages of the same page number.
2. Insert pages with page numbers followed by a small letter in direct sequence with the same
common page number.
3. Insert pages with page numbers followed by a capital letter in direct sequence with the same
COllllllon page number but after any pages with the same common page number followed by a small letter.
ISSUED: 11/25/74 v
PIPERALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
III. Identification of Revised Material
Revised text and illustrations shall be indicated by a black vertical line along the left-hand margin of
the page opposite the change. A line opposite the page number or section title and printing date will
indicate that the text or illustration was unchanged, but the material was relocated to a different page.
Newly added material shall be identified by an arrow pointing toward either the text, text heading or
illustration. When material is removed, an arrow will point away from the area from which the material was
removed.
Symbols will indicate only current revisions with changes and additions to or deletions of existing text
and illustrations. Changes in capitalization, spelling, punctuation or the physical location of the material on
the page will not be identified by symbols.
vi ISSUED: 11/25/74
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART I
ALTIMATIC IIIC
INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION ..................................... 11
II THEORY OF OPERATION 21
III REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................................ 31
IV TEST EQUiPMENT 41
V SET UP PROCEDURES 51
VI WIRING DIAGRAMS 61
PART II
GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER
VII DESCRiPTION 7 J
VIII THEORY OF OPERATION ............................................. 81
IX REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 91
X TEST EQUiPMENT 101
XI BENCH SETUP PROCEDURES 111
XII GROUND CHECK AND FLIGHT SET UP PROCEDURES 121
ISSUED: 11/25/74
vii
XIII
XIV
XV
.. XVI
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)
PART III
ELECTRONIC PITCH TRIM
INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION" " .......... 13-1
THEORY OF OPERATION ........... '" ........ " ... 14-1
GROUND CHECK - ELECTRONIC PITCH
TRIM SYSTEM ..................................... 15-1
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................... " ... 16-1
REVISED: 10/16/81
Figure
2-1.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.
3-7.
3-7a.
3-8.
3-9.
3-10.
3-11.
3-12.
3-13.
3-14.
3-\5.
3-16.
3-17.
3-18.
3-19.
3-20.
3-21.
3-22.
3-23.
3-24.
3-25.
3-26.
3-27.
3-28.
3-29.
3-30.
3-31.
3-32.
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Page
AltiMatic HIC Block Diagram .............................................. 2-5
Roll, Rudder and Pitch Servo Guide ....................................... " 3-3
Bridle Cable Clamp Installation ............................................. 3-4
PA-23-250 (Six Place) E & F Models AltiMatic IIlC Layout .................... 3-7
PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3IP AltiMatic mc Layout........... 3-8
PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T,
PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T
AltiMatic IIIC Layout ................................................ .
PA-34-200T AltiMatic lllC Layout ......................................... .
PA-44-180 AltiMatic IIIC Layout .......................................... .
PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T AltiMatic IllC Layout. ..................... .
Roll Servo Cable Tension Diagram ......................................... .
Pitch and Rudder Servo Cable Tension Diagram ............................. .
AltiMatic IIlC Console .................................................... .
AltiMatic IIlC, Electronic Trim Amplifier and Autopilot Amplifier ............. .
AltiMatic IIlC, Attitude Gyro .............................................. .
AltiMatic IIlC, Directional Gyro / Horizontal Situation Indicator ............... .
AltiMatic IIlC, Altitude Hold Unit and Relay Box ........................... .
Roll Servo Installation, PA-23-250 (Six Place) E & F Models. " .............. "
Pitch Servo Installation, PA-23-250 (Six Place) E Model .................... '"
Pitch Servo Installation, PA-23-250 (Six Place) F Model ...................... .
Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-23-250 (Six Place) E & F Models ............ .
AltiMatic Ille, Gyro Slaving Amplifier. ..................................... .
AltiMatic tIlC, Flux Detector .............................................. .
AltiMatic lIIC, NAY Converter (IC707) ..................................... .
Roll Servo Installation, P A-3\-31 0, P A-31-325, P A-3\-350 and P A-3\ P ......... .
Pitch Servo Installation, PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3IP ......... .
Rudder Servo Installation, P A-31-31O, P A-31-325, P A-3\-350 and P A-31 P ....... .
Pitch Trim Servo Installation, P A-31-31O, P A-31-325, P A-31-350 and P A-31 P ... .
Yaw Damper Amplifier Installation, PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-3IP ......................................................... .
Roll Servo Installation, PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301,
PA-32R-301T, PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT ........................ "
Pitch Servo Installation, PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301, PA-32R-30IT,
PA-28RT-201, PA-28RT-201T and PA-44-180 ............................ .
Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-32-260, P A-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301,
PA-32R-30IT, PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT ......................... .
Roll Servo Installation, PA-34-200T and PA-44-180 ........................... .
Pitch Servo Installation, PA-34-200T ........................................ .
Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-34-200T ................................... .
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13/
3-14
3-15/
3-17
3-\9
3-2\
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-27
3-29
3-31
3-32
3-32
3-33
3-38
3-39
3-41
3-43
3-44
3-5\
3-54
3-57
3-63
3-65
3-66
REVISED: 11/30/79
ix
PIPER ALTIMA TIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
Figure
3-33 .
3-34.
3-35.
3-36.
3-37.
4-\.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
5-9.
5-10.
5-11.
5-12.
---- 5-13.

6-\.
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
6-8a.
6-8b.
6-9.
6-10.
6-11.
6-lla.
6-12.
6-13.
6-14.
6-15.
x
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont)
Page
Altitude Hold Unit Installation (I C725) ...................................... 3-70
Relay Box Installation, PA-44-180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-71
Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-44-180 .............................. ....... 3-73
NA V Flag Adapter Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
KA-52 Autopilot Adapter Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
Gyro Substitute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Power Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Console Substitute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Radio Coupler Tester. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4-5
Block Diagram of 66D 141 Test Kit.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
AltiMatic lIIC Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-5
AltiMatic mc, lC515-1 I lC515-3 Amplifier Threshold
Adjustment Potentiometers ......................... '.' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Power Section Test Box .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Extension 'rest Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Radio Coupler Power Cable. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-16
Radio Coupler Adjustment Points.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Piper Omni/Localizer Coupler Modification Detail ............................ 5-33
NA V Converter (I C707) Adjustment Potentiometers ........................... 5-34
Sample Deviation Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-38
Slavi ng Amplifier, I E- W Corrector Adjustment Potentiometers .............. 5-39
In-Line Test Box (Locally Fabricated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-41
KA-52 Autopilot Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-42
Bench Test Wiring Harness - Yaw Damper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-44
Test Equipment Hook-Up - Yaw Damper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-44
AltiMatic lllC Block Diagram, PA-23-250 (Six Place) E & F (up to
SIN 27-7754002) Models......... .... ............. ....... ...... .. ........ 6-2
AltiMatic lIIC Block Diagram, PA-23-250 (Six Place) F Models,
SIN 27-7754003 and up .................................................. 6-3
AltiMatic mc Block Diagram, PA-31-310 and PA-31-325 . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
AltiMatic mc Block Diagram, PA-31-350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6-5
AltiMatic mc Block Diagram, PA-31 P ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6-6
AltiMatic mc Block Diagram, PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300 and PA-32RT-300T ... ......... ........ ........ .... ......... 6-7
AltiMatic lllC Block Diagram, PA-34-200T and PA-44-180............. ........ 6-8
AltiMatic HIC Harness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6-9
Yaw Damper Block Diagram, PA-31-31O, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350............. 6-10
Yaw Damper Block Diagram, PA-31 P ....................................... 6-10
Yaw Damper Harness (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 61 II 16-lla
Horizontal Situation Indicator Harness (Optional) with 1 C707 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6-12
Horizontal Situation Indicator Harness (Optional) without IC707. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Horizontal Situation Indicator (Optional) with RNA V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Horizontal Situation Indicator Schematic Slaved (Optional)............. .... .... 6-15
Electronic Trim System Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6-16
Servo Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Relay Box Schematic ...................................................... 6-17
REVISED: 10/16/81
Figure
6-16.
6-17.
6-18.
6-19.
6-20.
6-21.
6-22.
6-23.
6-24.
6-25.
6-26.
6-27.
6-28.
6-29.
6-30.
6-31.
6-32.
7-1.
8-1.
8-2.
8-3.
9-1.
9-2.
9-3.
9-4.
9-5.
10-1.
11-1.
11-2.
J 1-3.
15-1.
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont)
Altitude Hold Unit Schematic .............................................. .
AltiMatic IIIC Pressure Bulkhead Connectors (PA-31 P) ....................... .
Servo, AltiMatic IIIC AI P Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place) .................... .
HSI Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place) ........................................ .
Converter Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place) ................................... .
Radio Coupler Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place) ............................... .
Gyro Slaving Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place) ................................ .
Slaving Switch Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place) ............................... .
RMI Boot Strap Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place) " ........... , ............... .
Flux Sensor Harness, PA-3 1-3 10; -325; -350 and PA-31 P ...................... .
HSI, EDO-AIRE Mitchell Harness, PA-31-310; -325 and -350 .................. .
HSI, EDO-AIRE Mitchell Harness, PA-31-310; -325 and -350 .................. .
Compensator Harness, P A-31-31 0; -325; -350 and P A-31 P ..................... .
Gyro Slaving Harness, PA-31-310; -325 and -350 ............................. .
Boot Strap Harness, PA-31-310; -325; -350 and PA-31 P ....................... .
Plug Bracket Schematic for AltiMatic IlIC (PA-31) ........................... .
HSI, EDO-AIRE Mitchell Harness, PA-31 P ................................. .
AltiMatic IIIC Glide Slope Coupler Approach ............................... .
Pitch Axis Control System with Glide Slope Coupler .......................... .
Block Diagram of AltiMatic IIlC with Glide Slope Coupler .................... .
Glide Slope Coupler Block Diagram ........................................ .
Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-23-250 (Six Place) E & F Models .......... .
Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 ......... .
Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-31 P .................................... .
Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, and PA-34-200T .......................... .
Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-44-180 ................................. .
Glide Slope Coupler Test Cables and Jumper Plug ............................ .
Glide Slope Coupler ...................................................... .
Glide Slope Coupler Harness Schematic ..................................... .
Plug Bracket Schematic for AltiMatic IlIC with Glide Slope Coupler, PA-31 .....
Page
6-17
6-181
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-30
6-31
6-33
6-34/
6-35
7-1
8-1
8-3
8-4
9-3
9-3
9-4
9-4
9-5
10-3
11-3
ii-51
11-6
11-71
11-8
Auto Pilot Manual Electric Trim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
REVISED: 10/16/81
xi
Table
III-I.
III-II.
IV-I.
V-I.
V-II.
V-III.
X-I.
XVI-I.
xii
LIST OF TABLES
Page
AltiMatic IIIC Trim Servo Clutch Tension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-2
AltiMatic mc Applicability Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-5
Trouble Isolation Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4-7
Roll Threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-11
Pitch Threshold ........................................................... 5-11
Trouble Isolation Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-43
Trouble Isolation Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Trou ble Isolation Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
REVISED: 10/16/81
ISSUED: 11/25/74
PART I
ALTIMATIC IIIC
SECTION I
INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION
Paragraph Page
1-1. Introduction............................................... 1-1
1-2. Description ............................................... 1-1
ISSUED: 11/25/74
i-i
SECTION I
1-1. INTRODUCTION. This part of the service manual is divided into six sections. Section I contains a
description of the AltiMatic IIIC. Section II, Theory of Operation, explains the theory of the Automatic
Flight Control System including the Radio Coupling. Section Ill, Removal and Installation, provides the
information necessary for removal and installation of all AltiMatic IIIC components. Section IV, Test
Equipment, provides information on the equipment used to verify, adjust and troubleshoot the system.
Section V, Set-Up Procedures, provides the information necessary to perform a sequential test of the
system and Bench, Ground and Flight adjustments. Section VI, Wiring Diagrams, provides the information
for the AltiMatic IIIC electrical cables and harnesses used for interconnecting the system.
11-2. DESCRIPTION. The Piper A1tiMatic IIIC Automatic Flight Control System is designed to provide
smooth operation and high reliability with the minimum complexity possible in order to satisfy present day
operational requirements. Design techniques and components utilized represent the latest advances in the
state of the art both in electronics and lightweight flight control systems. Except for air driven gyro
instruments, the system operates from the airplane DC electrical system.
The AltiMatic IIIC is a complete 3-axis, two surface Autopilot, (3-axis, three surface Autopilot if
optional YAW Damper is installed) designed for the heavier single and light to medium twin engine
airplanes. The system automatically maneuvers the airplane in response to a preselected flight profile
selected by the pilot. The AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot features pitch, roll and optional yaw attitude, altitude,
heading and automatic pitch trim. With the pitch axis engaged, the Autotrim System keeps the pitch trim
properly set at all times. This not only enhances the ability of the system to fly the airplane, but also
improves safety by providing for the airplane to be turned over to the pilot in a trimmed condition when
the Autopilot is disengaged.
The AltiMatic IIIC incorporates a totally electronic Autotrim system that electronically senses trim
requirements and adjusts the trim as required. This is a solid state unit which replaces the mechanical trim
sensor used in previous III Series systems. This system offers reduced maintenance and installation
complexity. However, it requires greater time to totally resolve minor trim forces. Occasionally, when
disengaging the Autopilot a slight bump may be felt in the controls if insufficient time has elapsed for total
trim action to be accomplished.
With the installation of optional radio couplers in conjunction with the AltiMatic I1IC Autopilot, the
system offers the additional feature of ILS/VOR coupling. The radio coupler is a special purpose analog
computer which causes the system to fly with reference to a radio defined path.
The AltiMatic IIIC utilizes a ICSlS-l or lCSIS-3 computing amplifier which incorporates a roll and a
pitch threshold adjustment. There is no airspeed limiting feature in this system as in previous III Series
Autopilots. With the addition of threshold adjustments, the system has greater adaptability. There is no
Altitude Preselect in this system as in previous III Series Autopilots. However, the system incorporates an
Altitude Hold Mode which requires no pitch command adjustment prior to engagement.
The AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot disengage button is incorporated in the trim switch located on the pilot's
control wheel which energizes the Autopilot Disengage Relay. The Disengage Relay interrupts A+ to the
Autopilot, permitting the magnetically held Roll Switch to release and tum "OFF" the Autopilot. The
AltiMatic IIIC is also equipped with a Master Trim Disconnect/Interrupt Switch on the pilot's control
wheel. When this switch button is depressed it will disconnect the Autopilot and Yaw Damper if installed.
When depressed and held it will interrupt all Electric Elevator Trim Operations. frim operation will be
restored when the switch is released.
REIVSED: 3/10/78
1-1
SECTION II
THEORY OF OPERATION
Paragraph Page
2-1. Piper AltiMatic IIIC Automatic Flight Control System .................... 2-1
2-2. Console ............................................... 2-1
2-3. Amplifier..... '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-4. Gyros................................................. 2-1
2-5. Horizontal Situation Indicator (Non-Slaved) (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-6. Horizontal Situation Indicator (Slaved) (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-7. Yaw Damper System (Optional) .............................. 2-3
2-8. Roll, Yaw (Optional), and Pitch Servos ............................... 2-3
2-9. Pitch Trim Servo ....................................... 2-3
2-10. Altitude Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-3
2-11. Modes of Operation .......................................... 2-3
2-12. Roll Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-3
2-13. Heading Mode .... ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-3
2-14. Pitch Mode ............................................. 2-4
2-15. Altitude Hold Mode ........................................ 2-4
2-16. Lateral Guidance System (Radio Coupler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-17. Omni Mode .......................................... 2-4
2-18. NavMode .............................................. 2-4
2-19. Heading Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-4
2-20. Localizer (Normal) Mode ....................................... 2-4
2-21. Localizer (Reverse) Mode ....................................... 2-4
ISSUED: 11/25/74 ii-i
SECTION II
THEORY OF OPERATION
2-1. PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM. The Piper AltiMatic I1IC
Autopilot incorporates several unique concepts and circuits which provide smooth operation, simplified
installation and maintenance, and high reliability. The most significant is the computing amplifier which
eliminates the need for a control surface follow-up element.
The Piper AltiMatic mc Autopilot may be operated from either a l4-volt DC or a 28-volt DC airplane
electrical system. To understand the operation of the Piper AltiMatic I1IC Autopilot, refer to the block
diagram in Figure 2-1. The various options to the system are also shown in Figure 2-1. The following
paragraphs present a theoretical description of the components of the Piper AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot.
2-2. CONSOLE. The flight profile is programmed by the pilot at the console and modified at his
discretion. The console can be considered as a funnel for all inputs to the Computing Amplifier during
Autopilot operation, and all service set-up adjustments are also located on the console. For information
pertaining to set-up adjustments, refer to Section V of this manual. If the system employs radio coupling,
the pilot selects the mode of operation at the coupler. The console provides Autopilot engagement, Roll,
Heading, Pitch and Altitude Hold modes of operation, also the Pitch Effort Meter, Pitch Command Disc
and the Roll Command Knob. Various conbinations of mode selection through individual mode switches
are also available to the operator.
NOTE
The Operator's Manual for the Piper AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot
must be studied in depth by the serviceman if he is to interpret the
indications and functions of the system in a manner to affect
proper repairs and determine corrective action if and when
req uired to the system.
2-3. AMPLIFIER. The computing amplifier, as in previous Piper Automatic Flight Control Systems
Equipment, processes all input information according to the program modes selected by the pilot. The
amplifier also contains the threshold adjustments required for the AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot. The amplifier is
required to furnish a power output to both the roll and pitch servo motors during autopilot operation. The
autopilot mode of operation is controlled through the autopilot disengage relay. The autopilot can be
disabled by the operator by pressing the control wheel mounted Master Trim Disconnect/ Interrupt Switch
which also disengages the optional Yaw Damper and interrupts electric trim operation or by pressing the
disengage button incorporated in the control wheel mounted trim switch. Pressing either switch actuates the
relay.
2-4. GYROS. Employed in the Piper AltiMatic IIIC are three inch lightweight gyros. The Attitude Indicator
and Directional Gyro are air-driven and supply attitude and heading signals to the amplifier. The Directional
Gyro incorporates the heading Preselect feature, hereafter referred to as the Heading Bug. The air to these
gyros passes through a filter. Periodically, this filter should be changed to increase gyro life, and insure
correct performance.
On some installations the DG-360 is used in lieu of the standard Directional Gyro. The DG-360 is an
THEORY OF OPERA nON
REVISED: 10/16/81
2-1
integrated instrument combining an air-driven gyro and an electrically servo'd heading card. Loss of either
air or electric power will cause the red HDG flag to be visible. Also incorporated in the DG-360 is the A/P
Radio Course Arrow which must be set to match the desired VOR/ILS course as selected on the Omni
Bearing Selector.
2-5. HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (Non-Slaved) (Optional). The AltiMatic IIIC may utilize
the optional non-slaved HSI in lieu of the standard Directional Gyro. The HSI is an integrated instrument
combining an air-driven gyro and an electrially servo'd heading card with VOR/Localizer and Glide Slope
information in addition to visual display. The HSI provides aircraft heading and course data to the system,
and course information for VOR/ILS procedures during Autopilot operation. This instrument incorporates
conventional warning flags which function as follows: The Heading (HDG) Flag which will retract from
view when the instrument is receiving proper vacuum and electrical power. The "NAV" flag which will
retract from view once a VOR or LOC frequency is tuned in and a reliable signal is received. The Glide
Slope Flag which will retract from view when an ILS frequency is channeled and a reliable Glide Slope
signal is present.
2-6. HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (Slaved) (Optional). The AltiMatic IIIC may utilize the
optional slaved HSI in lieu of the standard Directional Gyro. This instrument offers all the features of the
non-slaved HSI as ou tUned in Paragraph 2-5. However, the slaved HSI which requires initial heading setting
on start up receives corrected heading information from the Slaving Sub-System and subsequent resetting of
the heading card, required manually on non-slaved versions, is accomplished automatically.
The Slaving Sub-System is equipped with a dual channel Slaving Amplifier and a Flux Detector. The
Slaving Meter and Slaved Directional Gyro are incorporated in the HSI. This system combines the desirable
long term accuracy of a magnetic compass and the short term accuracy and stability of a gyro compass,
thus eliminating the undesirable characteristics of short term oscillation of the magnetic compass and long
term drift of the gyro compass.
The Flux Detector can be considered as a magnetic compass. The device is sensitive and reacts to the
magnetic flux field surrounding the earth as does any magnetic compass. Due to the specialized
construction of the Flux Detector, the seven (7) errors common to the standard aircraft magnetic compass
are reduced if not eliminated. Also, of prime importance are stocking considerations. The Flux Detector
must be stored to avoid areas of magnetic interference such as: radar energy transmissions, other flux
detectors, transformers and any devices emitting electromagnetic radiation or magnetism.
The dual channel Slaving Amplifier is the next device within the Slaving Sub-System. The Flux
Detector being a magnetic sensing device passes its output through both channels of the Slaving Amplifier.
The North-South/East-West Compensator, incorporated in the slaving amplifier, corrects the output of the
Flux Detector for deviations due to both electrical and physical locating errors. The N-S/E-W Compensator
has two adjustments, one for North-South and one for East-West. These adjustments correct for minor Flux
Detector errors and are normally made following the installation of the Slaved Sub-System. When aligning
the system refer to Section V of this manual for the proper procedure.
The Slaved Directional Gyro incorporated in the HSI provides the stable gyroscopic system
information. The activities of the gyro are controlled automatically. For example, instead of the human
pilot visually observing gyro compass and magnetic compass readings and then caging and resetting the
gyro, the Flux Detector and the North-South/East-West Corrector (incorporated in the Slaving Amplifier)
provide constant magnetic reference information to the gyro unit. If an error exists, it is automatically
corrected electrically. The corrective activities are continuous and are visually displayed to the human pilot
by means of the Slaving Meter.
The Slaving Meter indicates the direction, length of time, and frequency of errors being eliminated by
oscillating about a 45
0
point to show that the slaving circuits are accomplishing their function. Should the
needle remain motionless or either vertical or horizontal for an extended period (two minutes) in level
flight, the heading should be manually set using the magnetic compass and the performance of the heading
card observed. If slaving difficulties are encountered, set the slaving mode switch to SL 2 or free gyro. In
2-2 THEORY OF OPERATION
ISSUED: 11/25/74
free gyro mode the instrument must be periodically reset to manually counteract the effects of gyro
precession.
2-7. YAW DAMPER SYSTEM (Optional). The Yaw Damper System is a frequently installed option with
the AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot. The system has a panel mounted push ON push OFF control switch. The
system can be disengaged by placing the panel mounted switch in the OFF position or by momentarily
pressing the control wheel mounted Master Trim Disconnect/Interrupt Switch. The system includes an
electric rate gyro sensing element, an electronic solid state servo amplifier and the rudder servo. The
sensitive signals of a rate gyro are combined with those of an electrolytic potentiometer which acts as a
pendulum. The composite signals are tuned to the natural yaw frequency of the aircraft for maximum
performance. The system gyro is energized through the main aircraft electrical bus and receives power any
time the aircraft master switch is on.
2-8. ROLL, YAW (OPTIONAL), AND PITCH SERVOS. The Roll, Yaw and Pitch Servos of the Piper
AltiMatic IIIC are electrical servos similar to the Autopilot servos used in previous Piper Automatic Flight
Control Systems equipment. The servos engage electrically and are easily overridden. If the electrical system
fails, they automatically disengage.
2-9. PITCH TRIM SERVO. As in previous Piper Automatic Flight Control Systems equipment, the
Electric Pitch Trim Servo receives electrical power from both a manual and automatic source. When the
Autopilot function of the AltiMatic IIIC is not used, the Pitch Trim Servo furnishes Manual Electric Trim
via the control wheel trim switch. The panel mounted Trim Master Switch must be placed in the ON
position for manual electric trim operation. When the Autopilot function is engaged, control of the Pitch
Trim Servo reverts to Automatic Electric Pitch Trim via the electronic Autotrim system that electronically
senses trim requirements and adjusts the trim as required. There is only one (1) Electric Pitch Trim Servo in
the system, the trim servo shown in Figure 2-1 in two (2) blocks only to indicate the servo operates
independently in one (1) of two (2) modes. The remainder of pertinent information for the Piper AltiMatic
IIIC Electric Pitch Trim System is covered in Part III of this manual.
2-10. ALTITUDE CONTROLLER. The Piper AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot does not offer altitude preselect as
did previous III Series Piper pitch axis Automatic Flight Control Systems equipment. The Altitude
Controller features Altitude Hold which may be activated any time the Autopilot is engaged by simply
placing the ALT Hold rocker switch (on the console) in the ON position. The pilot can reject this input by
placing the ALT Hold rocker switch in the OFF position or by disengaging the Autopilot.
2-11. MODES OF OPERATION. Following is a brief description of the different modes of operation of
the AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot. The engage button for each mode of operation is explained in the following
paragraphs.
2-12. ROLL MODE. Because Roll is first in logical sequence, the Roll engage acts as the Autopilot master
switch. As such, the Roll must be engaged for all other engage and mode switches to become operative.
With the Roll switch only engaged, the Autopilot is responsive only to the roll axis of the Attitude Gyro
and the commands of the Roll Command Knob. Use of the Roll Command Knob permits bank angles up to
30
0
on the AltiMatic IIIC.
2-13. HEADING MODE. The function of the Heading Mode Switch is to remove the Roll Command Knob
from the Autopilot circuit and add the Directional Gyro or Horizontal Situation Indicator Heading
Command and Coupler functions to the basic Roll Attitude control. Prior to engagement of the heading
mode, the Heading Bug of the D.G. or HSI and Coupler Modes should be set. (See Coupler Mode, Paragraph
2-16.)
THEORY OF OPERATION
ISSUED: 11/25/74
2-3
2-14. PITCH MODE. The Pitch Mode Switch engages the Autopilot pitch servo and makes the Autopilot
responsive to the Pitch Attitude of the Gyro Horizon and the commands of the Pitch Command Disc.
Attitude changes may be made by rotating the pitch command disc in the appropriate direction. Design of
the system is such that commanded attitudes remain constant throughout power changes and gear and flap
transitions.
2-15. ALTITUDE HOLD MODE. The function of the Altitude Hold Mode Switch is to remove the Pitch
Command Disc from the Autopilot circuit and initiate a smooth transition to the pressure altitude at which
it was engaged.
2-16. LATERAL GUIDANCE SYSTEM. (Radio Coupler) The radio coupler contains a five position switch
which selects the desired mode of lateral guidance.
2-17. OMNI MODE. When the Omni Mode is selected, the Autopilot is coupled to the NAV and
Omni/Converter CDI. When the D.G. Heading Bug or the HSI Course Arrow is set to match the Omni
course selection, all headings are then controlled by the Omni Radio Signals. Intercept and track are
automatic.
2-18. NAV MODE. The NA V mode extends the coupler utility by making operation practical under the
adverse conditions of unsteady or erratic Radio Omni Signals. This mode incorporates an extended time
delay in the circuitry which reduces Autopilot reaction to short term needle deflections of the Omni. The
NA V mode should not be used for close in Omni approach work.
2-19. HEADING MODE. When in the HDG Mode, the Autopilot will function as described in Paragraph
2-13.
2-20. LOCALIZER (NORMAL) MODE. In the Loc Norm Mode, the coupler dynamics are set for
optimum performance in tracking the localizer beam which is only 1/4 as wide as the Omni beam. Intercept
and track are automatic as in the Omni Mode.
2-21. LOCALIZER (REVERSE) MODE. This mode permits automatic BACK COURSE approaches and
outbound tracking on the FRONT COURSE prior to procedure turn. The features of back course are
identical to front course except that the Autopilot response will be in reverse to the localizer indications
and the Course Selector Directional Gyro must be set to the reciprocal of the front course heading. (For
exceptions see CAUTION note.)
2-4
CAUTION
On installations incorporating the optional Horizontal Situation
Indicator, when operating in the NAV mode, the HSI always gives
the correct display if the heading card is rna tched to the magnetic
heading. When operating in the Localizer mode, the course arrow
of the HSI should be placed on the INBOUND front course
heading. The display will then be correct for either front course or
back course. During Back Course Approaches, the display will be
inverted and the tail of the course arrow will indicate the back
course heading. The Left/Right needle sensing will require turns
toward the needle for course center line.
THEORY OF OPERATION
ISSUED: 11/25/74

.. -<

"N"r1
til 0

-..It!j

N
I
til
"'Ij

@
N
I
...-
2::
.....

'"
.....
.....
(")
.-
.-
.-
(J
t::C
0'
(")
:>:;"
o

S
DG
DG-360
HSI
ATTITUDE
HORIZON
TO CONTROL WHEEL
TRIM SWITCH

....
TO CONTROL WHEEL MASTER
TRIM DISCONNECT INTERRUPT
SWITCH
AUTOPI LOT AUTO MODE
!
r-, _---l!.....-_.....,
t
RUDDER
SERVO
t
ROLL
SERVO
AUTO PILOT
DISENGAGE
RELAY
J
PITCH
SERVO
ALTITUDE
HOLD UNIT
FLIGHT
CONTROLLER
COMPUTER
AMPLIFIER
+
1
TRIM
SERVO
OMNI
LOC - GIS
RADIO
INPUTS
MANUAL MODE
.,
TRIM
SERVO
;:g

(=)
-
-
-
(j

-
(j
rr:1
a::

c:

Paragraph
SECTION III
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
3-l. Introduction ............................................................. .
3-2. Pre-Installation Check and Adjustments of Roll, Yaw and Pitch
Servo Assemblies ..................................................... .
3-3. Console (AltiMatic IIlC) .................................................. .
3-4. Removal of Console (PA-23-250 Six Place) E &F Models ..................... .
3-5. Installation of Console (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ................... .
3-6. Removal of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models .......... .
3-7. Removal of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models .... .
3-8. Installation of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models .. .
3-9. Installation of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ........ .
3-10. Removal of Attitude Gyro (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ............... .
3-11. Installation of Attitude Gyro (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ............. .
3-12. Removal of Directional Gyro and/ or Horizontal Situation Indicator
(PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ................................... .
3-13. Installation of Directional Gyro and / or Horizontal Situation Indicator
(PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ................................... .
3-14. Removal of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ........... .
3-15. Installation of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ......... .
3-16. Removal of Relay Box (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ................... .
3-17. Installation of Relay Box (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ................ .
3-18. Removal of Roll Servo (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ................. ,.
3-19. Installation of Roll Servo (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ................ ,
3-20. Removal of Pitch Servo (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models .................. .
3-21. Installation of Pitch Servo (PA-23-250 Six Place) E Model .................... .
3-22. Installation of Pitch Servo (PA-23-250 Six Place) F Model .................... .
3-23. Removal of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ............. .
3-24. Installation of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models .......... .
3-25. Removal of Gyro Slaving Amplifier (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ....... .
3-26. Installation of Gyro Slaving Amplifier (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models .... .
3-27. Removal of Flux Detector (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ............... .
3-28. Installation of Flux Detector (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ............. .
3-29. Removal of NAV Converter (IC707) (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ...... .
3-30. Installation of NAV Converter (lC707) (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models .... .
3-31. Removal of Console (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3IP) ........... .
3-32. Installation of Console (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) ......... .
3-33. Removal of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
3-34. Removal of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P) ......................................................... .
3-35. Installation of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P) ......................................................... .
3-36. Installation of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P) ......................................................... .
3-37. Removal of Attitude Gyro (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3IP) ...... .
REVISED: 8/10/78
Page
3-1
3-1
3-19
3-19
3-19
3-20
3-20
3-20
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-24
3-25
3-25
3-26
3-26
3-28
3-30
3-30
3-31
3-31
3-31
3-33
3-33
3-33
3-34
3-34
3-34
3-34
3-34
3-35
3-35
iii-i
Paragraph Page
3-38. Installation of Attitude Gyro (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and P A-31 P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-39. Removal of Directional Gyro and/or Horizontal Situation Indicator (PA-31-310,
PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) ..................................... 3-36
3-40. -Installation of Directional Gyro and / or Horizontal Situation Indicator
(PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) .......................... 3-36
3-41. Removal of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31 P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-42. Installation of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P) .......................................................... 3-37
3-43. Removal of Relay Box (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) ......... 3-37
3-44. Installation of Relay Box (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-3IP) .......................................................... 3-37
3-45. Removal of Roll Servo (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3IP) ......... 3-37
3-46. Installation of Roll Servo (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) .... ... 3-37
3-47. Removal of Pitch Servo (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) ........ 3-39
3-48. Installation of Pitch Servo (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3IP)....... 3-40
3-49. Removal of Rudder Servo (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)....... 3-40
3-50. Installation of Rudder Servo (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31 P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3-5\. Removal of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)... 3-42
3-52. Installation of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P) .......................................................... 3-42
3-53. Removal of Yaw Damper Amplifier (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-3! P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3-54. Installation of Yaw Damper Amplifier (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31 P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3-55. Removal of Gyro Slaving Amplifier (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31 P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-44
3-56. Installation of Gyro Slaving Amplifier (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31 P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-44
3-57. Removal of Flux Detector (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)....... 3-45
3-58. Installation of Flux Detector (PA-31-31O, P A-31-325, P A-31-350
and P A-31 P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3-59. Removal of NAV Converter (lC707) (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and P A-31 P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-45
3-60. Installation of NAV Converter (IC707) (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)....... ................................................... 3-45
3-61. Removal of Console (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T) .... 3-45
3-62. Installation of Console (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30lT) .. ,. 3-45
3-63. Removal of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-32-260, SIN 32-750001 to
7700023; PA-32-300, SIN 32-7540001 to 7840045 and PA-32R-300,
SIN 32R-7680001 to 7780417)........................................... 3-45
3-64. Removal of Trim Amplifier (PA-32-260,
SIN 32-7500001 to 7700023 and PA-32-300, SIN 32-7540001
to 7840045) ...................................... '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-46
3-65. Installation of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-32-260,
SIN 32-7500001 to 7700023 and PA-32-300, SIN 32-7540001
to 7840045) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-46
iii-ii REVISED: 11/30/79
Paragraph Page
3-66. Installation of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7500001 to
7700023; PA-32-300, SIN 32-7540001 to 7840045 and PA-32R-300,
SIN 32R-7680001 to 7780417)........................................... 3-46
3-67. Removal of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7800001
and up; PA-32-300, SIN 32-7840046 anq up; PA-32R-300,
SIN 32R-7780418 and up; PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301,
PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30IT) ............................. 3-46
3-68. Installation of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-32-260,
SIN 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-300, SIN 32-7840046 and up;
PA-32R-300, SIN 32R-7780418 and up; PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T,
PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30IT) ................... 3-47
3-69. Removal of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-32-260,
SIN 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-300, SIN 32-7840046 and up;
PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T,
PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30IT) ......................................... 3-47
3-70. Installation of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-32-260,
SIN 32-78-00001 and up; PA-32-300, SIN 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301
and PA-32R-30IT) .................................................... 3-47
3-71. Removal of Attitude Gyro (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, P A-32R-300,
and PA-32R-30IT) .................................................... 3-47
3-72. Installation of Attitude Gyro (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30lT,
PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30IT) ......................................... 3-47
3-73. Removal of Directional Gyro andlor Horizontal
Situation Indicator (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
and PA-32R-30IT) .................................................... 3-48
3-74. Installation of Directional Gyro andlor Horizontal
Situation Indicator (P A-32-260, P A-32-300, P A-32R-300,
and PA-32R-30IT) .................................................... 3-48
3-75. Removal of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
and PA-32R-30IT) .................................................... 3-48
3-76. Installation of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-32-260, PA-32-300,
PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT,
PA-32R-30 I and PA-32R-30 IT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-48
3-77. Removal of Relay Box (P A-32-260, SIN 32-750000 I to 7700023;
PA-32-300, SIN 32-7540001 to 7840045 and PA-32R-300,
SIN 32R-7680001 to 7780417) ........................................... 3-48
3-78. Installation of Relay Box (P A-32-260, SIN 32-750000 I
to 7700023; PA-32-300, SIN 32-754000 I to 7840045 and
PA-32R-300, SIN 32R-7680001 to 7780417) ............................... 3-49
3-79. Removal of Relay Box (P A-32-260, SIN 32-780000 I and up;
PA-32-300, SIN 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, SIN 32R-7780418
and up; PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT,
PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30IT) ......................................... 3-49
REVISED: 11/30/79
iii-iii
Paragraph
Page
3-80.
3-81.
3-82.
3-83.
3-84.
3-85.
3-86.
3-87.
3-88.
3-89.
3-90.
3-91.
3-92.
3-93.
3-94.
3-95.
3-96.
3-97.
3-98.
3-99.
3-100.
3-101.
3-102.
3-103.
3-104.
3-105.
3-106.
3-107.
iii-iv
Installation of Relay Box (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7800001 and up;
PA-32-300, SIN 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, SIN 32R-7780418
and up; PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT,
PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T) ........ .... ............ ................. 3-49
Removal of Roll Servo (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-30I, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and
PA-32R-301T) ........................................................ 3-49
Installation of Roll Servo (PA-32-260, P A-32-300, P A-32R-300,
PA-32-RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-30I, PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301
and PA-32R-301T) .................................................... 3-49
Removal of Pitch Servo (PA-32-260 and PA-32-300,
SIN 32-7540001 to 7840222) ..... .............. ......................... 3-52
Removal of Pitch Servo (PA-32-300, SIN 32-7940001 and up;
PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T,
PA-32R-30I and PA;.32R-30IT) ................ .... ..................... 3-52
Installation of Pitch Servo (PA-32-260 and PA-32-300,
SIN 32-7540001 to 7840222) ............................................ 3-52
Installation of Pitch Servo (PA-32-300, SIN 32-7940001
and up; PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-30I,
PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30IT) ............................. 3-53
Removal of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
and P A-32R-30 I T) .................................................... 3-55
Installation of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-32-260, PA-32-300,
PA-32R-300, PA-32RT -300, PA-32RT -300T, PA-32-30 1, PA-32-30 IT
PA-32R-30I and PA-32R-301T) .................................... ..... 3-55
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Removal of Console (PA-34-200T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Installation of Console (PA-34-200T). . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-57
Removal of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-34-200T) ................................ 3-57
Installation of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-34-200T) .............................. 3-59
Removal of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-34-200T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 3-59
Installation of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-34-200T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Removal of Attitude Gyro (PA-34-200T) ..................................... 3-59
Installation of Attitude Gyro (PA-34-200n ................................... 3-59
Removal of Directional Gyro andlor Horizontal Situation Indicator
(PA-34-200T) ......................................................... 3-59
Installation of Directional Gyro andlor Horizontal Situation Indicator
(PA-34-200T) ......................................................... 3-60
Removal of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-34-200T, Serial Nos. 34-7570001 to
34-7770185 incl., 34-7770187 to 34-7770263 incl.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-60
Installation of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-34-200T, Serial Nos. 34-7570001 to
34-7770185 inc!., 34-7770187 to 34-7770263 inc!.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Removal of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-34-200T, Serial Nos. 34-7770186,
34-7770264 and up) .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
REVISED: 11/30/79
Paragraph
3-IOS.
3-109.
3-110.
3-111.
3-112.
3-113.
3-114.
3-115.
3-116.
3-117.
3-118.
3-119.
3-120.
3-121.
3-122.
3-123.
3-124.
3-125.
3-126.
3-127.
3-128.
3-129.
3-130.
3-13\.
3-132.
3-\33.
3-134.
3-135.
3-136.
3-137.
3-\38.
3-139.
3-140.
3-141.
3-142.
3-143.
3-144.
3-145.
3-146.
3-147.
3-148.
3-149.
3-150.
Installation of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-34-200T, Serial Nos. 34-7770186,
34-7770264 and up) ................................................... .
Removal of Relay Box (PA-34-200T) ........................................ .
Installation of Relay Box (PA-34-200T) ..................................... .
Removal of Roll Servo (PA-34-200T) ....................................... .
Installation of Roll Servo (PA-34-200T) ..................................... .
Removal of Pitch Servo (PA-34-200T) ....................................... .
Installation of Pitch Servo .................................... .
Removal of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-34-200T) .................................. .
Installation of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-34-200T) ............................... .
Removal of Gyro Slaving Amplifier (PA-34-200T) ............................ .
Installation of Gyro Slaving Amplifier (PA-34-200T) .......................... .
Removal of Flux Detector (PA-34-200T) .................................... .
Installation of Flux Detector (PA-34-200T) .................................. .
Deleted
Deleted
Removal of Console (PA-44-180) ........................................... .
Installation of Console (PA-44-180) ......................................... .
Removal of Autopilot Amplifier (P A-44-180) ................................. .
Installation of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-44-180) .............................. .
Removal of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-44-180) ........................... .
Installation of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-44-ISO) ......................... .
Removal of Attitude Gyro (PA-44-ISO) ...................................... .
Installation of Attitude Gyro (PA-44-180) .................................... .
Removal of Directional Gyro and/or Horizontal Situation Indicator ............ .
Installation of Directional Gyro and/or Horizontal Situation Indicator
(PA-44-ISO) .......................................................... .
Removal of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-44-\SO) ................................. .
Installation of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-44-\HO) ............................... .
Removal of Re\ay Box (PA-44-\80) ......................................... .
Installation of Relay Box (PA-44-ISO) ....................................... .
Removal of Roll Servo (P A-44-180) ......................................... .
Installation of Roll Servo (PA-44-\80) ....................................... .
Removal of Pitch Servo (PA-44-\80) ........................................ .
Installation of Pitch Servo (PA-44-\80) ...................................... .
Removal of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-44-180) ................................... .
Installation of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-44-\80) ................................. .
Removal of Console (PA-2SRT-20l and PA-2SRT-20IT) ...................... .
Installation of Console (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT) ...... ; ............. .
Removal of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-28RT-201 and
PA-28RT-20 IT) ...................................................... .
Removal of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-28RT-201 and
PA-28RT-20IT) .............................................. \ ....... .
Installation of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-28RT -201
and PA-2SRT-20IT) .................................................. .
Installation of Autopilot Amplifier (P A-28 R T -201 and
PA-28RT-20IT) ....................................................... .
Removal of Attitude Gyro (PA-28RT-201 and
PA-28RT-20 I'r) ...................................................... .
Installation of Attitude Gyro (PA-28RT-20 1 and
PA-28RT-201 T) ...................................................... .
REVISED: 11/30/79
Page
3-60
3-61
3-61
3-61
3-63
3-64
3-64
3-65
3-66
3-67
3-67
3-67
3-67
3-6H
3-68
3-68
3-68
3-68
3-68
3-69
3-69
3-69
3-69
3-69
3-70
3-70
3-70
3-71
3-71
3-72
3-72
3-73
3-74
3-74
3-74
3-74
3-74
3-75
3-75
3-75
3-75
3-75
iii-v
Paragraph
3-151.
3-152.
3-153.
3-154.
3-155.
3-156.
3-157.
3-158.
3-159.
3-160.
3-161.
3-162.
3-163.
3-164.
3-165.
3-166.
3-167.
3-168.
iii-vi
Page
Removal of Directional Gyro and/ or Horizontal
Situation Indicator (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T) .................... 3-75
Installation of Directional Gyro and/ or Horizontal
Situation Indicator (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T) .................... 3-76
Removal of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-28RT-201 and
PA-28RT-201T)....................................................... 3-76
Installation of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-28RT-201
and PA-28RT-20IT) ................................................... 3-76
Removal of Relay Box (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT)..................... 3-76
Installation of Rclay Box (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT)................... 3-76
Removal of Roll Servo (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)..................... 3-76
Installation of Roll Servo (PA-28RT-201 and PA-RT-201T)..................... 3-77
Removal of Pitch Servo (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT).................... 3-77
Installation of Pitch Servo (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT).......... .... .... 3-77
Removal of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)............... 3-78
Installation of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT)............. 3-79
Removal of Nav Flag Adapter (PA-23-250 Six Place,
SIN 27-7554001, 7554074 to 7754127; PA-31, SIN 31-7512023
to 7712064; PA-31-350, SIN 31-7552054 to 7752100,
31-7752102 to 7752113 and PA-31P, SIN 31P-7630014
to 7730012) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-79
Installation of Nav Flag Adapter (PA-23-250 Six Place,
SIN 27-7554001, 7554074 to 7754127; PA-31, SIN 31-7512023
to 7712064; PA-31-350, SIN 31-7552054 to 7752100,
31-7752102 to 7752113 and PA-31P, SIN 31P-7630014
to 7730012) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Removal of Nav Flag Adaptcr (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7600001
to 7700017; PA-32-300, SIN 32-7640001 to 7740075; PA-32R-300,
SIN 32R-7680001 to 7780350 and PA-34-200T, SIN 34-7670001 to 777(261) .. 3-79
Installation of Nav Flag Adapter (PA-32-260, SIN 32-760001
to 7700017; PA-32-300, SIN 32-7640001 to 7740075; PA-32R-300,
SIN 32R-768000 1 to 7780350 and P A-34-200T, SIN 34-7670001
to 7770261) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
Removal of KA-52 Autopilot Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
Installation of KA-52 Autopilot Adapter ..................................... 3-81
ADDED: 11/30/79
SECTION III
REMOV AL AND INSTALLATION
3-1. INTRODUCTION. The instructions in this section provide removal and installation procedures for the
AltiMatic IIIC components. Checks and adjustments are limited to those required for removal and
installation of the components. Repairs, Bench Checks and Adjustments, and Set-Up Procedures are found
in the sections to follow.
On the following pages are two tables. Table III-I lists, all the Pitch Trim Servos installed in each
airplane. Table III-II lists all the components of the AltiMatic IIIC installed in each airplane.
Figure 3-1 is used to properly set up and check a servo prior to installation in the airplane. The use of
this illustration will be discussed in Paragraph 3-2.
To help initially locate the AltiMatic IIIC component parts in any given airplane, refer to Figures 3-3
thru 3-7a inclusive. The Radio Coupler, which is optional equipment, is not shown in these illustrations.
When the coupler is installed, it is easily located in the instrument panel.
When installing a servo bridle cable, reference is made to either Figure 3-8 or Figure 3-9. The
illustrated airplane cable systems shown in these illustrations will help to properly adjust the bridle cable
tension.
CAUTION
The Allen head set screw (Piper PIN 757 579) used in the servo
capstan may have a nylon insert on the shank. The insert is used as
a locking device and any screw with this on should be discarded
after it has been removed because the locking capability of the
nylon is limited to one installation.
3-2. PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK AND ADJUSTMENTS OF ROLL, YAW AND PITCH SERVO
ASSEMBLIES. Prior to installation of a roll, yaw or pitch servo assembly, certain checks and adjustments
should be conducted according to Figure 3-1 and the following instructions.
NOTE
Figure 3-1 describes the set-up procedures for the I C363-1,
IC465-1, lC470-1 and lC508-1 Servos.
a. Switch Position: Check the position of either the switch plate or the motor wiring to pin C and
pin D of the servo connector with the appropriate table in Figure 3-1. To set the switch in the correct
position, remove the two screws through the face of the switch plate. Move the slide switch to the left or
right, as necessary, and reinstall the plate with the corresponding letter visible. If the servo does not feature
a switch, the wiring from the motor to pin C and pin D of the servo motor connector must be checked. For
clockwise rotation of the shaft, place the Blk wire on pin C and the Red wire on pin D. For
counterclockwise rotation, place the Red wire on pin C and the Blk wire on pin D.
b. Cable Guards: Check the correct location and number of guards required for each servo.
REMOVE ALL OTHER CABLE GUARDS FROM THE SERVO.
REVISED: 11/30/79
3- ]
PIPER ALTIMATIC lUG SERVICE MANUAL
c. Torque Output Clutch Adjustment: The Clutch Adjustment Procedure is not authorized in the
field at this time on copper/carbon type clutches as per manufacturer EDO-AIRE Mitchell.
d. Servo Model Number: Three digits will identify the servo as to the model of the servo as installed
in the airplane. Whether it is set for a roll, yaw or pitch servo will be identified by the letter placed after the
three digits, either "R", "Y" or "P".
e. Bridle Cable Tension: The tension of the airplane control cables should be checked to assure that
it is in aecordance with the specifications for the particular model before attachment of the bridle cable is
accomplished.
3-2
TABLE III-I. ALTIMATIC IIIC TRIM SERVO CLUTCH TENSION
AIRPLANE
SERVO NO.
SWITCH
POSITION
CLUTCH SETTING
PA-23-250 1 C469-6-504
L 25 . 5 Ibs.
PA-28RT-201;-20IT I C373-6-755
R
21 . 4 Ibs.
PA-31-31O 1 C469-6-483
R
20 . 5 Ibs.
PA-31-325 I C469-6-483
R
20 . 5 Ibs.
PA-31-350 I C469-6-498
R
25 . 3 Ibs.
PA-31P I C469-6-484
R
35 . 5 Ibs
PA-32-260/300 SEE NOTE lC373-6-488
R
18 . 3 Ibs.
PA-32R-300& I
P A-32R T -300 I 300T SEE NOTE IC373-6-529
L
18 . 3 lbs.
P A-32-30 I ;-30 I T 1 C373-6-529
L
]8 . 3 Ibs.
PA-32R-301-301T I C373-6-677
L
21 . 4 Ibs.
PA-34-200T I C373-6-487
L
20 . 5 Ibs.
PA-44-180 lC373-6-719
L
21 . 4 Ibs.
PA-44-180T
IC373-6-719
L 21 4 los.
NOTE
1 C373-6-529 Trim Servo and ] C508-1-775 P Pitch Servo used on
P A-32-300 on SIN P A-32-794000 1 and up; I C373-6-677 Trim
Servo (clutch setting 21 . 4Ibs.) used on PA-32RT-300/300T on
SIN PA-32R-7985014 and up and PA-32R-7887004, 7887051 and
up.
REVISED; 10/16/81
'\
OIITION 3 r-POSITION 4
o t9 0
-
f2( 0 i

0
POSITION 27 POSITION I
Airplane
P A-23-250 E Model
PA-23-250 E Model
PA-23-250 F Model
PA-23-250 F Model
PA-28RT -201;-201T
PA-28RT-201;-201T
PA-3l-310
PA-3l-310
PA-31-310
PA-31-325
PA-31-325
PA-31-325
PA-31-350
PA-31-350
P A-31-350
PA-3IP
PA-31 P
PA-31 P
PA-32-260! 300, PA-32R-300
& P A-32RT -300 I 300T
P A-32-2601 300
PA-32R-300 &
PA-32RT-300/300T
PA-32-301:-30IT &
PA-32R-30 1;-30 IT
PA-32-301;-30IT
P A-32R-30 I ;-30 IT
PA-34-200T
PA-34-200T
PA-44-180
PA-44-180
PA-44-180T
PA-44-180T
PIPER ALTIMATIC IlIC SERVICE MANUAL
Switch
Servo Model Position
IC465-1-504R R
IC470-504P L
I C465-1-504R R
IC470-l-509P L
I C373-1-430R R
IC508-1-529P R
lC465-1-483R R
IC470-1-483P L
IC465-1-49IY R
IC465-l-483R R
I C470-1-498P L
IC465-1-49IY R
IC465-1-498R R
L
IC465-l-49IY R
IC465-1-484R R
IC470-1-484P L
IC465-1-49IY R
IC363-1-269R R
IC508-1-183P* R
IC508-1-529P R
IC363-1-269R
IC508-1-775P
IC508-1-529P
IC363-1-487R
IC508-1-487P
IC363-1-719R
I C508-1-529P
I C363-1- 757R
I C508-1-529P
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
(Wi,.d F" "R" 0"".,..)
eLK
- TOPINe
TO MOTOR TO CONNECTOR
R"E'D TO PIN 0
BLK .
AL TERNATE WIRING FOR
LR SWITCH
...............
f7
SWITCH POSITION
REVERSE FOR L
Guard
Position
1&3
1,2&4
1&3
2&4
1&3
1&2
1&3
2&4
2&4
1&3
2&4
2&4
1&3
2&4
2&4
1&3
2&4
2&4
2&4
I
1&2
2&4
1&2
1&2
1&3
I
1&3
1&2
1&3
1&2

Clutch
Setting
35 Ibs. 1: 5
17 Ibs. 3
35 Ibs. 1: 5
17 Ibs. 3
23 Ibs. 3-5
44 Ibs . .t 6
45 Ibs. i 3
15 Ibs . . 3
40 Ibs. :!: 10
45 Ibs . . 3
20 Ibs. 5
40 Ibs.! 10
40 Ibs .. 5
20 Ibs. :t 5
40 Ibs.! 10
45 Ibs. 3
26 Ibs. 4-6
40 Ibs. 10
43 lbs. 7-8
55 Ibs . . 3
44 Ibs. 6
43 lbs. 7-8
55 Ibs . . 3
44 Ibs . . 6
40 lbs. :t 5
50 Ibs. 10
31 lbs.! 4
44 lbs. . 6
26 Ibs. 4
44 lbs. . 6
Tension
Washer
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Figure 3-1. Roll, Rudder and Pitch Servo Guide
*SEE NOTE
PAGE 3-2
REVISED: 10/16/81
3-3
3-4
BRIDLE CABLE
PIN 757 863 (42A 173-1)
PA-23-250 (Six Place) E & F Models
PA-28RT-201, PA-28RT-20H
PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300 and PA-32RT-300T
PA-32-301, PA-32-30H, PA-32R-301
and PA-32R-30H
PA-34-200T
PA-44-180
-.l. CONTROL
.k8 CA8lE
;_S::SSj
ROLL AND PITCH
ROLL AND PITCH
RUDDER
ROLL AND PITCH
ROLL AND PITCH
ROLL AND PITCH
ROLL AND PITCH

BRIDLE CABLE
PIN 758 082 (42A 184-1)
5 CONTROL
32 CABLE
~ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ Y
PA-31310, PA31325, PA31350 and PA31P ROLL
Figure 3-2. Bridle Cable Clamp Installation
REVISED: 11/30/79
AIRPLANE
PA-23-250
E Model
f" Model
PA-2SR 1-201;-20IT
PA-JI-31O
PA-JI-325
TABLE llI-li.

---.
PA-3IP
PA-.'2-200
PA-32-JOO
PA-J2-1tl1.-301l
----PA-32R-300
PA-J2R-JOI.-301 T
PA-32RT-JOO
PA-J2Rl-300T
PI\-34-2001

P\-44-IXtil
L-______ __
ALTIMATIC IIIC APPLICABILITY CHART

1-40

.... 2:

..... 1-4 '"rj
002:
.....
(JQ
VI t::

>
IN
r'" I 9

IN

N
IN
I
N
VI
0
,-..
en
.....
><

iir
(')
(l)
'-'
ttl

'"rj
s:::
8-
(l)
-ut
>
- ::t.
s:::

.....
.....
(')
-
-
-
n

'<
0
t::
1. CONSOLE
2. ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER AND AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER
3. ATTITUDE GYRO
4. DIRECTIONAL GYRO/HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR

.....
5. ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT
6. RELAY BOX
7. ROLL SERVO
8. PITCH SERVO
9. PITCH TRIM SERVO
10. GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER
11. FLUX DETECTOR
12. NAV CONVERTER (1C707)
P
I
P
E
R

A
L
T
I
M
A
T
I
C

I
I
I
C

S
E
R
V
I
C
E

M
A
N
U
A
L

a
:

a
:

W

0

u
.

I
-
-
e
(

o
!

U

-
e
(

I
-
-
o

Z

.
.
.
I

0

0
:
:
:

i
=

o

e
(

I
-
:
:
>

:
:
>

l
-
e
(

- (
I
)

o

.
.
.
I

Z

e
(

e
(

I
-
a
:

Z

e
n

W

2

u
.

_

a
:

:
J

a
:

0

W
u
.

i
L
:
J

e
(

O
z

r
:
:

g

U

a
:
:
:
>

-
)
-

u
)
-
.
.
.
I
0

.
.
.
I
0
0
_
0
I
X
l
w
W
a
:
a
:
e
(
.
.
.
I
W
Z

o
a
:
:
:
>
I
-
:
:
>
)
-
(
I
)
(
I
)
w
l
-
o
(
l
)
O
O

(
l
)
I
-
I
-
U
I
-
e
(
.
.
.
I
J
:
O
J
:

o
x
U

O
.
.
.
l
I
-
_
.
.
.
I
W
O
!
:
:
:
>
!
:
e
(
)
-
.
.
.
I
e
(

"
:
N
M
.
.
r
L
t
i
a
:
i
,
.
.
:
a
j
o
i
d
"
:
N
M
.
.
r

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

D

u

o
n

.
.
.

-
\
Y

F
i
g
u
r
e

3
-
4
.

P
A
-
3
1
-
3
1
0
,

P
A
-
3
1
-
3
2
5
,

P
A
-
3
1
-
3
5
0

a
n
d

P
A
-
3
1
P

A
l
t
i
M
a
t
i
c

I
I
I
C

L
a
y
o
u
t

3
-
8

R
E
M
O
V
A
L

A
N
D

I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N

I
S
S
U
E
D
:

1
1
/
2
5
/
7
4

W
I
\()
'.;.l .
I
VI
""0--=
>::;--
I '.;.l
VolN
N I
IN
Vol,="
00
1. CONSOLE
2. ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER (PA-32-260. SIN 32-7500001
TO 7700023 AND PA-32-300. SIN 32-7540001 TO 7840045)
3. ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7800001
AND UP; PA-32-300, SIN 32-7840046 AND UP; PA-32R-300.
PA-32RT-3oo, PA-32RT-300T. PA-32-301. PA-32-30H.
PA-32R-301 AND PA-32R-30H)
4. AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7500001 TO
7700023; PA-32-3oo. SIN 32-7540001 TO 7840045 AND
PA-32R-300, SIN 32R-768oo01 TO 7780417)
5. AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER (PA-32-260. SIN 32-7800001 AND
UP; PA-32-3oo. SIN 32-7840046 AND UP; PA-32R-300.
SIN 32R-7780418 AND UP; PA-32RT-300. PA-32RT-300T.
PA-32-301. PA-32-301 T. PA-32R-301 AND PA-32R-301 T)
6. ATIITUDE GYRO
7. DIRECTIONAL GYRO AND/OR HORIZONTAL SITUATION
INDICATOR
8 ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT (PA-32-260. SIN 32-7500001 TO
7700023 AND PA-32-3oo. SIN 32-7540001 TO 7840045)
9. ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT (PA-32R-300. SIN 32R-7680002 TO
7780417)
10. ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT (PA-32-260. SIN 32-7800001 AND'UP;
PA-32-300. SIN 32-7840046 AND UP; PA-32R-3oo.
SIN 32R-7780418 AND UP; PA-32RT-300. PA-32RT-3OOT.
PA-32-301. PA-32-30H. PA-32R-301 AND PA-32R-30H)
11. RELAY BOX (PA-32-260. SIN 32-7500001 TO 7700023;
PA-32-300. SIN 32-7540001 TO 7840045 AND PA-32R-3oo.
SIN 32R-7680001 TO 7780417)
12. RELAY BOX (PA-32-260. SIN 32-7800001 AND UP;
PA-32-300. SIN 32-7840046 AND UP; PA-32R-3oo.
SIN 32R-7780418 AND UP; PA-32RT-3oo. PA-32RT-3OOT.
PA-32-301. PA-32-301 T. PA-32R-301 AND PA-32R-301 T)
13. ROLL SERVO
14 PITCH SERVO (PA-32-260 AND PA-32-300. SIN 32-7540001
TO 7840222)
15. PITCH SERVO (PA-32-300, SIN 32-7940001 AND UP;
PA-32R-300. PA-32RT-300. PA-32RT-300T. PA-32-301.
PA-32-30H. PA-32R-301 AND PA-32R-30H)
16. PITCH TRIM SERVO
17. FLUX DETECTOR (OPTION)
18. GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER (OPTION)
19. NAVCONVERTER __ ---------
W
I
.....
o
1. CONSOLE
2 ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER AND AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER
3. ATTITUDE GYRO
4. DIRECTIONAL GYRO/HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR
5. ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT
6. RELAY BOX
7. ROLL SERVO
8. PITCH SERVO
9. PITCH TRIM SERVO
10. GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER
11. FLUX DETECTOR
12. NAV CONVERTER
.Ql. . R12
L
10
w

-
-
(j
f
o

-
1. CONSOLE
;: AMPLIFIER
4. ATIITUDE
5. DIRECTIONAL GYRO
6. ALTITUDE HOLD
7. RELAY BOX
8. ROLL SERVO
9. PITCH TRIM SERVO
10. PITCH SERVO
10

C G
8
Gfl __
P
I
P
E
R

A
L
T
I
M
A
T
I
C

I
I
I
C

S
E
R
V
I
C
E

M
A
N
U
A
L

C
C

U
J

u
:
:
:

:
J

a
.

:
2

C
C

o

U

C
i

z

<
{

z

I
-
0

o

-
=
=

a
.

:
:
l

o

I
-

U
5

<
{

.
.
.
J

o

z

z

<
{

0

C
C

U
J

C
C

u
:
:
:

0

:
J

J
:
I
-
a
.

"
-
:
2

O
z

0

<
{

C
C
:
:
l

>

0
>
-
0

C
C

:
2
c
c
<
.
!
J
.
.
.
J

U
J

C
2
>
-
.
.
.
J
0

0
0
(
1
)

U
J
u
U
J
o
U
J
o
c
c
c
c
-
.
.
.
J
-
O
_
O
C
O
U
J
U
J
C
C

o
c
c
:
:
l
l
-
:
:
l
>
-
(
I
)
(
I
)
I
-
(
l
)
l
-
u
I
-
U
I
-
<
!
'
.
.
.
J
J
:
J
:

z
U
J
-
U
J
i
=
.
.
J
.
.
.
J
u
u

o
.
.
.
J
l
=
s
.
.
.
J
U
J
O
I
-
I
-
U
U
J
<
{
O
C
C
c
c
a
:
:
:
a
:
:
:

"
'
:
N
C
"
i
'
<
i
L
l
"
i
t
c
i
r
'
a
j
a
i

L
t
:
I

e
n

M

F
i
g
u
r
e

3
-
7
a
.

P
A
-
2
8
R
T
-
2
0
1

a
n
d

P
A
-
2
8
R
T
-
2
0
1
T

A
l
t
i
M
a
t
i
c

I
I
I
C

L
a
y
o
u
t

3
-
1
2

R
E
M
O
V
A
L

A
N
D

I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N

R
E
V
I
S
E
D
:

1
1
/
3
0
/
7
9

PIPER ALTIMATIC IITC SERVICE MANUAL
PA-23-260 (Six Place) E & F Model's
AILERON CABLE
BRIDLE CABLE CLAMP
x = TENSION OF AILERON CABLE BETWEEN BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS
Y = TENSION OF BRIDLE CABLE
Z = AIRPLANES SPECIFIED AILERON CABLE TENSION
AILERON CABLE
PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
x = TENSION OF AILERON CABLE BETWEEN BRIDLE CABLE rLAMPS
Figure 3-8. Roll Servo Cable Tension Diagram
REVISED: 8/10/78
"
I' oJ
I I
~
.. /
If'
3-13
AILERON CABLE
PA-28RT-201 ;-20lT,
PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T,
PA-32-301, PA-32-30lT,
PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30lT
BRIDLE CABLE CLAMP
PA-34200T and PA44180
BRIDLE CABLE CLAMP
AILERON CABLE
Figure 3-8. Roll Servo Cable Tension Diagram (cont.)
3-14 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
REVISED: 11/30/79
PA23250 (Six Place) E & F Model's
BRIDLE CABLE CLAMP
x = STABILATOR CABLE TENSION AFT OF BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS
Z = STABILATOR CABLE TENSION FORWARD OF BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS
PA31310, PA31325, PA31350 and PA31P
Figure 3-9. Pitch and Rudder Servo Cable Tension Diagram
REVISED: 8/10/78
3-15
3-16
STABILATOR CABLE
SERVO LOCATION FOR
PA-32-260, PA-32-300
(EARLY MODELS)
PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T,
PA-32-301, PA-32-301 T,
PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30H
SERVO LOCATION FOR
ALL OTHER MODELS
____ BRIDLE CABLE CLAMP
STABILATOR CABLE
x = STABILATOR CABLE TENSION BETWEEN BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS
Z = AIRPLANE SPECIFIED STABILATOR CABLE TENSION
PA-34200T
CABLE CLAMP
x = STABILATOR CABLE TENSION BETWEEN BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS
Z = AIRPLANE SPECIFIED STABILATOR CABLE TENSION
Figure 3-9. Pitch and Rudder Servo Cable Tension Diagram (cont.)
REVISED: 11/30/19
PIPER ALTIMA TIC m C SERVICE MANUAL
PA-28RT-201 ;-20H and PA-44-180
BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS
STABILATOR CABLE
y 0 TENSION OF BRIDLE CABLE
Z 0 AIRPLANE SPECIFIED STABILATOR CABLE TENSION
Figure 3-9. Pitch and Rudder Servo Cable Tension Diagram (cont.)
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
REMOV AL AND INST ALLA TION
REVISED: 11/30/79
3-17
PIPER ALTIMATIC m C SERVICE MANUAL
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
3-18 REMOV AL AND INSTALLATION
ADDED: 8/10/78
CONSOLE COVER
RETAINING SCREW
FACE PLATE
POTENTIOMETERS
ROll COMMAND KNOB
Figure 3-10. AltiMatic III C Console
3-3. CONSOLE (ALTIMATIC IIlC). The exploded view of the AltiMatic IIlC Console is shown in
illustration form in this section. Although the location varies in each airplane, the Flight Controller is the
same in all installations.
3-4. REMOVAL OF CONSOLE. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models.
The console is located in the lower left section of the instrument panel.
a. Remove the Roll Command Knob.
b. Remove the four screws securing the face plate and remove face plate.
c. Remove the console retaining screw. It is the screw located to the left of the trim meter on the
console.
d.
e.
Disconnect the electrical harness plugs CD-20 and CD-40 from the rear of the console.
Remove the console from the airplane.
3-5. INSTALLATION OF CONSOLE. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to Figure 3-10.)
a. Place the console in the instrument panel cutout.
b. Connect the electrical harness plugs, CD-20 and CD-40, to the rear of the console. (Make sure
spring clip on CD-20 is secured.)
c. Secure the console and install and secure the face plate.
d. Install roll command knob and secure.
e. Check console operation. (Refer to Section V.)
REVISED: 8/10/78
3-19
PIPER A LTIM A TIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-6. REMOVAL OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's.
NOTE
The Electronic Trim Amplifier for the AltiMatic lliC is located on
a mounting bracket which is secured to the top of the Autopilot
Amplifier. Therefore, the Electronic Trim Amplifier and Autopilot
Amplifier is removed from the airplane as one assembly.
The amplifier is located on the radio shelf in the aft section of the forward baggage compartment.
a. Access to the amplifier is through the forward baggage compartment door.
b. Disconnect the electrical harness from the amplifier by removing the two knurled screws from
the large amplifier connector and removing the connector from the amplifier.
c. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the electronic trim amplifier.
d. Unfasten the two fasteners that secure the amplifier to the mounting bracket.
e. Remove the autopilot amplifier and electronic trim amplifier from the airplane as one unit.
f. To remove the electronic trim amplifier and mounting bracket from the autopilot amplifier,
simply remove screws and lock washers securing the mounting bracket to the autopilot amplifier.
3-7. REMOVAL OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's.
The electronic trim amplifier is located on the radio shelf in the aft section of the forward baggage
compartment.
b. Remove amplifier per instructions in previous paragraph.
c. Remove the four screws securing the electronic trim amplifier to the mounting bracket and
remove amplifier from mounting bracket.
3-8. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models.
(Refer to Figure 3-11.)
a. Place the electronic trim amplifier on the mounting bracket and secure with attaching screws.
b. Place the mounting bracket with trim amplifier attached on the autopilot amplifier and secure
with attaching screws.
c. Install autopilot amplifier as per the instructions in the following paragraph.
3-9. INSTALLATION OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to
Figure 3-11.) .
a. With the large thirty pin receptable facing forward, place the amplifier on the mounting bracket
located on the radio shelf in the aft section of the forward baggage compartment and secure with the
fasteners.
b. With the cables from the harness fanning to the left side of the airplane, connect the harness to
the autopilot amplifier by securing with the two screws previously removed from the receptacle.
c. Connect the electrical connectors to the electronic trim amplifier.
d. Check amplifier operation. (Refer to Section V.)
3-10. REMOVAL OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's.
The Attitude Gyro is located in the left instrument panel.
a. Pull the control wheel, that is at the opposite side of the instrument panel from where the
shock-mounted panel is to be removed, to its aftmost position and secure with a cord tied between the
wheel and around the seat back.
I 3-20
UEVISED: 8/10/78
NOTE
The Electronic Trim Amplifier a nd
the Autopilot Amplifier are not
located together on all models.
Figure 3-11. AltiMatic III C, Electronic Trim Amplifier
and Autopilot Amplifier
b. Pad the control wheel tube with foam rubber or similar material.
c. Remove the self-locking nuts that secure the floating panel to its shock mounts. With an open
end wrench held next to the back side of the panel, hold the rubber mounts to eliminate twisting as the
nuts are being removed.
d. Pull the panel back and allow it to rest on the padded control wheel tube.
e. Unscrew the electrical connector from the post light(s).
f. Disconnect the electrical connection from the instrument.
g. Disconnect the vacuum line and the relief line from the instrument. Identify hoses to facilitate
reinstallation. To prevent contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hoses and the
instrument ports.
h. Remove the post light(s) by turning off nut.
i. Remove the screws securing the instrument to the instrument panel and remove instrument.
3-11. INSTALLATION OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to Figure
3-12.)
a. Position the instrument in its proper panel cutout and secure with appropriate screws.
b. Remove any caps which were placed over the hoses and the instrument ports.
c. Connect hoses to proper ports of instrument.
d. Connect the electrical connection to the instrument.
e. Connect the electrical connector to the post light(s) and tighten connector finger tight.
f. Ascertain that one end of the ground strap is placed over the panel side of the shock mount stud.
g. Place the floating panel in position and allow the shock mount attachment studs to protrude
through the panel. Install and tighten attachment nuts.
REVISED: 8/10/78
3-21
PIPER ALTIMATIC Inc SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3-12. AltiMatic III C Attitude Gyro
h. Remove the padding and release the control wheel.
i. Check operation of instrument. (Refer to Section V.)
j. Check post light operation.
3-12. REMOVAL OF DIRECTIONAL GYRO AND/OR HORIZONTAL SITUATION
INDICATOR. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models.
The Directional Gyro and/or Horizontal Situation Indicator is located in the left instrument panel.
a. Pull the control wheel that is at the opposite side of the instrument panel from where the
b. Pad the control wheel tube with foam rubber or similar material.
c. Remove the self-locking nuts that secure the floating panel to its shock mounts. With an open
end wrench held next to the back of the panel, hold the rubber mounts to eliminate twisting as the nuts are
being removed.
d. Pull the panel back and allow it to rest on the padded control wheel tube.
e. Unscrew the electrical connection from the post light(s).
f. Disconnect the electrical connection from the instrument.
g. Disconnect the vacuum line and relief line from the instrument. Identify hoses to facilitate
instrument ports.
I 3-22
h. Remove the post light(s) by turning off nut.
REVISED: 8/10/78
3-13. INSTALLATION OF DIRECTIONAL GYRO AND/OR HORIZONTAL SITUATION
INDICATOR. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to Figure 3-13.)
e. Connect the electrical connector to the post light(s) and tighten connector finger tight.
3-14. REMOVAL OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's.
The altitude hold unit is located behind the left instrument panel directly forward of the console. The
unit is secured to a mounting bracket with strap clamps which in turn is shock mounted to the fuselage.
a. Access to the unit is from beneath the left instrument panel.
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the altitude hold unit.
c. Disconnect the static hose by releasing the clamps and sliding the hose off the port. To prevent
contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hose and the instrument port.
d. Loosen the clamp screws securing the unit to the mounting bracket.
e. Remove the altitude hold unit from the airplane.
Figure 3-13. AltiMatic IIi C Directional Gyro/Horizontal
Situation Indicator
REVISED: 8/10/78
3-23
Figure 3-14. AltiMatic III C Altitude Hold Unit (lC407) and Relay Box
3-15. INSTALLATION OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to
Figure 3-14.)
a. Position the altitude hold unit on the mounting bracket located behind the left instrument panel
directly forward of the console. Position unit so static port is pointing aft and secure by tightening clamp
screws to 5 1 inch pounds.
b. Remove any caps which were placed over the ends of the hose and the static port.
c. Connect the hose from the rate of climb indicator to the port marked static on the unit and
secure with clamp.
d. Connect the electrical connection to the unit.
e. Check operation of altitude hold unit. (Refer to Section Y.)
3-16. REMOVAL OF RELAY BOX. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's.
The relay box is located on a mounting bracket behind the left instrument panel directly forward of
the console.
a. Access to the relay box is from beneath the left instrument panel.
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the relay box. ,
c. Remove the screws and spacers securing the relay box to the mounting bracket.
d. Remove the relay box from the airplane.
3-17. INSTALLATION OF RELAY BOX. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to Figure 3-14.)
a. Position the relay box on the mounting bracket located behind the left instrument panel directly
forward of the console. With the electrical connector to the right, install spacers and secure with
appropriate screws.
b. Connect the electrical connection to the relay box.
c. Check operation of relay box. (Refer to Section V.)
I 3-24
UEVISED: 8/10/78
3-18. REMOVAL OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-23-2S0 Six Place) E & F Model's.
The roll servo is located beneath the pilot's seat forward of the main spar. The mounting bracket and
roll servo is removed as one unit.
a. Remove the pilot's seat from the airplane.
b. Roll back carpet on tunnel beneath pilot's seat over the main spar.
c. Remove attaching screws in cover over servo assembly and remove cover.
d. Disconnect the electrical connection from the servo.
e. Paint the aileron balance cable where the bridle cable clamps are attached and then remove the
two bridle cable clamps. (DO NOT paint the bridle cable end terminals as one terminal is painted red to
facilitate reinstallation.)
f. Remove the six bolts, washers and nuts that secure the bracket and roll servo to the airframe and
remove servo and mounting bracket from the airplane.
g. Remove the four bolts, washers and nuts that secure the roll servo to the mounting bracket and
remove roll servo from mounting bracket.
3-19. INSTALLATION OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-23-2S0 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to Figure 3-1S.)
a. Insert bridle cable pin in capstan and tighten bridle cable pin lock screw.
b. Wrap the long end of the bridle cable three-quarters of a tum clockwise on the lower capstan
grooves and the short end of the bridle cable with the red ball one and one-quarter turns counterclockwise
on the upper capstan grooves.
c. Adjust the cable guards on the servo to provide a gap of .031 of an inch between the capstan and
guard.
d. Position the roll servo on the mounting bracket and secure with the four bolts, washers and nuts
previously removed.
l BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
SERVO COVER
CAPSTAN
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
REO BALL
Figure 3-1S. Roll Servo Installation, PA-23-2S0 (Six Place)
E & F Models
REVISED: 8/10/78
3-25
e. Place the mounting bracket with roll servo ,attached in its proper position and secure with the six
bolts, washers and nu ts previously removed.
f. REFER TO FIGURE 3-8 AND CHECK THAT CONTROL CABLE TENSION(Z) IS ADJUSTED
TO 40 + 8 - 0 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain area on cable
where clamp attaches is clean, dry and free of all lubricants and anti-corrosive additives. Attach the bridle
cable to the aileron balance cable. The bridle cable is drawn to the balance cable and attached with clamps
at the previously painted locations on the balance cable. The end of the bridle cable with the red ball
extends toward the right side of the airplane. (Refer to Figure 3-15.) (Should the balance cable not be
painted, position the control wheel in neutral and align the bridle cable pin, installed in the capstan, as
shown in Figure 3-15.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the bridle cable tension (Y) is equal to the control
cable tension between the bridle cable clamps (X) as shown in Figure 3-8 without increasing the control
cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward. At no time shall the bridle cable tension be greater
than the control cable tension between the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable tension will lower the control
cable tension between the two bridle cable clamps. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55 5
inch-pounds.
g. Connect the electrical connection to the servo.
CAUTION
Check security of bridle cable clamps and the bridle cable capstan
pin. To do this, turn on the master switch and with the roll
command knob centered place the roll engage rocker switch in the
ON position to engage the roll servo. Tum the control wheel
manually to the extreme left and right positions to ascertain the
clamps and pin do not change position. Next operate the servo
electrically by rotating the roll command knob to its extreme left
and right position. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps
and pin do not change position. The clutch will slip during these
operations.
h. Install servo cover on tunnel over main spar and secure with appropriate screws.
i. Install carpet and pilot's seat and secure.
3-20. REMOVAL OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's.
The pitch servo is located aft of the rear baggage compartment on the lower fuselage.
a. Remove attaching screws from the hat shelf panel in rear baggage compartment and remove
panel.
b. Remove attaching screws in aft panel of rear baggage compartment and remove panel.
c. Disconnect the electrical connection from the servo.
d. Paint the stabilator control cables where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the
e. Remove the bolts, washers and nuts securing the servo to the mounting bracket and remove the
servo from the airplane.
3-21. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E Model. (Refer to Figure 3-16.)
a. Install bridle cable pin in capstan and tighten bridle cable pin lock screw.
b. Wrap the end of the bridle cable with the red terminal one and three-quarter turns clockwise
from the bridle cable pin on the upper capstan grooves and the other end of the bridle cable three-quarters
of a tum counterclockwise from the bridle cable pin on the lower capstan grooves.
I 3-26
REVISED: 8/10/78
PIPER ALTIMATIC Ille SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3-16. Pitch Servo Installation, PA-23-250
(Six Place) E Model
c. Adjust the ~ b l e guards on the servo to provide a gap of .031 of an inch between the capstan and
guard.
d. Position the servo on the mounting bracket and secure with the four bolts, washers and nuts
previously removed.
e. REFER TO FIGURE 3-9 AND CHECK THAT THE CONTROL CABLE TENSION (Z) IS
ADJUSTED TO 35 4 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain area
on cable where clamp attaches is clean, dry and free of a1llubricants and anti-corrosive additives. Attach the
bridle cable to the stabilator control cables. The bridle cable is drawn to the stabilator control cables and
attached with clamps at the previously painted locations. The end of the bridle cable with the red ball is
attached to the left control cable. (Refer to Figure 3-16.) (Should the stabilator cables not be painted,
position the control wheel full forward and with the servo disengaged, align the bridle cable pin installed in
the capstan as shown in Figure 3-16. Adjust the bridle cable clamps so that the bridle cable tension (Y) as
shown in Figure 3-9 is 15 2 pounds. Check the control cable tension forward of the bridle cable clamps
and adjust, if necessary to obtain 35 4 pounds. If the control cables require adjustment, it will be
necessary to readjust the bridle cable tension to 15 2 pounds. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55
5 inch-lbs.
f. Connect the electrical connection to the servo.
REVISED: 8/10/78
3-27
CAUTION
pin. To do this, turn on the master switch and with the pitch
command disc centered place the roll engage rocker switch and the
pitch mode switch in the ON position. Move the control wheel
manually to the extreme fore and aft positions to ascertain the
electrically by rotating the pitch command disc full UP and full
DOWN. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do
not change position. The clutch will slip during these operations.
g. Install aft panel in rear baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screws.
h. Install hat shelf panel in rear baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screws.
3-22. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-23-250 Six Place) F Model. (Refer to Figure 3-17.)
b. Wrap the end of the bridle cable with the red terminal two turns counterclockwise from the bridle
cable pin on the upper capstan grooves and the other end of the bridle cable one-half turn clockwise from the
bridle cable pin on the lower capstan grooves.
guard.
d. Position the servo on the mounting bracket and secure with the four bolts, washers and nuts
previously removed.
ADJUSTED TO 35 4 POUNDS PRIOR TO A IT ACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain area
on cable where clamp attaches is clean, dry and free of all lubricants and anti-corrosive additives. Attach the
bridle cable to the stabilator control cables. The bridle cable is drawn to the stabilator control cables and
attached with clamps at the previously painted locations. The end of the bridle cable with the red ball is
attached to the left control cable. (Refer to Figure 3-17.) (Should the stabilator cables not be painted,
position the control wheel full forward and with the servo disengaged, align the bridle cable pin installed in
the capstan as shown in Figure 3-17.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so that the bridle cable tension (Y) as
shown in Figure 3-9 is 15 t 2 pounds. Check the control cable tension forward of the bridle cable clamps
and adjust, if necessary to obtain 35 4 pounds. If the control cables require adjustment, it will be
necessary to readjust the bridle cable tension to 15 2 pounds. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55
5 inch-Ibs.
13-28
REVISED: 8/10/78
PIPER ALTIMATIC IDC SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3-17. Pitch Servo Installation, PA-23-250
(Six Place) F Model
CAUTION
electrically by rotating the pitch command disc full UP and full
DOWN. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do
h. Install hat shelf panel in rear baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screws.
REVISED: 8/10/78
3-29
3-23. REMOVAL OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models.
The pitch trim servo is located on the upper fuselage area above the ceiling panel in the rear baggage
compartment.
a. Remove the attaching screws in the ceiling panel in the rear baggage compartment and remove
ceiling panel.
b. Remove attaching screws in the hat shelf panel in the rear baggage compartment and remove
panel, then remove attaching screws in the aft panel of the rear baggage compartment and remove panel to
gain access to turnbuckles to release the trim cable tension.
NOTE
To maintain cable routing of the trim cable during removal and
installation of the trim servo, it is recommended that a service aid
be fabricated from shop material such as two bridle cable clamps
and a short length of cable or two blocks of wood pre-drilled with
a bolt and nut inserted to maintain cable routing.
d. Remove the four bolts, washers and nuts securing the servo to the mounting bracket.
e. Unwrap trim cable from capstan and idler pulley and remove the servo from the airplane.
3-24. INSTALLATION OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-23-250 six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to Figure
3-18.)
a. Position the pitch trim servo on the mounting bracket and secure with bolts, washers and nuts
previously removed.
b. Route the trim cable from the forward part of the airplane around the top capstan groove to the
idler pulley and around the bottom capstan groove to the aft section of the airplane, completing a figure
eight.
c. Tighten the trim cable (on aircraft incorporating the Stabilator Bungee Spring Installation, the
Bungee Spring must be disconnected when adjusting cable tension) to obtain 15 3 lbs. cable tension.
I 3-30
d. Connect the electrical connection to the servo.
e. Check servo operation. (Refer to Section V.)
f. Install aft panel in rear baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screws.
g. Install hat shelf panel in rear baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screws.
h. Install ceiling panel in rear baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screws.
REVISED: 8/10/78
IDLER PULLEY
Figure 3-18. Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-23-250
(Six Place) E & F Models
3-25. REMOVAL OF GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models.
The gyro slaving amplifier is located on upper right forward section of the pedestal beneath the right
instrument panel.
a. Disconnect the electrical connection from the amplifier.
b. Remove the screws securing the amplifier to the pedestal.
c. Remove the amplifier from the airplane.
3-26. INSTALLATION OF GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer
to Figure 3-19.)
a. With the electrical connector facing forward place the amplifier on the upper right forward
section of the pedestal beneath the right instrument panel and secure with appropriate screws.
b. Connect the electrical connection to the amplifier.
c. Check amplifier operation. (Refer to Section V.)
3-27. REMOVAL OF FLUX DETECTOR. (PA-23-250 Six Place) 13 & F Models.
The flux detector is located aft of the rear baggage area on a mounting bracket on the left side of the
fuselage.
a. Remove attaching screws from the hat shelf panel in rear baggage compartment and remove
panel.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Remove the screws attaching the aft panel in the rear baggage area and remove the panel.
Disconnect the electrical connection from the flux detector.
Mark the original position of the flux detector.
Remove the three screws securing the flux detector to the mounting bracket.
Remove the flux detector from the airplane.
REVISED: 8/10/18
3-31
, 3-32
Figure 3-19. AltiMatic III C, Gyro Slaving Amplifier
Figure 3-20. AltiMatic III C, Flux Detector
REVISED: 8/10/78
Figure 3-21. AltiMatic III C, NAV Converter (lC707)
3-28. INSTALLATION OF PLUX DETECTOR. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to Figure
3-20.)
a. Position the flux detector on the mounting bracket with the label side up and the arrow pointing
forward, and secure with original screws.
b. Connect the electrical connection to the flux detector.
c. Check flux detector operation. (Refer to Section V.)
d. Install the aft panel in the rear baggage area and secure with appropriate screws ..
e. Install hat shelf panel in rear baggage compartmel1t and secure with appropriate screws.
3-29. REMOVAL OF NAV CONVERTER (lC707). (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models.
The NA V Converter is located on the left rear section of the radio shelf aft of the forward baggage
compartment.
a. Access to the converter is through the forward baggage compartment door.
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the NA V converter.
c. Remove the three screws and nuts securing the NA V converter to the radio shelf.
d. Remove the NA V converter from the airplane.
3-30. INSTALLATION OF NAV CONVERTER (lC707). (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to
Figure 3-21.)
a. With the electrical connector facing forward place the NA V converter on the left rear section of
the radio shelf aft of the forward baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screws and nuts.
b. Connect the electrical connection to the NA V converter.
c. Check NAV converter operation. (Refer to Section V.)
REVISED: 8/10/78
3-33
3-31. REMOVAL OF CONSOLE. (PA-3 1-3 10, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3IP)
The console is located in the top of the control quadrant pedestal.
a. Remove the roll command knob.
console.
d. . Remove the largest access plate from the right side of the control pedestal.
e. Disconnect the electrical harness plugs, CD-20 and CD-40, from the rear of the console.
f. Remove the console from the airplane.
3-32. INSTALLATION OF CONSOLE. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3IP) (Refer to Figure
3-10.)
a. Place the console in the cutout in the top of the control quadrant pedestal.
b. Connect the electrical harness plugs CD-20 and CD-40, to the rear of the console. (Make sure
e. Install access plate on the right side of the pedestal and secure.
f. Check console operation. (Refer to Section V.)
3-33. REMOVAL OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, and PA-31P)
NOTE
The Electronic Trim Amplifier for the AltiMatic lIlC is located on
a mounting bracket which is secured to the top of the Autopilot
Amplifier. Therefore, the Electronic Trim Amplifier and Autopilot
Amplifier is removed from the airplane as one assembly.
The amplifier is located on the right side of the radio shelf aft of the forward baggage compartment.
b. Disconnect the electrical harness from the amplifier by removing the two knurled screws from
f. To remove the electronic trim amplifier and mounting bracket from the autopilot amplifier,
simply remove screws and lock washers securing the mounting bracket to the autopilot amplifier.
3-34. REMOVAL OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-3 1-3 10, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3IP)
The electronic trim amplifier is located on the right side of the .radio shelf aft of the forward baggage
compartment.
c. Remove the four screws securing the electronic trim amplifier to the mounting bracket and
remove amplifier from mounting bracket.
3-35. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and
PA-3IP) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
I 3-34
UEVISED: 8/10/78
b. Place the mounting bracket with trim amplifier attached on the autopilot amplifier and secure
with attaching screws.
3-36. INSTALLATION OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and
PA-31P) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
a. With the large thirty pin receptable facing forward, place the amplifier on the mounting bracket
located on the right side of the radio shelf aft of the forward baggage compartment and secure with
fasteners.
b. With the cables from the harness fanning to the left side of the airplane, connect the harness to
the autopilot amplifier by securing with the two screws previously removed from the receptable.
3-37. REMOVAL OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
The Attitude Gyro is located in the left instrument panel.
a. Unsnap the forward side of the instrument panel cover and slide forward enough to allow it to
move from its attachment slot. Remove the cover from over the panel.
b. Pull the control wheel that is at the opposite side of the instrument panel from where the
c. Pad the control wheel tube with foam rubber or similar material.
d. Remove the four self-locking nuts that secure the floating panel to its shock mounts. There is one
nut located on the panel at each side of the control wheel tube and one nut located at each side of the
panel near the top. With an open end wrench held next to the back side of the panel, hold the rubber
mounts to eliminate twisting as the nuts are being removed.
e. Pull the panel back and allow it to rest on the padded control wheel tube.
f. Unscrew the electrical connector from the post lights.
g. Disconnect the electrical connection from the instrument.
h. Disconnect the vacuum line and the relief line from the instrument. Identify hoses to facilitate
instrument ports.
i. Remove the screws securing the instrument to the instrument panel and remove the instrument.
3-38. INSTALLATION OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) (Refer
to Figure 3-12.)
e. Connect the electrical connector to the post lights and tighten connector finger tight.
REVISED: 8/10/78
3-35
INDICATOR. (PA-3l-3l0, PA-3l-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3lP)
a. Unsnap the forward side of the instrument panel cover and slide forward enough to allow it to
move from its attachment slot. Remove the cover from over the panel.
b. Pull the control wheel that is at the opposite side of the instrument panel from where the
c. Pad the control wheel tube with foam rubber or similar material.
d. Remove the four self-locking nuts that secure the floating panel to its shock mounts. There is one
nut located on the panel at each side of the control wheel tube and one nut located at each side of the
panel, near the top. With an open end wrench held next to the back side of the panel, hold the rubber
mounts to eliminate twisting as the nuts are being removed.
e. Pull the panel back and allow it to rest on the padded control wheel tube.
f. Unscrew the electrical connector from the post lights.
g. Disconnect the electrical connection from the instrument.
h. Disconnect the vacuum line and relief line from the instrument. Identify hoses to facilitate
instrument ports.
3-40. INST ALLA TION OF DIRECTIONAL GYRO AND/OR HORIZONTAL SITUATION
INDICATOR. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3IP) (Refer to Figure 3-13.)
e. Connect the electrical connector to the post lights and tighten connector finger tight.
3-41. REMOVAL OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3IP)
The altitude hold unit on the early PA-3l-310/325, PA-31-350 and all PA-31P model aircraft is
located behind the right instrument panel up near the firewall. On the later PA-31-310/325 and PA-31-350
model aircraft the unit is located on the upper right forward side of the bulkhead aft of the radio shelf. This
unit is secured to a mounting bracket with strap clamps which in turn is shock mounted to the existing
fuselage bracket and/or bulkhead.
a. Access to the unit is from beneath the right instrument panel and/or by removing the access plate
on right side of the nose section at fuselage sta. 81 (PA-31-310/325) or fuselage sta. 57 (PA-31-350).
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the altitude hold unit.
c. Disconnect the static hose by releasing the clamp and sliding the hose off the port. To prevent
contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hose and the instrument port.
I 3-36
REVISED: 8/10/78
PIPER AL TIMATIC IIlC SERVICE MANU AL
3-42. INSTALLATION OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and
a .. (Early PA-31-310, PA-3l-325, PA-3l-350 and all PA-3lP model aircraft) Position the altitude
hold unit, with the static port pointing aft, on the mounting bracket located behind the right instrument
panel up near the firewall. Secure unit by tightening clamp screws to 5 1 inch pounds.
b. (Later PA-31-31 0, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 model aircraft) Position the altitude hold unit, with
the static port pointing outboard, on the mounting bracket on the upper right forward side of the bulkhead
aft of the radio s h ~ l f Secure unit by tightening clamp screws to 5 1 inch pounds.
c. Remove any caps which were placed over the ends of the hose and the instrument port.
d. Connect the hose from the rate of climb indicator to the port marked static on the unit and
secure with clamps.
e. Connect the electrical connection to the unit.
f. Check operation of altitude hold unit. (Refer to Section V.)
g. Install access plate on right side of nose section' and secure.
3-43. REMOVAL OF RELAY BOX. (PA-31-3l0, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
The relay is located on the existing brake support channel brace behind the left instrument panel to
the left of the pilots control column.
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the relay box.
c. Remove the screws securing the relay box to the brake support channel brace.
3-44. INSTALLATION OF RELAY BOX. (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) (Refer to
Figure 3-14.)
a. Position the relay box with electrical connection pointing forward on the brake support channel
brace, located behind the left instrument panel to the left of the pilots control column. Secure with
appropriate screws.
3-45. REMOVAL OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
The roll servo is located in the lower section of the left wing between wing sta. 49.0 and sta. 58.5 aft
of the wheel well bulkhead.
a. Remove the access plate from the bottom wing skin aft of the wheel well bulkhead by removing
attaching screws.
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the servo.
c. Prior to removing the roll servo the center inspection plate in the aft bulkhead of the wheel well
and the access plate at wing sta. 67.50 must be removed to gain access to the bridle cable clamps.
d. Paint the aileron balance cable where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the
e. Remove the four bolts, washers and nuts securing the roll servo to the mounting brackets.
f. Remove the roll servo from the airplane.
3-46. INSTALLATION OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-3l-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3IP) (Refer to
Figure 3-22.)
b. Wrap the bridle cable one-half turn each direction around the capstan from the bridle cable pin.
guard.
REVISED: 8/10/78
3-37
PIPER ALTIMATIC HIC SERVICE MANUAL
BRIDLE CABLE CLAMP
SERVO
CABLE GUARD
BRIDLE CABLE PIH
Figure 3-22. Roll Servo Installation, PA-31-31O,
PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
BRIDLE CABLE CLAMP
d. Position the roll servo on the mounting brackets and secure with the four bolts, washers and nuts
previously removed.
ADJUSTED TO 35.1.2 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain
area on cable where clamp attaches is clean, dry and free of all lubricants and anti-corrosive additives. Attach
the bridle cable to the aileron control cable. The bridle cable is drawn to the aileron control cable and attached
with clamps at the previously painted locations on the control cable. The end of the bridle cable with the
red ball extends to the inboard section of the wing. (Should the aileron cable not be painted, position the
control wheel in neutral and align the bridle cable pin installed in the capstan as shown in Figure 3-22.)
Adjust the bridle cable clamps so that the bridle cable tension (Y) is equal to the control cable tension
between the bridle cable clamps (X) 17 2 pounds without increasing the control cable tension from the
bridle cable clamps outward. At no time shall the bridle cable tension be greater than the control cable
tcnsion between the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable tension willlowcr the control cabJc tension between
the two bridle cable clamps. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55.! 5 inch pounds.
3-38
CAUTION
pin. To do tllis, turn on the master switch and with the roll
command knob centered place the roll engage rocker switch in the
ON position to engage the roll servo. Turn the control wheel
manually to the extreme left and right position to ascertain the
electrically by rotating the roll command knob to its extreme left
REVISED: 10/16/81
and right position. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps
and pin do not change position. The clutch will slip during these
operations.
g. Install and secure the center inspection plate in the aft bulkhead of the wheel well, the access
plate at wing sta. 67.50, and the access plate aft of the wheel well bulkhead between wing sta. 49.0 and sta.
58.5.
347. REMOVAL OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-3l-350 and PA-31P)
The pitch servo is located aft of the rear baggage compartment on the center of the bulkhead at sta.
317.75.
a. (PA-3l-31O, PA-3l-325 and PA-31-350) Remove the screws securing the aft panel in the rear
baggage compartment and remove panel. Remove the access plate on the left side of the fuselage between
sta. 317.75 and sta. 332 by removing the screws securing the access plate to the fuselage.
b. (PA-31P only.) Remove the access plate on the left side of the fuselage between sta. 274 and sta.
296 by turning the screw type fasteners to release the panel and remove the access plates on both the left
and right side of the fuselage between sta. 317.75 and sta. 332 by removing the screws securing the access
plates to the fuselage.
d. The bridle cable is attached to the bellcrank. The end of the bridle cable with the turnbuckle is
attached to the lower part of the bellcrank.
e. Loosen the bridle cable turnbuckle attached to the lower part of the bellcrank to release the
bridle cable tension.
BRIDLE
CABLE
PIN
o
CABLE
GUARD
8 LBS . I ~ ~ .
"
~ = = = r
.
Figure 3-23. Pitch Servo Installation, PA-31-31O,
PA-3l-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
REVISED: 8/10/78
EXISTING ACCESS OPENING
RT SIDE
FWD . .--J
3-39
PIPER ALTIMATIC HIC SERVICE MANUAL
f. Remove the cotter pin and nut from both the upper and lower bolts in the bellcrank to remove
the bridle cable.
g. Remove the four bolts, washers and nuts securing the pitch servo to the mounting bracket.
h. Remove the pitch servo from the airplane.
3-48. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) (Refer to
Figure 3-23.)
b. Wrap the end of the bridle cable terminating with a turnbuckle one and three-quarter turns
clockwise from the pin on the lower capstan grooves and the other end of the bridle cable one and
one-quarter turns counterclockwise from the pin on the upper capstan grooves.
guard.
d. Position the pitch servo on the mounting bracket and secure with the bolts, washers and nuts
previously removed. _
I-e. REFER TO FIGURE 3-9 AND CHECK THAT THE ELEVATOR CABLE TENSION (X)
FORWARD OFTHE BELLCRANK ISADJUSTEDT020+2 POUNDS PRIOR TOATTACHINGTHE
BRIDLE CABLE TO THE BELLCRANK. Attach the bridle cable to the bellcrank. The bridle cable is
drawn around pulleys and installed over both the upper and lower bolts in the bellcrank. The end of the bridle
cable with the turnbuckle should be attached to the lower arm of the bellcrank. Secure bridle cable to bellcrank
with nut and cotter pin previously removed. With the elevator controls in neutral POSITION aline the bridle
I
cable pin in the capstan as shown in Figure 3-23. Adjut the turnbuckle until a deflection of 1/2 inch at
the mIdpOint between turnbuckle and bulkhead (sta. 317.75) will produce 8 lbs. I. (Pull on fish scale or
equivalent as shown in fig. 3-23.) Safety the bridle cable turnbuckle.
f. Connect the electrical connection to the servo. -
g. Check servo operation. (Refer to Section V.)
h. (PA-3l-3l0, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 only.) Install aft panel in rear baggage compartment and
secure with appropriate screws and install the access plate on the left side of the fuselage between sta.
317.75 and sta. 332 and secure with appropriate screws.
i. (PA-31P only.) Install the access plate on the left side of the fuselage between sta. 274 and sta.
296 and secure with screw type fasteners and install the access plates on both the left and right side of the
fuselage between sta. 317.75 and sta. 332 and secure with appropriate screws.
NOTE
With pitch servo installation completed, the elevator system must
be checked for frictional resistance. Depending on the airplane
being serviced, refer to either the PA-31, PA-31-350 or PA-3IP
Airframe Service Manual for the test procedure.
3-49. REMOVAL OF RUDDER SERVO. (PA-3l-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
The rudder servo is located on mounting brackets aft of the rear baggage compartment between sta.
274 and sta. 296.
a. (PA-3l-3l0, PA-3l-325 and PA-31-350 only.) Remove the access plate on the right side of the
fuselage between sta. 274 and sta. 296 by removing the screws securing the access plate to the fuselage.
b. (PA-31P only.) Remove the access plate on the left side of the fuselage between sta. 274 and sta.
296 by turning the screw type fasteners to release the panel and remove the access plates on both the left
and right side of the fuselage between sta. 317.75 and sta. 332 by removing the screws securing the access
plates to the fuselage.
REVISED: 8/10/78
Figure 3-24. Rudder Servo Installation, PA-31-31 0,
PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
c. Disconnect the electrical connection from the rudder servo.
d. Paint the rudder balance cables where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the
e. Remove the four bolts, washers and nuts securing the rudder servo to the mounting brackets.
f. Remove the servo from the airplane.
3-50. INSTALLATION OF RUDDER SERVO. (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3IP) (Refer
to Figure 3-24.)
b. Wrap the bridle cable three-quarters of a turn in each direction around the capstan from the
bridle cable pin.
guard.
d. Position the rudder servo on the mounting brackets and secure with the bolts, washers and nuts
previously removed.
ADJUSTED TO 25 2 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain the
area on the cable where the clamp attaches is clean, dry and free of all lubricants and anti-corrosive
additives. Attach the bridle cable to the rudder control cables. The bridle cable is drawn to the rudder
control cables and attached with clamps at the previously painted locations on the control cables. The end
of the bridle cable with the red ball attaches to the RIGHT control cable. (Should the rudder cables not be
painted, position the rudder in neutral and the bridle cable pin installed in the capstan as shown in Figure
3-24.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps, so that the bridle cable tension (Y) as shown in Figure 3-9 is 15 + 2 -
REVISED: 8/10/78
3-41
o pounds. Check the control cable tension forward of the bridle cable clamps and adjust, if necessary, to
obtain 25 2 pounds. If rudder cables require adjustment, it will be necessary to readjust the bridle cable
tension to 15 + 0 - 2 pounds. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55 5 inch pounds.
g. Check servo operation. (Refer to Section V.)
h. (PA-31-3l0, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 only.) Install the access plate on the right side of the
fuselage between sta. 274 and sta. 296 and secure with appropriate screws.
i. (PA-31 P only.) Install the access plate on the left side of the fuselage between sta. 274 and sta.
296 and secure with screw type fasteners and install the access plates on both the left and right side of the
fuselage between sta. 317.75 and 332 and secure with appropriate screws.
I 3-51. REMOVAL OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3IP)
The pitch trim servo is located on the aft side of the fuselage bulkhead at sta. 317.75.
a. Remove the access plate on the right side of the fuselage between sta. 317.75 and sta. 332 by
removing the screws securing the access plate to the fuselage.
b. (PA-31-310, PA-3l-325 and PA-3l-350 only.) Remove the access plate on the right side of the
fuselage between sta. 274 and sta. 296, by removing the screws securing the access plate to the fuselage, to
gain access to turnbuckle to release trim cable tension.
c. (PA-31P only.) Remove the access plate on the right side of the fuselage between sta. 274 and
sta. 296 by turning screw type fasteners to release the panel to gain access to turnbuckle to release trim
cable tension.
NOTE
e. Remove the four bolts, washers and nuts securing the trim servo to the mounting brackets.
f. Unwrap the trim cable from the capstan and idler pulleys.
g. Remove the trim servo from the airplane.
3-52. INSTALLATION OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and
PA-3IP) (Refer to Figure 3-25.)
a. Position the pitch trim servo on the mounting brackets and secure with the bolts, washers and
nuts previously removed.
b. Route the trim cable from the forward part of the airplane around the bottom capstan groove
and around the forward idler pulley, continuing around the aft idler pulley then around the top capstan
groove to the aft section of the airplane.
c. Tighten the trim cable to obtain 14 2 pounds cable tension.
d. Connect the electrical connection to the trim servo.
e. Check trim servo operation. (Refer to Section V.)
f. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 only.) Install the access plate on the right side of the
fuselage between sta. 274 and sta. 296 and secure with appropriate screws.
g. (PA-31P only.) Install the access plate on the right side of the fuselage between sta. 274 and sta.
296 and secure with screw type fasteners.
h. Install the access plate on the right side of the fuselage between 317.75 and sta. 332 and secure
with appropriate screws.
I 3-42 REMOV AL AND INSTALLATION
REVISED: 8/10/78
CABLE GUARD
FORWARD
IDLER PULlEY
AFT
IDLER PULLEY
Figure 3-25. Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
3-53. REMOVAL OF YAW DAMPER AMPLIFIER. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
The yaw, damper amplifier is shockmounted on a mounting bracket on the left side of the fuselage aft
of the rear baggage compartment.
a. (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 only.) Remove screws securing the aft panel in the rear
baggage compartment and remove panel.
b. (PA-3IP only.) Remove the access plate on the left side of the fuselage between sta. 274 and sta.
296 by turning the screw type fasteners to release the access plate.
c. Disconnect the electrical connection from the yaw damper amplifier.
d. Remove the four screws, washers and nuts securing the yaw damper amplifier to the mounting
bracket.
e. Disconnect the ground wire from the amplifier case by removing the attaching screw.
f. Remove the yaw damper amplifier from the airplane.
3-54. INSTALLATION OF YAW DAMPER AMPLIFIER. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and
a. Position the yaw damper amplifier with shockmounts attached on the mounting bracket on the
left side of the fuselage aft of the rear baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screw, washers
and nuts.
b. Connect the ground wire to the amplifier case and secure with appropriate screw.
c. Connect the electricrl connection to the amplifier.
d. Check yaw damper amplifier operation. (Refer to Section V.)
e. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 only.) Install aft panel in rear baggage compartment and
secure with appropriate screws.
f. (PA-31 P only.) Install access plate on the left side of the fuselage be tween sta. 274 and sta. 296
and secure with screw type fasteners.
REVISED: 8/10/78
3-43
Figure 3-26. Yaw Damper Amplifier Installation,
PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
3-55. REMOVAL OF GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER. (PA-31-31O, PA-31-32S, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
The gyro slaving amplifier is located beneath the center floor panel directly behind the main wing spar
at fuselage sta. 151.30.
a. Remove carpet from over the center floor panel directly behind the main spar.
b. Remove screws securing center floor panel directly aft of main wing spar and remove panel.
(PA-31P only.) Handle panel carefully to avoid damaging sealing gaskets.
c. Disconnect tlle electrical connections from the amplifier.
d. Remove the screws securing the amplifier to the bulkhead.
e. Remove the amplifier from the airplane.
3-56. INSTALLATION OF GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER. (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and
a. With electrical connector facing inboard place the amplifier on the bulkhead at fuselage sta.
151.30 and secure with appropriate screws.
b. Connect the electrical connections to the amplifier.
d. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-3l-350 only.) Install center floor panel and secure with
appropriate screws. .
e. (PA-31P only.) Ascertain that floor panel sealing gaskets are clean and undamaged prior to
installation of panel. Install center floor panel and tighten all screws evenly around panel to prevent cabin
pressure leaks.
f. Install carpet and secure.
I 3-44 REMOV AL AND INST ALLA nON
REVISED: 8/10/78
3-57. REMOVAL OF FLUX DETECfOR. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
The flux detector is located in the left wing beneath the top access plate outboard of wing sta. 221.50.
a. Remove the screws securing the access plate to the wing and remove access plate.
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the flux detector.
c. Mark the original position of the flux detector.
d. Remove the three screws securing the flux detector to the mounting bracket.
e. Remove the flux detector from the airplane.
3-58. INSTALLATION OF FLUX DETECTOR. (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) (Refer
to Figure 3-20.)
d. Install the top access plate in the left wing, outboard of wing sta. 221.50 and secure with
appropriate screws.
3-59. REMOVAL OF NAV CONVERTER (lC707). (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and'PA-31P)
The NAV converter is located on the left radio shelf aft of the forward baggage compartment.
a. Access to the converter is through the forward baggage compartment door.
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the NAV converter.
c. Remove the three screws and nuts securing the NA V converter to the radio shelf.
d. Remove the NA V converter from the airplane.
3-60. INSTALLATION OF NAV CONVERTER (lC707). (pA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and
a. With the electrical connection facing forward place the NAV converter on the left radio shelf aft
of the forward baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screws and nuts.
b. Connect the electrical connection to the NA V converter.
c. Check NAV converter operation. (Refer to Section V.)
3-61. "REMOVAL OF CONSOLE. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T,
PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T.)
console.
d.
e.
3-62. INSTALLATION OF CONSOLE. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-
300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30lT, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30lT) (Refer to Figure 3-10.)
b. Connct the electrical harness plugs, CD-20 and CD-40, to the rear of the console. (Make sure spring
clip on CD-20 is secured.)
3-63. REMOVAL OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7500001 to 7700023; PA-32-300,
SIN 32-7540001 to 7840045 and PA-32R-300, SIN 32R-7680001 to 7780417)
REVISED: 11/30/79
3-45
NOTE
The Electronic Trim Amplifier for the AltiMatic IIIC on the aircraft
listed above is located on a mounting bracket which is secured to the
top of the autopilot amplifier. Therefore, the Electronic Trim
Amplifier and Autopilot Amplifier is removed from the airplane as
one assembly.
The amplifier is located behind the right instrument panel, directly forward of the circuit breaker panel.
a. Access to the amplifier is from beneath the right instrument panel.
b. Disconnect the electrical harness from the amplifier by remov,ing the two knurled screws from the
large amplifier connector and removing the connector from the amplifier.
f. To remove the electronic trim amplifier and mounting bracket from the autopilot amplifier, simply
remove screws and lockwashers securing the mounting bracket to the autopilot amplifier.
3-64. REMOVAL OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-32-260, SI N 32-750000 I to 7700023 and
P A-32-300, SIN 32-7540001 to 7840045)
The electronic trim amplifier is located behind the right instrument panel directly forward of the circuit
breaker panel.
a. Access to the amplifier is from beneath the right instrument panel.
c. Remove the four screws securing the electronic trim amplifier to the mounting bracket and remove
amplifier from mounting bracket.
3-65. INSTALLA nON OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7500001 to 7700023
and PA-32-300, SIN 32-7540001 to 7840045) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
b. Place the mounting bracket with trim amplifier attached on the autopilot amplifier and secure with
appropriate screws.
3-66. INSTALLATION OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7500001 to 7700023; PA-32-
300, SIN 32-7540001 to 7840045 and PA-32R-300, SIN 32R-7680001 to 7780417) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
a. With the large thirty pin receptacle pointing upward, place the amplifier on the mounting bracket
located behind the right instrument panel, directly forward of the circuit breaker panel and secure with
fasteners.
b. With the cable from the harness fanning to the left side of the airplane, connect the harness to the
autopilot amplifier by securing with two screws previously removed from the receptacle.
c. Connect the electrical connectors to the electonic trim amplifier.
3-67. REMOVAL OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-32-260, SI N 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-300, SIN
32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, SIN 32R-7780418 and up; PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-
32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30IT.)
3-46
NOTE
The Electronic Trim Amplifier and the Autopilot Amplifier for the
AltiMatic IIIC are not located together on the above models.
Therefore, the Electronic Trim Amplifier and Autopilot Amplifier
are not removed as one assembly.
REVISED: 11/30/79
The amplifier is located beneath the floor panel under the center set of seats.
a. Remove the center seats and floor panel directly behind the main spar by removing the seat belts and
screws. Remove the floor panel from the airplane.
b. Disconnect the electrical harness from the amplifier by removing the two knurled screws from the
c. Unfasten the two fasteners that secure the amplifier to the mounting bracket.
d. Remove the amplifier from the airplane.
3-68. INSTALLATION OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-300,
SIN 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, SI N 32R-7780418 and up; PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301,
PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30IT) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
a. With the large thirty pin receptacle pointing outward for the PA-32R-300, and inward for the other
models, place the amplifier on the mounting bracket located beneath the floor panel under the center set of
seats and secure with fasteners.
b. Connect the harness to the autopilot amplifier by securing with two screws previously removed from
receptacle.
3-69. REMOVAL OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-
300, SIN 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-
32R-301 and PA-32R-30IT)
The electronic trim amplifier is located aft of the rear baggage compartment mounted on the second
stringer above the floor on the left side of the airplane.
a. Access to the amplifier is through the rear baggage area.
d. Remove the four screws securing the amplifier to the mounting bracket and remove the amplifier
from the airplane.
3-70. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7800001 and up; PA-
32-300, SIN 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30lT, PA-
32R-30 1 and PA-32R-30 1 T) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
a. Place the electronic trim amplifier on the bracket and secure with attaching screws.
b. Connect the electrical connectors to the amplifier.
3-71. REMOVAL OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-
300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
The attitude gyro is located in the left instrument panel.
a. Remove the face panel by removing the screws from around the perimeter of the panel.
b. Disconnect the electrical connector from the instrument.
c. Disconnect the vacuum line and the relief line from the instrument. Identify hose to facilitate
reinstallation. To prevent contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hoses and the instrument
ports.
d. Remove the screws securing the instrument to the instrument panel and remove instrument.
3-72. INSTALLATION OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-
32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30IT) (Refer to Figure 3-12.)
d. Connect the electrical connector to the instrument.
e. Check operation of instrument. (Refer to Section V.)
f. Install face panel and secure with appropriate screws.
REVISED: 11/30/19
3-47
3-73. REMOVAL OF DIRECTIONAL GYRO AND/OR HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR.
(PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301
and PA-32R-301T)
The directional gyro is located in the left instrument panel.
c. Disconnect the vacuum line and the relief line from the instrument. Identify hoses to facilitate
ports.
INDICATOR. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-
301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T) (Refer to Figure 3-13.)
1
3-75. REMOVAL OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-
32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
The altitude hold unit is located behind the right instrument panel directly forward ofthe circuit breaker
panel. The unit is secured to a mounting bracket with strap clamps which in turn is shock mounted to the
airplane.
a. Access to the unit is from beneath the right instrument panel.
b. Disconnect the electrical connector from the altitude hold unit.
c. Disconnect the static hose by releasing the clamp and sliding the hose off the port. To prevent'
contamination, place protective covers over the end of the hose and the instrument port.
3-76. INSTALLATION OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-
300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T) (Refer to Figure 3-14 for
1 C407 or Figure 3-33 for 1 C725)
a. Position the altitude hold unit on the mounting bracket located behind the right instrument panel
directly forward of the circuit breaker panel. Position unit on bracket and secure by tightening clamp screws to
5 I inch pounds.
b. Remove any caps which were placed over the ends of the hose and the instrument port.
c. Connect the hose from the rate of climb indicator to the port marked static on the unit and secure
with clamp.
d. Connect the electrical connector to the unit.
e. Check operation of altitude hold unit. (Refer to Section V.)
3-77. REMOVAL OF RELAY BOX. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7500001 to 7700023; PA-32-300, SIN 32-7540001
to 7840045 and PA-32R-300, SIN 32R-7680001 to 7780417)
3-48
The relay box is located behind the right instrument panel just to the left of the circuit breaker panel.
a. Access to the relay box is from beneath the right instrument panel.
b. Disconnect the electrical connector from the relay box.
c. Remove the screws securing the relay box to the instrument panel.
REVISED: 11/30/19
3-78. INSTALLATION OF RELAY BOX. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7500001 to 7700023; PA-32-300, SIN 32-
7540001 to 7840045 and PA-32R-300, SIN 32R-7680001 to 7780417) (Refer to Figure 3-14.)
a. Position the relay box on the back side of the right instrument panel just to the left of the circuit
breaker panel and secure with appropriate screws.
b. Connect the electrical connector to the relay box.
3-79. REMOVAL OF RELAY BOX. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-300, SIN 32-7840046 and
up; PA-32R-300, SIN 32R-7780418 and up; PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-
32R-30 I and P A-32R-30 I T)
The relay box is located behind the left instrument panel along the left side of the fuselage.
c. Remove the screws securing the relay box to its mount.
d. Remove relay box from the airplane.
3-80. INSTALLATION OF RELAY BOX. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-300, SIN 32-
7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, SIN 32R-7780418 and up; PA-32RT-300; PA-32RT-300T; PA-32-301; PA-32-
30lT; PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T) (Refer to Figure 3-14.)
a. Position the relay box behind the left instrument panel along the leftside of the fuselage and secure
3-81. REMOVAL OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-
300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
The roll servo is located beneath the floor panel under the center set of seats.
screws. Remove the floor panel from the airplane.
b. Disconnect the electrical connector from the servo.
c. Paint the aileron balance cable where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the two
bridle cable clamps. (DO NOT paint the bridle cable end terminals as one terminal is painted red to facilitate
reinstallation.)
d. Remove the bolts, washers and nuts that secure the roll servo to the mounting bracket.
e. Remove the roll servo from the airplane.
1
3-82. INSTALLATION OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-
. 32R T -300T, P A-32-30 I, P A-32-30 I T, P A-32R-30 I and P A-32R-30 I T) (Refer to Figure 3-27.)
b. Wrap the bridle cable one full turn each direction around the capstan from the bridle cable pin.
c. Adjust the cable guards on the servo to provide a gap of .031 of an inch between the cable and guard.
d. Position the servo on the mounting bracket located in the area beneath the floor aft of the main spar.
Secure the servo with the bolts, washers and nuts previously removed.
e. REFER TO FIGURE 3-8 AND CHECK THAT THE CONTROL CABLE TENSION (z) IS
ADJUSTED TO 40 5 POUNDS, PRIOR TO ATT ACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain
the bridle cable to the aileron balance cable. The bridle cable is drawn to the balance cable and attached with
clamps at the previously painted locations on the balance cable. The longest portion of the bridle cable, or the
end with the red ball, extends outboard toward the left side of the airplane. (Refer to Figure 3-27.) (Should the
balance cable not be painted, position the control wheel in neutral and align the bridle cable pin, installed in the
capstan, as shown in Figure 3-27.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the bridle cable tension (y) is equal to the
REVISED: 11/30/79
3-49
PIPER ALTIMATIC ill C SERVICE MANUAL
control cable tension between the bridle cable clamps (x) as shown in Figure 3-8, without increasing the control
cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward. At no time shall the bridle cable tension be greater than the
control cable tension between the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable tension will lower the control cable
tension between the two bridle cable clamps. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55 5 inch pounds.
3-50
f. Connect the electrical connector to the servo.
CAUTION
pin. To do this, turn on the master switch and with the roll command
knob centered, place the roll engage rocker switch in the ON
position to engage the roll servo. Turn the control wheel manually to
the extreme left and right positions to ascertain the clamps and pin
do not change position. Next operate the servo electrically by
rotating the roll command knob to its extreme left and right
position. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do
g. Install the floor panel, seat belts and seat.
INTENTIONALL Y LEFT BLANK
REMOY AL AND INSTALLATION
REVISED: 11/30/79
BRIDLE CABLE PIN
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
10
CABLE
35 GUARDS
@ 20 (PA-28RTl
L
_ @
RED BALL
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T
CABLE GUARD .
o
CLAMP
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
BRIDLE CABLE PIN
UP
t
CABLE GUARD
=-
~ F W D
PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T
REVISED: 11/30/79
Figure 3-27. Roll Servo Installation
3-51
3-83. REMOVAL OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-32-260 and PA-32-300, SIN 32-7540001 to 7840222)
The pitch servo is located beneath the floor panel under the center set of seats.
screws.
c. Paint the stabilator control cable where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the two
reinstallation.)
d. Remove the four bolts, washers and nuts securing the pitch servo to the mounting bracket.
e. Remove the pitch servo from the airplane.
3-84. REMOVAL OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-32-300, SIN 32-7940001 and up; PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30IT)
The pitch servo is located aft of the rear baggage compartment on the lower fuselage.
a. Access to the servo is through the rear baggage area.
b. Remove the attaching screws in aft panel of rear baggage compartment and remove panel.
c. Disconnect the electrical connector from the servo.
d. Paint the stabilator control cables where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the
e. Remove the bolts, washers and nuts securing the servo to the mounting brackets and remove the
3-85. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-32-260 and PA-32-300, SIN 32-7540001 to 7840222)
b. Wrap the bridle cable one-half turn each direction around the capstan from the bridle cable pin.
c. Adjust the cable guard on the servo to provide a gap of .031 of an inch between the capstan and
guard.
d. Position the pitch servo on the mounting bracket located in the area beneath the floor aft of the main
spar and secure with bolts, washers and nuts previously removed.
e. REFER TO FIGURE 3-9 AND CHECK THAT THE CONTROL CABLE TENSION (z) IS
ADJUSTED TO 40 5 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain
the bridle cable to the stabilator control cable. The bridle cable is drawn to the right stabilator control cable
and attach with clamps at the previously painted locations on the control cable. The longest portion of thc
bridle cable or the end with the red ball extends aft. (Refer to Figure 3-28.) (Should the balance cable not be
painted, position the control wheel full forward and with the servo disengaged, position the capstan pulley so
that the bridle cable pin is aligned as shown in Figure 3-28.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the cable tension
(y) is equal to the control cable tension between the bridle cable clamps (x) without increasing the control
cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward. At no time shall the bridle cable tension be greater than
the control cable tension between the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable tension will lower the control cable
tension between the two bridle cable clamps. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55 5 inch pounds.
REVISED: 11 /30/79
CAUTION
electrically by rotating the pitch command disc full up and full
down. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do not
change position. The clutch will slip during these operations.
g. Install the floor panel, seat belts and seats.
3-86. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-32-300, SIN 32-7940001 and up; PA-32R-300; PA-32RT-
300; PA-32RT-300T; PA-32-301; PA-32-301T; PA-32R-30l and PA-32R-301T) (Refer to Figure 3-28.)
a. Install bridle cable pin in capstan with the longest portion of the bridle cable or the end with the red
terminal down and tighten bridle cable pin lock screw.
b. Wrap the end of the bridle cable with the red terminal one-half turn counterclockwise from the
bridle cable pin on the upper capstan grooves and the other end of the bridle cable three-quarters of a turn
clockwise from the bridle cable pin on the lower capstan grooves.
guard.
d. Position the pitch servo on the mounting brackets locatcd on the lowcr fusclagc aft of the rear
baggage area and secure with bolts, washers and nuts previously removed.
e. REFER 1'6 FIGURE 3-9 AND CHECK THAT THE CONTROL CABLE TENSION (Z) IS
ADJUSTED TO 40 . 5 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain
area on cable where clamp attaches is clean, dry and frce of alilu bricants and anti-corrosive additives. Attach
the bridle cable to the stabilator control cable. The bridle cable is drawn to the right stabilator control cable
and attached with clamps at the previously painted locations on the control cable. The longest portion of the
bridle cable or the end with the red ball extends aft. (Refer to Figure 3-28.) (Should the balance cable not be
painted, position the control wheel full forward and with thc servo disengaged, position thc capstan pulley so
that the bridle cable pin is aligned as shown in Figure 3-28.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the bridlc cablc
tension (Y) equals 15 + 0-5 Ibs. tension between the bridle cable clamps (X) without increasing the control
cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward. At no time shall the bridle cable tension be greater than
the control cable tension betwecn the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable tension will lower the control cable
tension between the two bridle cable clamps. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55 j: 5 inch-pounds.
CAUTION
command disc centered, place the roll engage rocker switch and the
clamps and pin do not change position. Next, operate the servo
REVISED: 10/16/81
3-53
PIPER ALTIMA TIC IIlC SERVICE MANUAL
3-54
.... -...
UP
t
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
CABLE GUARD
o
o
BRIDLE CABLE PIN
BRIDLE CABLE
o
RED BALL
PA-32-260 and PA-32-300
F T ~
BRIDLE CABLE PIN
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
CABLE
GUARDS
.------ J ~ ~ ~ __
PA-32R-300, PA-32RT -300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-30 I, PA-32-30 I T,
PA-32R-30I, PA-32R-30IT, PA-2BRT-20I, PA-2BRT-20IT and PA-44-IBO.
Figure 3-28. Pitch Servo Installation
REVISED: 11/30/79
3-87. REMOVAL OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-
32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30lT, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T.)
The pitch trim servo is located aft of the rear baggage area on the lower fuselage.
NOTE
installation of the trim servo, it is recommended that a service aid be
fabricated from shop material such as two bridle cable clamps and a
short length of cable or two blocks of wood pre-drilled with a bolt
and nut inserted to maintain cable routing.
c. Loosen trim cable turnbuckles to release cable tension.
d. Disconnect the electrical connector from the trim servo.
e. Remove the four mounting bolts securing the trim servo to the mounting bracket.
3-88, INSTALLATION OF PITCH TRI M SERVO. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T) (Refer to Figure 3-29.)
a. Position trim servo on mounting brackets and secure with mounting bolts.
b. Route the trim cable from the forward part of the airplane around the aft inboard idler pulley, then
around the bottom capstan groove and around the aft outboard idler pulley continuing around the forward
outboard idler pulley and around the top capstan groove to the forward inboard idler pulley, to the aft section
of the airplane.
d. Connect the electrical connector to the trim servo.
--- 3-89. REMOVAL OF GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300 and PA-32RT-300T). The gyro slaving amplifier is located behind the left instrument panel on
a mounting bracket above the left rudder pedal.
a. Access to the is from beneath the left instrument panel.
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the amplifier.
c. Remove the screws securing the amplifier to the mounting bracket.
3-90. INSTALLATION OF GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300 and PA-32RT-300T) (Refer to Figure 3-19.)
a. Position the amplifier on the mounting bracket located behind the left instrument panel and
REMOVAl, ANn INSTALLATION
ADDED: 10/16/81,
3-55
..... 3-91. REMOVAL OF FLUX DETECTOR. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32RT-300 and PA-32RT-300T).
The flux detector is located aft of the rear baggage area on a mounting bracket on the right side of the
fuselage.
a. Access to the flux detector is through the rear baggage area.
b. Remove the access plate in lower right side of aft panel in the rear baggage area by turning the
screw type fasteners to release the access plate.
c. Disconnect the electrical connection from the flux detector.
d. Mark the original position of the flux detector.
e. Remove the three screws securing the flux detector to the mounting bracket.
f. Remove the flux detector from the airplane.
3-92. INSTALLATION OF FLUX DETECTOR. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300and
PA-32RT-300T) (Refer to Figure 3-20.)
forward. and secure with original screws.
d. Install access plate in lower right side of aft panel in the rear baggage area and turn screw type
fasteners to secure access plate.
3-93. REMOVAL OF NAV CONVERTER (lC707) (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300
and PA-32RT-300T)
The NAV Converter is located on a mounting tray under the left side of the instrument panel directly
forward of the console.
a. Access to the converter is from beneath the left instrument panel.
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the NAV Converter.
c. Remove the three screws and nuts securing the NA V Converter to the mounting tray.
d. Remove the NAV Converter from the airplane.
3-94. INSTALLATION OF NAV CONVERTER (IC707) (PA-32-260. PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300 and PA-32RT-300T) (Rerer to Figure 3-2\')
a. Place the NAV Converter on the mounting tray behind the left instrument panel directly forward
of the console and secure with appropriate screws and nuts.
b. Connect the electrical connection to the NA V Converter.
c. Check NAV Converter operation. (Refer to Section V.)
3-56
REMOVAL AND INSTAl.LATION
ADDU): 10/16/81
PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32RT -300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301 T, PA-32R-301 and
PA-32R-301 T
FWD.

PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201 T
Figure 3-29. Pitch Trim Servo Installation,
3-95. REMOVAL OF CONSOLE. (PA-34-200T)
The console is located in the lower left side of the instrument panel.
console.
d.
e.
3-96. INSTALLATION OF CONSOLE. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-10.)
spring clip on CD-20 is secure.)
3-97. REMOVAL OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-34-200T)
The autopilot amplifier is located on the right side of the bulkhead aft of the main spar beneath the
floor panel under the right seat.
a. Remove the center seats from the airplane.
b. Remove the floor panel directly behind the main spar by removing the seat belts and screws.
Remove the floor panel from the airplane.
c. Disconnect the electrical harness from the amplifier by removing the two knurled screws from
d. Unfasten the two fasteners that secure the amplifier to the mounting bracket and remove the
amplifier from the airplane.
REVISED: 11/30/79
3-57
ADDED: 8/10/78
3-98. INSTALLATION OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
a. With the large thirty pin receptacle pointing inboard, place the amplifier on the mounting bracket
located on the bulkhead aft of the main spar and secure with fasteners.
b. With the cables from the harness fanning upward, connect the harness to the amplifier by
securing with the two screws previously removed from the receptacle.
d. Install the floor panel, seat belts and seats.
3-99. REMOVAL OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-34-200T)
The electronic trim amplifier is located ona mounting bracket in the center of the fuselage beneath
the floor panel directly aft of the main spar.
b. Remove the floor panel directly behind the main spar by removing the seat belts and screws.
Remove the floor panel from the airplane.
c. Disconnect the electrical connections from the amplifier.
d. Remove the screws securing the amplifier to the mounting bracket.
e. Remove the amplifier from the airplane.
3-100. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-Il.)
a. Place the electronic trim amplifier on the mounting bracket with the CD-16 connectors pointing
aft and secure with appropriate screws.
b. Connect the electrical connections to the amplifier.
d. Install the floor panel, seat belts and seats.
13-101. REMOVAL OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-34-200T)
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the instrument.
instrument ports.
13-102. INSTALLATION OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-12.)
a. Position the instrument i,n its proper panel cutout and secure with appropriate screws.
INDICATOR. (PA-34-200T)
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the instrument.
instrument ports.
d. Remove the screws securing the instrument to the instrument panel and remove the instrument.
ADDED: 8/10/78
3-59
INDICATOR. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-13.)
3-105. REMOVAL OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-34-200T, Serial Nos. 34-7570001 to 34-7770185
incl., 34-7770187 to 34-7770263 inc\.)
The altitude hold unit is located behind the left instrument panel directly forward of the console. The
unit is secured to a mounting bracket with strap clamps which in turn is shock mounted to the fuselage.
a. Access to the unit is from beneath the left instrument panel.
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the altitude holdl,mit.
3-106. INSTALLATION OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-34-200T, Serial Nos. 34-7570001 to
34-7770185 incL 34-7770187 to 34-7770263 incl.) (Refer to Figure 3-14.)
a. Position the altitude hold unit on the mounting bracket located behind the left instrument panel
directly forward of the console. Position unit so static port is pointing inboard and tighten clamp screws to
5 1 inch-pounds.
c. Connect the hose from the rate of climb indicator to the port marked static on the unit and
secure with clamp.
d. Connect the electrical connection to the unit.
3-107. REMOVAL OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-34-200T, Serial Nos. 34-7770186, 34-7770264 and
up.)
The altitude hold unit is loacted behind the right instrument panel directly forward of the circuit
breaker panel. The unit is complete with its own mounting bracket and shock mounts which in turn are
secured to a frame mounted bracket.
a. Access to the unit is from beneath the right instrument panel.
c. Disconnect the static hose be releasing the clamp and sliding the hose off the port. To prevent
3-108. INSTALLATION OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-34-200T, Serial Nos. 34-7770186,
34-7770264 and up.) (Refer to Figure 3-33.)
a. Position the altitude hold unit on the mounting bracket located behind the right instrument
panel directly forward of the circuit breaker panel. Position the unit so the static port is pointing outward
and secure by tightening clamp screws to 5 1 inch pounds.
c. Connect the hose from the rate of climb indicator to the port mark static on the unit and secure
with clamp.
1
3
-
60 UEMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
ADDED: 8/10/78
PIPER ALTIMATIC HI C SERVICE MANUAL
13-109. REMOVAL OF RELAY BOX. (PA-34-200T)
The relay box is located on a mounting bracket located behind the left instrument panel directly
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the relay box.
c. Remove the screws securing the relay box to the mounting bracket.
3-110. INSTALLATION OF RELAY BOX. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-14.)
a. Position the relay box on the mounting bracket located behind the left instrument panel directly
forward of the console. With electrical connector pointing aft, secure relay box with appropriate screws.
3-111. REMOVAL OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-34-200T)
The roll servo is located beneath the floor panel under the center set of seats on the left side of the
fuselage.
b. Remove the floor panel directly behind the main spar by removing seat belts and screws securing
the panel. Remove the floor panel from the airplane.
d. Paint the aileron balance cable where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the
e. Remove the bolts, washers and nuts that secure the roll servo to the mounting bracket.
I
ADDED: 8/10/18
3-61
PIPER AL TIMA TIC In G SERVICE MANUAL
3-62 REMOV AL AND INST ALLA nON
ADDED: 8/10/78
BRIDLE CABLE PIN
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
GUARDS
L@
RED BALL
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
Figure 3-30. Roll Servo Installation, PA-34-200T and PA-44-180
3-112. INSTALLATION OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-30.)
guard.
d. Position the servo on the mounting bracket located in the area beneath the floor aft of the main
spar. Secure the servo with the bolts, washers and nuts previously removed.
e. REFER TO FIGURE 3-8 AND CHECK THAT CONTROL CABLE TENSION (Z) IS ADJUSTED
TO 40 + 5 - 0 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain area on cable
where clamps attaches is clean, dry and free of alliubrican ts and anti-corrosive additives. Attach the bridle
cable to the aileron balance cable. The bridle cable is drawn to the balance cable and attached with clamps
at the previously painted locations on the balance cable. The longest portion of the bridle cable or the end
with the red ball extends outboard toward the left side of the airplane. (Refer to Figure 3-30.) (Should the
balance cable not be painted, position the control wheel in neutral and align the bridle cable pin, installed
in the capstan, as shown in Figure 3-30.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the bridle cable tension (Y) is
equal to the control cable tension +0 - 15% between the bridle cable clamps (X) as shown in Figure 3-8
without increasing the control cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward. At no time shall the
bridle cable tension be greater than the control cable tension between the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable
tension will lower the control cable tension between the two bridle cable clamps. Torque the bridle cable
clamp bolts to 55 5 inch-pounds.
ADDED: 8/10/78
3-63
CAUTION
Check security of bridle cable clamps and the bridle cable pin. To
do this, tum on the master switch and with the roll command
knob centered place the roll engage rocker switch in the ON
position to engage the roll servo. Tum the control wheel manually
to the extreme left and right positions to ascertain the clamps and
pin do not change position. Next operate the servo electrically by
rotating the roll command knob to its extreme left and right
position. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do
3-113. REMOVAL OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-34-200T)
The pitch servo is located beneath the floor panel under the center set of seats.
b. Remove the floor panel directly behind the main spar by removing seat belts and screws securing
the panel. Remove the floor panel from the airplane.
c. Open access door in aft panel of rear baggage area and disconnect down springs.
e. Paint the stabilator control cable where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the
f. Remove the four bolts and nuts that secure the pitch servo to the mounting bracket.
g. Remove the pitch servo from the airplane.
3-114. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-31.)
b. Wrap the bridle cable one half tum each direction around the capstan from the bridle cable pin.
c. Adjust the cable guard on the servo to provide a gap of .031 of an inch between the capstan and
guard.
d. Position the pitch servo on the mounting bracket located in the area beneath the floor aft of the
main spar. Secure the servo with the bolts and nuts previously removed.
ADJUSTED TO 40 + 5 - 0 POUNDS (WITH DOWN SPRINGS DISCONNECTED) PRIOR TO
ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain area on cable where clamp attaches is clean, dry
and free of all lubricants and anti-corrosive additives. Attach the bridle cable to the stabilator control cable.
The bridle cable is drawn to the right stabilator control cable and attached with clamps at the previously
painted locations on the control cable. The longest portion of the bridle cable or the end with the red ball
extends aft. (Refer to Figure 3-31.) (Should the balance cable not be painted, position the control wheel
full forward and with the servo disengaged, position the capstan pulley so that the bridle cable pin is aligned
as shown in Figure 3-31.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the bridle cable tension (Y) is equal to the
control cable tension +0 - 15% between the bridle cable clamps (X) as shown in Figure 3-9 without
increasing the control cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward. At no time shall the bridle cable
1
3
-
64
ADDED: 8/10/78
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
CABLE GUARD
o
o
o
a._- BRIDLE CABLE PIN
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
RED BALL
Figure 3-31. Pitch Servo Installation, PA-34-200T
tension be greater than the control cable tension between the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable tension will
lower the control cable tension between the two bridle cable clamps. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to
55 5 inch-pounds.
g. Connect down springs to control cables.
CAUTION
down. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do
h. Install the floor panel, seat belts and seats.
3-115. REMOVAL OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-34-200T)
The pitch trim servo is located aft of the rear baggage area on the lower fuselage.
b. Remove the access plate in lower right side of the aft panel in rear baggage area by turning the
ADDED: 8/10/78
3-65
FWD.

Figure 3-32. Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-34-200T
NOTE
d. Disconnect the electrical connection from the trim servo.
e. Remove the four bolts securing the trim servo to the mounting bracket.
3-116. INSTALLATION OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-32.)
a. Position trim servo oh mounting brackets and secure with mounting bolts.
b. Route the trim cable from the forward part of the airplane around the aft inboard idler pulley,
then around the bottom capstan groove and around the aft outboard idler pulley continuing around the
forward outboard idler pulley and around the top capstan groove to the forward inboard idler pulley, to the
aft section of the airplane.
f. Install access plate in lower right side of aft panel in rear baggage area and turn screw type
fasteners to secure access plate.
ADDED: 8/10/78
3-117. REMOVAL OF GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER. (PA-34-200T)
The gyro slaving amplifier is located behind the left instrument panel on a mounting bracket above the
left rudder pedal.
a. Access to the amplifier is from beneath the left instrument panel.
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the amplifier.
3-118. INSTALLATION OF GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-19.)
a. Position the amplifier on the mounting bracket located behind the left instrument panel and
3-119. REMOVAL OF FLUX DETECTOR. (PA-34-200T)
The flux detector is located aft of the rear baggage area on a mounting bracket on the right side of the
fuselage.
a. Access to the flux detector is through the rear baggage area.
b. Remove the access plate in lower right side of aft panel in the rear baggage area by turning the
c. Disconnect the electrical connection from the flux detector.
d. Mark the original position of the flux detector.
e. Remove the three screws securing the flux detector to the mounting bracket.
f. Remove the flux detector from the airplane.
3-120. INSTALLATION OF FLUX DETECTOR. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-20.)
d. Install access plate in lower right side of aft panel in the rear baggage area and turn screw type
fasteners to secure access plate .
..... 3-121. REMOVAL OF NAV CONVERTER (IC707) (PA-34-200T)
The NAV Converter is located on a mounting tray under the left side of the instrument panel directly
a. Access to the converter is from beneath the left instrument panel.
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the NA V Converter.
c. Remove the three screws and nuts securing the NA V Converter to the mounting tray.
d. Remove the NAV Converter from the airplane.
3-122. INSTALLATION OF NAV CONVERTER (IC707). (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-2\')
a. Place the NAV Converter on the mounting tray behind the left instrument panel directly forward
of the console and secure with appropriate screws and nuts.
b. Connect the electrical connection to the N A V Converter.
c. Check NA V Converter operation. (Refer to Section V.)
ADDED: IO/lG/81
3-67
PIPER ALTIMATIC III C SERVICE MANUAL
3-123. REMOVAL OF CONSOLE. (PA-44-180)
The console is located in the lower left side of the instrument panel.
c. . Remove the console retaining screw. It is the screw located to the left of the trim meter on the
console.
d.
e.
3-124. INSTALLATION OF CONSOLE. (PA-44-ISO) (Refer to Figure 3-10.)
spring clip on CD-20 is secure.)
3-125. REMOVAL OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-44-180)
The autopilot amplifier is located on the forward side of the bulkhead at ST A. 47.65 on the right side of
the airplane.
a. Release the latches on the nose cone and swing it down out of the way to gain access to the amplifier.
c. Release the two fasteners that secure the amplifier to the mounting bracket and remove the amplifier
from the airplane.
3-126. INSTALLATION OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
a. With the large thirty pin receptacle pointing downward, place the amplifier on the mounting bracket
located on the right, forward side of the bulkhead at ST A. 47.65 and secure with fasteners.
b. Connect the electrical harness to the amplifier by securing with the two screws previously removed
from the receptacle.
d. Swing the nose cone back to its proper position and fasten latches.
3-127. REMOVAL OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-44-180)
The electronic trim amplifier is located on a mounting bracket approximately in the center and on the
forward side of the bulkhead at ST A. 47.65.
a. Release the latches on the nose cone and swing it down out of the way to gain access to the trim
amplifier.
b. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the amplifier.
3-128. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
a. Place the electronic trim amplifier on the mounting bracket with the CD-16 connector pointing
outboard on the co-pilot's side and secure with appropriate screws.
3-68
b. Connect the electrical connectors to the amplifier.
d. Swing the nose cone back to its proper position and fasten latches.
ADDED: 8/10/78
3-129. REMOVAL OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-44-1S0)
c. Disconnect the vacuum line and the relief line from the instrument. Identify hoses to facilitate re-
installation. To prevent contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hoses and the instrument
ports.
d. Remove the screws securing the attitude gyro to the instrument panel and remove gyro.
3-130. INSTALLATION OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-44-ISO) (Refer to Figure 3-12.)
b. Remove any caps which were placed over the hoses and instrument ports.
3-131. REMOVAL OF DIRECTIONAL GYRO AND/OR HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR.
(PA-44-1S0)
The Directional Gyro and/ or Horizontal Situation Indicator is located in the left instrument panel.
c. Disconnect the vacuum line and the relief line from the instrument. Identify hoses to facilitate re-
installation. To prevent contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hoses and the instrument
ports.
d. Remove the screws securing the instrument to the instrument panel and remove the instrument.
INDICATOR. (PA-44-1S0) (Refer to Figure 3-13.)
b. Remove any caps which were placed over the hoses and, the instrument ports.
c. Connect hoses to the proper ports of the instrument.
f. Install the face panel and secure it with the appropriate screws.
3-133. REMOVAL OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-44-lS0)
The altitude hold unit is located on the forward side of the bulkhead at ST A. 47.65 approximately in the
center.
a. Release the latches on the nose cone and swing it down out of the way to gain access to the altitude
hold unit.
b. Disconnect the electrical connector from the unit.
c. Disconnect the static hose by releasing the clamp and sliding the hose orf of the port. To prevent
ADDED: 8/10/78
3-69
Figure 3-33. Altitude Hold Unit Installlation (lC725)
3-134. INSTALLA TlON OF AL TlTUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-33.)
a. Position the altitude hold unit on the shock mounts so the static port is pointing toward the center
of the bulkhead and tighten clamp screws to 5 1 inch-pounds.
with clamp.
f. Swing nose cone back to its proper position and fasten the latches.
3-135. REMOVAL OF RELAY BOX. (PA-44-180)
The relay box is located on the forward side of the bulkhead at ST A. 47.65 on the pilot's side of the
aircraft.
a.
b.
Release the latches on the nose cone and swing it down out of the way to gain access to the relay box.
Disconnect the electrical connector from the relay box.
c.
d.
Remove the screws securing the relay box to the mounting bracket.
Remove the relay box from the airplane.
3-136. INSTALLATION OF RELAY BOX. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-34.)
a. Position the relay box on the mounting bracket located on the forward side of the bulkhead at
STA. 47.65 on the pilot's side.
3-70
b. With the electrical connector pointing aft, secure relay box with appropriate screws.
c. Connect the electrical connector to the relay box.
d. Check operation of relay box. (Refer to Section V.)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLA nON
ADDED: 8/10/78
Figure 3-34. Relay Box Installation
3-137. REMOVAL OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-44-180)
The roll servo is located beneath the back seat on the pilot's side of the aircraft.
a. Remove the third and fourth scats from the airplane.
b. Remove the center floorboard aft of the main spar by removing seat belts and screws securing the
panel. Remove the floor panel from the airplane.
c. Disconnect the electrical connector from the roll servo.
d. Paint the aileron balance cable where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the two
reinstallation.)
e. Remove the bolts, washers and nuts that secure the roll servo to the mounting bracket.
3-138. INSTALLATION OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-30.)
guard.
d. Position the servo on the mounting bracket located in the area beneath the floor aft of the main
spar. Secure the servo with the bolts, washers and nuts previously removed.
e. REFER TO FIGURE 3-7 AND CHECK THAT CONTROL CABLE TENSION (Z) IS
ADJUSTED TO 40 5 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain
area on cable where clamps attach is clean, dry and free of all lubricants and anti-corrosive additives. Attach
clamps at the previously painted locations on the balance cable. The longest portion of the bridle cable or the
end with the red ball extends outboard toward the left side of the airplane. (Refer to Figure 3-30.) (Should the
capstan, as shown in Figure 3-30.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the bridle cable tension (Y) is equal to the
control cable tension between the bridle cable clamps (X) +0 -20%, as shown in Figure 3-8. This should be done
without increasing the control cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward and without exceeding
25 +0 -5 pounds of tension on the bridle cable. At no time shall the bridle cable tension be greater than the
control cable tension between the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable tension will lower the control cable
tension between the two bridle cable clamps. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55 5 inch-pounds.
REVISED: 11/30/79
3-71
PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SrmVICE MANUAL
CAUTION
Check security of bridle cable clamps and the bridle cable pin. To do
this, turn on the master switch and with the roll command knob
centered place the roll engage rocker switch in the ON position to
engage the roll servo. Turn the control wheel manually to the
extreme left and right positions to ascertain the clamps and pin do
not change position. Next, operate the servo electrically by rotating
the roll command knob to its extreme left and right position.
Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do not change
position. The clutch will slip during these operations.
3-139. REMOVAL OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-44-180)
The pitch servo is located in the aft section of the fuselage at ST A. 247.125 and in the approximate center
of the aircraft.
a. Remove the round inspection plate on the right side of the fuselage at STA. 259.7.
b. Remove the aft baggage partition at STA. 187.8.
c. The two piece plastic tail cone may also be removed for ease in removing the servo.
d. Disconnect the electrical connector from the servo.
e. Paint the stabilator control cables where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the
f. Remove the bolts, washers and nuts securing the servo to the mounting brackets and remove the
3-140. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-28.)
a. Install bridle cable pin in capstan with the longest portion of the bridle cable or the end with the red
terminal down and tighten bridle cable pin lock screw.
b. Wrap the end of the bridle cable with the red terminal one-half turn counterclockwise from the
bridle cable pin on the upper capstan grooves and the other end of the bridle cable three-quarters of a turn
clockwise from the bridle cable pin on the lower capstan grooves.
guard.
d. Position the pitch servo on the mounting brackets located on the lower fuselage aft of the rear
ADJUSTED TO 40 5 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDAL CABLE CLAM PS. Ascertain
the bridle cable to the stabilator control cables. The bridle cable is drawn to the stabilator control cables and
attached with clamps at the previously painted locations. The longest portion of the bridle cable or the end
with the red ball attaches to the upper stabilator control cable. (Refer to Figure ,3-28.)(Should the balance
cable not be painted, position the control wheel full forward and with the servo disengaged, position the
capstan pulley so that the bridle cable pin is aligned as shown in Figure 3-28.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps
so that the bridle cable tension (Y) as shown in Figure 3-9 is 15 +0 -5 pounds. Check the control cable tension
forward of the bridle cable clamps and adjust, if necessary, to obtain 40 5 pounds. If the control cables require
adjustment, it will be necessary to readjust the bridle cable tension to 15 +0 -5 pounds. Torque the bridle cable
clamp bolts to 55 5 inch-pounds.
3-72
ADDED: 8/10/78
FWD.
VIEWED FROM BELOW
Figure 3-35. Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-44-180
CAUTION
3-141. REMOVAL OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-44-180)
The pitch trim servo is located directly aft of F.S. 156.00 on the lower fuselage.
b. Remove the partition between the baggage compartment and aft section of the aircraft.
NOTE
fabricated from shop material such as two bridle cable clamps and
a short length of cable or two blocks of wood pre-dril1ed with a
bolt and nut inserted to maintain cable routing.
ADDED: 8/10/78
3-73
d. Disconnect the electrical connector from the trim servo.
c. Rcmovc thc four bolts securing thc trim servo to the mounting bracket.
3-142. IN"STALLATION OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-44-ISO) (Refer to Figure 3-35.)
b. Route the trim cable from the forward part of the airplane around the aft inboard idler pulley, then
around the bottom capstan groove and around the aft outboard idler pulley continuing around thc forward
outboard idler pulley and around the top capstan groove to the forward inboard idler pulley, to the aft section
of the airplane.
f. Replace and secure the partition between the baggage compartment and aft section of the aircraft.
~ 3 1 4 3 . REMOVAL OF CONSOLE. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT)
a. Remove the roll command kno b.
c. Remove the console retaining screw. It is the screw located to thc left of the trim meter on the
console.
d.
e.
Remove the console from the airplane;
___ 3-144. INSTALLATION OF CONSOLE. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-2S RT-20 IT) (Refer to Figure 3-10.)
e. Check console operation. (Refer to Section Y.)
~ 3-145. REMOVAL OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-2SRT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT)
NOTE
The Electronic Trim Amplifier for the AltiMatic IlIC is located on a
mounting bracket which is secured to the top of the autopilot
amplifier. Therefore, the Electronic Trim Amplifier and Autopilot
Amplifier are removed from the airplane as one assembly.
The amplifier is located in the aft section of the fuselage, behind the battery, just forward of Sta. 191.0.
a. Access to the amplifier may be gained by removing the aft baggage partition.
f. To remove the electronic trim amplifier and mounting bracket from the autopilot amplifier, simply
remove screws and lockwashers securing the mounting bracket to the autopilot amplifier.
\ 3-74
REVISED: 11/30/79
REMOVAL OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT)
The electronic trim amplifier is located in the aft section of the fuselage, behind the battery, just forward
of STA. 191.0.
a. Access to the amplifier may be gained by removing the aft baggage partition.
c. Remove the four screws securing the electronic trim amplifier to the mounting bracket and remove
a.mplifier from mounting bracket.
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT)
b. Place the mounting bracket with trim amplifier attached on the autopilot amplifier and secure with
appropriate screws.
c. Install autopilot amplifier as per the instructions in the following paragraph .
...... 3-148. INSTALLATION OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT) (Refer to
Figure 3-11.)
a. With the large thirty pin receptacle pointing outboard, place the amplifier on the mounting bracket
located in the aft section of the fuselage behind the battery, just forward of STA. 191.0 and secure with
fasteners.
b. Connect the harness to the autopilot amplifier by securing with the two screws previously removed
from the receptacle.
REMOVAL OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT)
ports.
---3-150. INSTALLATION OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT) (Refer to Figure
3-12.)
REMOVAL OF DIRECTIONAL GYRO AND/OR HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR.
(PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT)
The directional gyro is located in the left instrument panel.
ports.
\
REVISED: 11/30/79
3-75
INSTALLATION OF DIRECTIONAL GYRO AND/OR HORIZONTAL SITUATION
INDICATOR. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT) (Refer to Figure 3-13.)
a. Position the instrument in its proper panel cut out and secure with appropriate screws.
e. .check operation of instrument. (Refer to Section V.)
REMOVAL OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT)
The altitude hold unit is located in the aft section of the fuselage, behind the battery,just forward of ST A.
191.0. The unit is complete with its own mounting bracket and shock mounts which in turn are secured to a
frame mounted bracket.
a. Access may be gained to the unit by removing the aft baggage partition.
___ 3-154. INSTALLATION OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT) (Refer to
Figure 3-33.)
a. Position the altitude hold unit on the mounting bracket located in the aft section of the fuselage just
forward of ST A. 191.0. Position unit so static port is pointing aft and secure by tightening clamp screws to 5 I
inch pounds.
with clamp.
REMOVAL OF RELAY BOX. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT)
The relay box is attached to a mounting bracket located behind the right instrument panel along the right
side of the fuselage.
a. Access to the relay box is from beneath the right instrument panel.
c. Remove the screws securing the relay box to the mounting bracket.
d. Remove the relay box from the airplane .
..... 3-156. INSTALLATION OF RELAY BOX. (PA-28RT-20l and PA-28RT-20IT) (Refer to Figure 3-34.)
a. Position the relay box on the bracket located behind the right instrument panel along the right side
of the fuselage and secure with appropriate screws.
REMOVAL OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-28RT-20l and PA-28RT-20IT)
The roll servo is located beneath the back seat on the pilot's side of the aircraft.
a. Remove the third and fourth seats and center floor panel to gain access to this area.
c. Paint the aileron balance cable where the bridle cable clamps are located and then removc the two
reinstallation.)
3-76
d. Remove the bolts, washers and nuts that secure the roll servo to the mounting bracket.
e. Remove the roll servo from the airplane.
REVISED: 11/30/79
31-158. INSTALLATION OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)(Referto Figure 3-27.)
c. Adjust the cable guards on the servo to provide a gap of .031 of an inch between the cable and guard.
d. Position the servo on the mounting bracket located in the area beneath the floor aft of the main spar.
Secure the servo with the bolts, washers and nuts previously removed.
ADJUSTED TO 40 5 POUNDS, PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain
clamps at the previously painted locations on the balance cable. The longest portion of the bridle cable, or the
end with the red baU, extends outboard toward the left side of the airplane. (Refer to Figure 3-27.) (Should the
capstan, as shown in Figure 3-27.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the bridle cable tension (Y) is equal to 25 +
o - 5 pounds. Recheck the control cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward and adjust, if necessary.
If aileron cables require adjustment, it may be necessary to readjust the bridle cable tension. Torque the bridle
cable clamp bolts to 55 5 inch pounds.
CAUTION
pin. To do this, turn on the master swich and with the roll command
knob centered place the roll engage rocker switch in the ON position
to engage the roll servo. Turn the control wheel manually to the
extreme left and right positions to ascertain the clamps and pin do
not change position. Next operate the servo electrically by rotating
the roll command knob to its extreme left and right position.
Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do not change
position. The clutch will slip during these operations.
3-159. REMOVAL OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20lT)
The pitch servo is located in the aft section of the fuselage behind ST A. 247.125 in the approximate center
of the aircraft.
a. To gain access to this area remove the aft baggage partition and the round inspection plates on both
sides of the fuselage at STA 259.7.
b. Disconnect the electrical connection from the servo.
c. Paint the stabilator control cables where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the
facili tate rein stalla tion.)
d. Remove the bolts, washers and nuts securing the servo to the mounting brackets and remove the
3-160. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20lT) (Refer to Figure 3-28.)
a. Install bridle cable pin in capstan with the longest portion of the bridle cable down and tighten bridle
cable pin lock screw.
b. Wrap the long end of the bridle cable one-half turn counterclockwise from the bridle cable pin on the
upper capstan grooves and the other end of the bridle cable three-quarters of a turn clockwise from the bridle
cable pin on the lower capstan grooves.
guard.
ADDED: 11/30/79
3-77
d. Position the pitch servo on the mounting brackets located on the lower fuselage aft of the rear
ADJUSTED TO 40 . 5 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain
the bridle cable to the stabilator control cables. The bridle cable is drawn to the stabilator control cables and
attached with clamps at the previously painted locations. The longest portion of the bridle cable or the end
with the red ball attaches to the upper stabilator. (Refer to Figure 3-28.) (Should the balance cable not be
painted, position the control wheel full forward and with the servo disengaged, position the capstan pulley so
that the bridle cable pin is aligned as shown in Figure 3-28.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so that the bridle
cable tension (Y) as shown in Figure 3-9 is 15 + 0 - 5 pounds. Check the control cable tension forward of the
bridle cable clamps and adjust if necessary to obtain 40 . 5 pounds. If the control cables require adjustment, it
will be necessary to readjust the bridle cable tension to 15 + 0 - 5 pounds. Torque the bridle cable clamps bolts
to 55 . 5 inch-pounds.
CAUTION
g. Install the aft panel in rear baggage compartment and the round inspection plates and secure with
appropriate screws.
3-161. REMOVAL OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT)
The pitch trim servo is located directly aft of STA. 156.00 on the lower fuselage.
b. Remove the partition between the baggage compartment and aft section of the aircraft.
NOTE
fabricated from shop material such as two bridle cable clamps and a
short length of cable or two blocks of wood pre-drilled with a bolt
and nut inserted to maintain cable routing.
d. Disconnect the electrical connector from the servo.
e. Remove the four mounting bolts securing the trim servo to the mounting bracket.
ADDED: 11/30/79
3-162. INSTALLATION OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201 T)(Refer to Figure
3-29.)
b. Route the trim cable from the forward part of the airplane around the bottom capstan groove to the
forward idler pulley and around it, continue around the aft idler pulley and then around the top capstan groove
to the aft section of the airplane.
c. Tighten the trim cable to obtain 10 . I pounds cable tension.
d. Connect the electrical connector to the trim servo.
3-163. REMOVAL OF NAV FLAG ADAPTER. (PA-23-250 Six Place, SIN 27-7554001, 7554074 to
7754127; PA-31, SI N 31-7512023 to 7712064; PA-31-350, SI N 31-7552054 to 7752100,31-7752102 to 7752113
and PA-3IP, SIN 31P-7630014 to 7730012)
The N A V Flag Adapter is located behind the left instrument panel, mounted on the left outboard fuselage
nose channel for the P A-23-250 (six place) and on the radio support bracket for the P A-31-31O; -325; -350 and
PA-3IP.
NOTE
The NAV Flag Adapter is used only in certain NSD-360 Compass
systems that do not use the Edo-Aire Mitchell AK-423, I C707 or
I C707-1 VORl Localizer converters. Compass systems using the
above converters do not require the NAV Flag Adapter.
a. Access to the N A V Flag Adapter is from beneath the instrument panel.
b. Disconnect the electrical connector from the N A V Flag Adapter.
c. Remove the screws securing the N A V Flag Adapter to its mounting location.
d. Remove the N A V Flag Adapter from the airplane.
3-164. INSTALLATION OF NAV FLAG ADAPTER. (PA-23-250 Six Place, SIN 27-7554001, 7554074 to
7754127; PA-31, SI N 31-7512023 to 7712064; PA-31-350, SI N 31-7552054 to 7752100, 31-7752102 to 7752113
and PA-3IP, SIN 31P-7630014 to 7730012) (Refer to Figure 3-36.)
a. Position the NAV Flag Adapter at its mounting location behind the instrument panel and secure
b. Connect the electrical connector to the N A V Flail Adaoter.
c. Remove the screws securing the NAV Flag Adapter to the nose channel and/ or support bracket.
3-165. REMOVAL OF NAY FLAG ADAPTER. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7600001 to 7700017; PA-32-300,
SIN 32-764000 I to 7740075; PA-32R-300, SIN 32R-768000 I to 7780350 and PA-34-200T, S / N 34-7670001 to
7770261)
h ~ NAY Flag Adapter is located behind the right instrument panel on the firewall mounted on the
existing hat.
NOTE
The NAV Flag Adapter is used only in certain NSD-360 Compass
systems that do not use the Edo-Aire Mitchell AK-423, lC707 or
I C707-1 VORl Localizer converters. Compass systems using the
above converters do not require NAV Flag Adapter.
ADDED: 11/30/79
3-79
Figure 3-36. NAV Flag Adapter Installation
a. Access to the NAV Flag Adapter is from beneath the instrument panel.
b. Disconnect the electrical connector from the NAV Flag Adapter.
c. Remove the screws securing the NAV Flag Adapter to its mounting location.
d. Remove the NAV Flag Adapter from the airplane.
3-166. INSTALLATION OF NAV FLAG ADAPTER. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7600001 to 7700017; PA-32-300,
SI N 32-7640001 to 7740075; PA-32R-300, SI N 32R-7680001 to 7780350 and PA-34-200T, SI N 34-7670001 to
7770261) (Refer to Figure 3-36.)
a. Position the N A V Flag Adapter at its mounting location on the firewall and secure with appropriate
screws.
b.
c.
Connect the electrical connector to the NAV Flag Adapter.
Check operation of the NAV Flag Adapter (Refer to Section V.)
3-167. REMOVAL OF KA-52 AUTOPILOT ADAPTER.
The KA-52 autopilot adapter is located on a mounting bracket behind the left instrument panel.
NOTE
The only installation incorporating the KA-52 autopilot adapter is
the King KC5-55 Compass System. The EDO-AIRE Mitchell
Compass System does not require the KA-52 autopilot adapter.
a. Access to the KA-52 autopilot adapter is from beneath the instrument panel.
b. Disconnect the electrical connector from the KA-52 adapter.
c. Remove the screws securing the KA-52 adapter to the mounting bracket.
d. Remove the KA-52 adapter from the airplane.
ADDED: 11/30/79
COURSE ADJUSTMENT
POTENTIOMETER
Figure 3-37. KA-52 Autopilot Adapter Installation
3-168. INSTALLATION OF KA-52 AUTOPILOT ADAPTER. (Refer to Figure 3-37.)
a. Position the KA-52 adapter on the mounting bracket located behind the instrument panel and
b. Connect the electrical connector to the KA-52 adapter.
c. Check operation of KA-52 adapter. (Refer to Section V.)
ADDED: 11/30/79
3-81
SECTION IV
TEST EQUIPMENT
Paragraph Page
4-1. Introduction - Test Equipment Requirements. AutoPilot Test Kit,
Piper PIN 753 439 (66D141) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4-1
4-2. 66D141-1 Gyro Substitute ...................................... 4-1
4-3. 66D141-2 Power Section ....................................... 4-1
4-4. 66D141-3 Console Substitute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4-2
4-5. 66D141-4 Radio Coupler Tester ................................... 4-4
4-6. 66Dl41 Test Kit and Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4-4
4-7. Troubleshooting ............................................. 4-4
4-8. Checking Servo Motor Current Drain (No Load) ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4-7
ISSUED: 11/25/74 iv-i
SECTION IV
TEST EQUIPMENT
4-1. INTRODUCTION - TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS. AUTOPILOT TEST KIT, PIPER PIN 753
439 (66D141).
a. The 66D 141 Test Kit is designed to facilitate testing the AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot System on a
substitution basis. Provisions are made to substitute into an operating system any major component except
the amplifier. Each piece of test equipment can be used for various tests, not limited to what is given in this
description.
b. The Test Kit consists of four major sections plus necessary connecting cables. These sections are
listed as follows:
1. 66D141-1 Directional and Attitude Gyro Substitute.
2. 66D141-2 Power Section.
3. 66D141-3 Console Substitute.
4. 66D141-4 Radio Coupler Tester.
4-2. 66D141-1 GYRO SUBSTITUTE. (Refer to Figure 4-1.)
a. With this section, both the directional gyro and the artificial horizon can be replaced
(simultaneously) with substitute signal sources. The directional gyro signal is variable in steps to provide
outputs corresponding to 0, 10 and 45 degrees left and right. The zero position is used to provide an
accurate zero signal so that the roll centering adjustment can be accurately set or checked for range of
control. The 10 0 outputs are used to check the heading sensitivity of the amplifier command channel and,
by means of comparison, to determine whether or not the directional gyro in question provides a signal
usable for operation with the system. The 45
0
outputs are provided for the purpose of checking radio
coupler intercept angles and can be used to simulate the course selector of the directional gyro being moved
to a new heading.
A large vernier knob, marked attitude gyro with a dual scale marked roll degrees and pitch
degrees, is provided to give a measurement in degrees of deviation from straight and level flight in the roll or
pitch mode of operation.
4-3. 66D141-2 POWER SECTION. (Refer to Figure 4-2.)
a. With this equipment, amplifier output and servo performance can be observed. Two connectors
are provided so the cable to either servo can be intercepted. A pilot light is provided to indicate the
presence of solenoid voltage. A voltmeter is provided to monitor the signal actually being applied to the
servo motor. A five position selector switch is provided to select various modes of servo operation. These
are: Two positions on the left side marked "BAT," which will allow the operator to apply a full signal
directly to the servo motor to check operation in either direction. Two positions on the right side marked
"AMPL." One is marked "RES." and serves to apply a resistive load to the amplifier in the event the servo
motor is not available to the technician. The other position in this mode is marked "MTR.," and measures
the signal being applied to the servo motor.
TEST EQUIPMENT
ISSUED: 11/25/74
4-1
LI'I
...
"'"
'"
~
ATTITUDE GYRO
CO.18
SOLENOID
~
0
~ ~ .
<i(t)::.>
ROLL
e>
~
14V PUSH
~
~
(5)
PITCH
0
OG INPUT
28V
SELECTOR
VOLTAGE
CO33
GYRO SUBSTITUTE 660141.1
0 POWER SECTION 660141.2
Figure 4-1. Gyro Substitute Figure 4-2. Power Section
4-4. 66D141-3 CONSOLE SUBSTITUTE. (Refer to Figure 4-3.)
a. Electrically, this console is interchangeable with the standard autopilot console for test purposes.
Using the substitute console, it is possible to determine rapidly if the combination of signal sources and
amplifier can be brought within usable limits by means of the adjustments provided on the standard
console. Also, it serves as a substitute to aid in determining whether or not the installed console or altitude
selector is defective.
b. An OFF-ON power switch and 4 two-position slide switches are provided. These are:
1. Selector switch for autopilot operating voltage.
2. Directional gyro or manual selector switch corresponding to the roll and HDG push button
switches on the console.
3. Altitude control or manual selector switch corresponding to the pitch and altitude push
button switches on the console.
4. Minimum and maximum limit selector switch, equivalent to Min. (Full CCW) and Max. (Full
CW) positions of limit potentiometers on the console.
c. There are five adjustments provided. These are:
1. Roll manual knob corresponding to the roll manual control on the console.
2. Pitch manual knob corresponding to the pitch manual control on the console.
3. Roll trim knob corresponding to the roll centering adjustment potentiometer on the
console.
4. Pitch trim knob corresponding to the pitch centering adjustment potentiometer on the
console.
5. Altitude control knob simulating the altitude hold on the console.
d. The connector from the console is plugged into the CD-20 receptacle. The CD-lO receptacle
replaces the altitude hold for bench or in-airplane tests.
4-2 TEST EQUIPMENT
ISSUED: 11/25/74
T
E
S
T

E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T

I
S
S
U
E
D
:

1
1
/
2
5
/
7
4

P
I
P
E
R

A
L
T
I
M
A
T
I
C

I
n
c

S
E
R
V
I
C
E

M
A
N
U
A
L

M

W
-
I

O
W
-
I

-.
.
q
-
0
0

-
0
0

-
:
:
l
o
:
:
:

0
:
:
:

0

1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
-
.
0

-
z

i
=
z

-
.
0

Z

.
/

.
.
.
.
.
.

0
-
1
0

o

I

\

<
u

U
<
U

I

>
<

<

:
c

z

/
'

.
.
.
.
.

I
-
U

W

o

-
l
-
I
-
I

\

Q
.

-
I

Q
.

:
;
:
)

I

<

I
-
:
:
l

0

Z

z

I
-
<

<

V
I

-
I

/
X
I

-
I

:
;
:
)

0

V
I

0
:
:
:

0
:
:
:

W

t
-
-

.
.
.
J

.

0

z

V
I

-
I

Z

-
I

0

0

U

0
:
:
:

I
-

-
I

.

I
-
<

-
I

:
:
l

<

Z

<

0

0
:
:
:

N

W

0

o

1
:1
1
:1

I
:
U
:
J

1
:
1

g
l
:
:
l

I
:
U
J
I
:
I

u

0

Q
.

F
i
g
u
r
e

4
-
3
.

C
o
n
s
o
l
e

S
u
b
s
t
i
t
u
t
e

4
-
3

4-5. 660141-4 RADIO COUPLER TESTER. (Refer to Figure 4-4.)
a. The coupler tester contains a simulated radio signal source and intercepts the coupler output to
provide direct monitoring of coupler performance. When used with the directional gyro signal source
described in paragraph 4-2, and with an autopilot amplifier as a source of power, a complete static testing
of coupler performance is possible. The radio coupler tester consists of the following functions:
1. Output meter to measure the output of the radio coupler.
2. Simulated OMNI meter to simulate an OMNI signal applied to the system or to measure the
actual OMNI ou tpu t signal from the airplane radio.
3. Three connectors, two of which are to intercept the lead from the amplifier to the Radio
Coupler (CD-33) and the third (CD-34) to either apply a simulated radio signal or check the actual signal
from the OBI to the Radio Coupler.
4. Radio signal substitute knob which corresponds to the OBS on the OBI.
5. A two position slide switch to select a corresponding autopilot operating voltage.
6. A MIC key push button corresponding to the MIC key in the airplane.
7. A push to null button is not used with the III Series Autopilots.
8. Two DC input connectors for power to operate the MIC key portion of the tester and to
supply power for the face plate lights of the coupler.
NOTE
The radio signal substitute portion of the tester has an internal
power supply consisting of one 9V battery. Wht!ll full deflection
of the simulated OMNI signal can not be obtained under load,
replace battery.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to troubleshoot a lC-388-2 radio coupler thru
by-passing it. By connecting the AI P harness connector directly
into the NS D-360 I 360A CD-33 plug, the computer I amplifier
oscillator will probably burn out. (A lC-388 coupler may be
by-passed directly to a 52054 D.G. with "bug," but the same
procedure will not work with an NSD.)
4-6. 660141 TEST KIT AND CABLES.
a. Shown in Figure 4-5 is a block diagram of the complete test kit instruments and cable storage
area. Each test kit has a serial number. Make sure the equipment in the kit has the correct serial number.
When referring to the factory for service or calibration of any instrument, give serial number of the
equipment.
b. The 660141 Test Kit contains a set of test cables. They are marked with the number which
corresponds with either the test equipment or the piece being tested. Refer to Section VI for Wiring
Diagrams of the AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot System.
4-7. TROUBLESHOOTING.
a. By determining in advance from symptoms described by the pilot, the serviceman may decide
which section of the autopilot may be causing the trouble and isolate the defective unit rapidly by a logical
SUbstitution method. Refer to Table IV-I before attempting to troubleshoot the Autopilot System. Isolate
the trouble into one of three groups. The first group corresponds to the inputs of the autopilot listed under
the term input in the trouble isolation diagram. It is recommended that the technician, by use of the
appropriate test equipment, reproduce the input signals of the forward group and observe the autopilot
responds either correctly or incorrectly. The reason for this is that this group is the easiest group to work
4-4
TEST EQUIPMENT
REVISED: 8/10/78
PIPER ALTIMATIC lIIC SERVICE MANUAL
on. If, with the correct inputs, the autopilot still does not respond correctly (by noting the servo motor
rotation of the airplane control system) the component called out in the middle group should be removed,
set up and monitored on the bench as outlined in Section V.If all inputs are correct and the components of
the middle group are functioning properly, only then should the airplane control system, as given in the
output group, be referred to for troubleshooting. Refer to Section III for proper cable tension and bridle
cable installation.
b. For proper cable tensions and correct bridle cable positioning, refer to the appropriate paragraph
in Section III for the unit and airplane being serviced.
c. The Clutch Adjustment Procedure is not authorized in the field at this time on copper/carbon
CD.33 CD33
\

\ ,0 10 111/111
'!>() ,]0 rl
1//

&
AMPLIFIER COUPLER
0
14 V

RADIO SIGNAL
28V
0 SUBSTITUTE
@
PUSH
@
TO NULL
PUSH OFF
COUPLER TESTER
Figure 4-4. Radio Coupler Tester
TEST EQUIPMENT
REVISED: 8/10/78
CD34
RADIO
@
...
DC
INPUT
@
PUSH
@
MIC KEY
66D141-4
4-5
RADIO COUPLER TESTER
POWER
66D141-4
SECTION
6601412
CABLE
STORAGE
POCKET
CONSOLE SUBSTITUTE
GYRO
66D1413
SUBSTITUTE
660141.1
Figure 4-5. Block Diagram of 66D 141 Test Kit
type clutches as per manufacturer, EDO-AIRE MITCHELL.
d. The servo motor current drain test is outlined in the following paragraph.
e. For electronic troubleshooting. of the AltiMatic IIIC, refer to the appropriate Bench Set-up
Procedure in Section V.
4-8. CHECKING SERVO MOTOR CURRENT DRAIN (NO LOAD).
The servo motor may be checked in the airplane for current drain using a standard ammeter (or
equivalent) in series with the motor. The following procedure will facilitate this check.
4-6
NOTE
If the servo motor current drain is over one-half amp, it must be
replaced.
a. I t shall be necessary to improvise an adapter for the CD-16 or CD-47 plug.
b. Connect the negative side of a 12-volt source to pin "C" on servo motor plug.
c. Connect pin "D" to one lead of the amme ter.
d. Connect the remaining ammeter lead to the positive side of the 12-volt source.
CAUTION
Before applying voltage as described in the following steps, note
the initial application of voltage should only be for ONE SECOND
to ascertain there are no shorts which will cause damage to the
meter.
TEST EQUIPMENT
REVISED: 3/10/78
e. Apply voltage from the 12-volt source for ONE SECOND to ascertain no shorts exist.
f. Apply voltage from the l2-volt source and take current reading. Turn off voltage after reading
has been obtained.
g. To check the motor operation in the opposite direction, reverse connections "C" and "D" on the
servo motor plug and apply voltage and check current reading. If the reading is more than one-half amp, the
servo motor must be replaced.
NOTE
Motor must be tested in both directions.
TABLE IV-I. TROUBLE ISOLATION BLOCK DIAGRAM
INPUT
Directional Gyro
Artificial Horizon
Altitude Selector
Coupler
TEST EQUIPMENT
ISSUED: 11/25/74
MIDDLE OUTPUT
Cables
Computer
Servo Motor
Amplifier
Solenoid
Console
Mechanics
4-7
SECTION V
SETUP PROCEDURES
Paragraph
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
5-9.
5-10.
5-11.
5-12.
5-13.
5-14.
5-15.
5-16.
5-17.
5-18.
5-19.
5-20.
5-21.
.... 5-22.
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Bench Set-Up and Adjustment of AltiMatic mc Console and I C515-1 I I C515-3
Amplifier Without Radio Coupler ...... . .... .
Roll Threshold Adjustment for AltiMatic IIlC ....... .
Pitch Bench Set-Up for AltiMatic lIIC ................ .
Pitch Threshold Adjustment for AltiMatic IIIC ............ .
AltiMatic lIIC Ground Check Without Radio Coupler (Roll) .... .
AltiMatic IlIC Flight Adjustments Without Radio Coupler (Roll) ..
Bench Set-Up and Adjustments for AltiMatic lIIC Console and IC515-11 lC515-3
Amplifier With Radio Coupler ....... .
Roll Threshold Adjustment for AltiMatic mc ...... .
Pitch Bench Set-Up for AltiMatic mc ........... .
Pitch Threshold Adjustment for AltiMatic lIIC ...... .
AltiMatic HIC Ground Checks With Radio Coupler (Roll) .
Ground Check - Pitch ................... ..
AltiMatic IIIC Flight Adjustments With Radio Coupler (Roll)
AltiMatic IIIC Flight Adjustment - Pitch .......... .
AltiMatic IIlC Ground Check (Optional Yaw Damper)
Check and Adjusting Radio Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piper Omni/Localizer Coupler Modification (1 C388 Series)
NAV Converter (lC707) Alignment Procedure ...... .
Adjustments of Slaving Sub-System ............ .
AltiMatic IIlC With Optional King KCS-55 Compass System
Alignment Procedure .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Yaw Damper Ground Check ............................................... .
REVISED: 10/16/81
Page
5-1
5-1
5-6
5-8
5-10
5-12
5-12
5-14
5-21
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-29
5-30
5-30
5-32
5-33
5-37
5-39
5-42
v-i
SECTION V
SET-UP PROCEDURES
5-1. INTRODUCTION. This section contains information on how to set up the AltiMatic mc on the
bench. There is also information on checking the autopilot on the ground. Flight adjustments, which are
the final adjustments, are given in this section also. For the removal and installation of the AltiMatic IlIC
components, refer to Section III, Removal and Installation.
NOTE
It is MANDATORY that the AltiMatic mc be set up according to
bench set-up procedures in this section prior to installation in the
airplane.
CAUTION
When the AltiMatic mc is being adjusted, excessive turning of the
adjustment potentiometers should be avoided as this may cause
premature failure of the potentiometer.
5-2. BENCH SET-UP AND ADJUSTMENT OF ALTIMATIC lIIC CONSOLE AND IC515-1/IC515-3
AMPLIFIER WITHOUT RADIO COUPLER.
NOTE
If either the console or the amplifier is replaced, the console must
be set up through its complete adjustment procedure:
a. The following equipment will be required from the Autopilot Test Kit, Piper PIN 753 439
(66D14l).
1. Gyro Substitute Test Box 66D141-1.
2. Power Section Test Box 66D14l-2.
3. Console Substitute Box 66D14l-3.
4. AltiMatic III test harness, identified by a large 30-pin AMP connector feeding through five
connecting cables labeled CD-16, CD-18, CD-20, CD-33 and CD-47. This cable also contains two white
wires, one wire terminating at a Delco fitting labeled CD-27 and the other terminating at a knife connector
labeled CD-26.
5. Servo Extension Cable CD-47/CD-16 with a male CD-47 connector on one end and a female
CD-47 connector on the other end.
b. BENCH SET-UP AND ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ARE AS FOLLOWS:
1. Remove the console face plate by removing the roll command knob and four face plate
mounting screws. After removing the face plate, reinstall the roll command knob to facilitate accomplishing
bench set-up adjustments.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-1
2. Determine that the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCHES, located on top plate of amplifier
and the right side of the console are in the same position (14 or 28-volts DC) as the bench power supply.
This will insure proper autopilot operation and prevent damage to the components.
3. Hold the AMPLIFIER with 30-pin amplifier board facing you. Plug large 30-pin AMP
connector of the- test harness onto the amplifier board with the cable fanning out to your right.
Identification placard on the amplifier should be visible .
. 4. Plug AMP connector CD-20 into the CD-20 receptacle located on the rear of the console.
5. Check that all WHITE ENGAGE SWITCHES are pushed to their "OFF" positions on the
autopilot console.
6. Plug the 4-pin male CD-47 connector into the female 4-pin receptacle, located on the right
hand side of the Power Section Test Box. This receptacle is labeled AMPLIFIER. On the Power Section
Test Box, find the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH on the lower left hand corner and insure that this
switch is positioned to rna tch the bench power supply and the amplifier voltage selector switch as in Step 2
(14 or 28-volts DC).
7. Rotate SELECTOR KNOB on Power Section Test Box to the CENTER or "OFF" position.
8. Plug the female 7-pin CD-33 connector into the male S-pin CD-33 connector located on the
bottom left hand corner of the Gyro Substitute Test Box.
9. Plug the 7-pin female CD-18 connector into the 7-pin male CD-18 connector on the left
hand side of the Gyro Substitute Test Box.
10. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on the Gyro Substitute Test Box to the
centered ZERO position reading the TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
11. Immediately below the large vernier knob, find a ROLL or PITCH SELECTOR SLIDE
SWITCH. Move this switch to the "ROLL" position.
12. Immediately to the right of the slide swtich, find a DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR
KNOB. Rotate this knob to ZERO or straight "UP" position.
13. Set aside the remaining cables labeled CD-16 and CD-IO. Connect a ground lead to the
bottom mounting flange of the AltiMatic mc amplifier.
CAUTION
DO NOT place the ground lead near the output transistors located
between the cooling fins along the side of the amplifier.
14. Connect the face plate to the console face plate lighting connector with servo extension
cable CD-47/CD-16 (with large hole Pin A on connector matching blank on console). Find two WHITE
WIRES originating at AMP connector CD-20 on rear of console, one wire terminating in a Delco fitting and
one white wire terminating in a KNIFE connector. Connect the white wire CD-26 terminating in a knife
connector to a positive 14 or 28-volt supply, whichever is applicable, and observe all face plate lights glow.
NOTE
Console translucent material glows very dimly, shield from
external light source. If some lights do not glow, replace bulbs
and/or console face plate as required. If none of the lights glow,
check DC power source and fuse.
15. Disconnect A+ lead from the knife connector and remove the servo extension cable
CD-47/CD-16 from the face pIa te and the console face plate lighting connector.
supply.
5-2
16. Attach the DELCO fitting from the remaining white wire to the positive side of the power
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
17. Push the ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH, located on the autopilot console, to the "ON" position
and observe that SOLENOID light located on the face of the Power Section Test Box glows.
NOTE
If solenoid light glows, proceed to Step 18. If solenoid light DOES
NOT glow, recheck power supply voltage and wiring harness for
correct connections. If solenoid light still does not glow with
cables properly connected and proper voltage applied, turn off
power supply and proceed to Step 21.
18. Disconnect A+ lead. The roll engage switch should disengage.
19. Connect A+ lead. Push ALL switches to the ON position. Ascertain that the Roll, Heading,
Pitch and ALT Switches engage. If switches fail to engage, replace console.
20. Push all console switches to the OFF position except the ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH and
proceed to Step 26.
21. Find CONSOLE SUBSTITUTE TEST BOX. Place the POWER SELECTOR SWITCH,
located on the lower left hand corner of the Console Substitute Test Box, to the DOWN or "OFF"
position.
22. Remove AMP connector CD-20 from the rear of the console and plug it into the CD-20
receptacle located on the top left corner of the Console Substitute Test Box.
23. Immediately to the right of the CD-20 AMP connector, find a 14 or 28-volt SLIDE
SWITCH. Place this switch in the proper voltage position to agree with VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH on
top plate of amplifier, also the selector switch on the lower left hand corner of the Power Section Test Box.
24. Reapply voltage from power supply and place POWER SELECTOR SWITCH on lower left hand
side of Console Substitute Box to the "ON" position. Observe SOLENOID LIGHT now glows on Power
Section Test Box.
NOTE
If light DOES GLOW, replace autopilot CONSOLE. If light DOES
NOT glow, replace autopilot AMPLIFIER. If component is
replaced return to beginning of test sequence.
25. Disconnect AMP connector CD-20 from Console Substitute Test Box and connect it to the
console.
26. Depress RED BUTTON on lower right corner of Power Section Test Box labeled INPUT
VOLTAGE. Test box needle should deflect to the right and read 12-14 volts DC or 24-28 volts DC.
27. Rotate SELECTOR KNOB, lower center of Power Section Test Box, CLOCKWISE to the
full right position labeled "RES."
28. Rotate the ROLL COMMAND KNOB, located on left side of the console, full left and
observe voltmeter on Power Section Test Box points LEFT to read approximately 12-volts.
29. Rotate ROLL COMMAND KNOB full right and observe voltmeter on Power Section Test
Box indicates right approximately 12 volts. Proceed to Step 31 if correct indication is recorded.
NOTE
If voltmeter does not deflect when rotating roll command knob,
recheck that heading switch on the console is pushed to the
"OFF" position.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-3
PIPER ALTIMA TIC IITC SERVICE MANUAL
30. If needle of voltmeter on Power Section Test Box still does not respond to the roll
command knob rotation, substitute the console with the Console Substitute Box. Remove the CD-20 plug
from the rear of console and plug it into the CD-20 receptacle on the Console Substitute Box. Place the
DIRECTIONAL GYRO MANUAL SLIDE SWITCH IN THE MANUAL POSITION. Make sure the POWER
SWITCH is in the "ON" position. Rotate the roll manual knob full RIGHT and observe if voltmeter on
Power Section Test Box points right. Rotate the roll manual knob full LEFT, observe if voltmeter on Power
Section Test Box points LEFT. If NEEDLE on voltmeter now MOVES, REPLACE the CONSOLE. If not,
replace the AMPLIFIER.
31. Make sure large vernier knob on Gyro Substitute Test Box is centered and points to ZERO
on TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
32. Push HEADING SWITCH on the console to the "ON" position. Rotate the roll command
knob on the console full right and left and observe there is NO movement of the needle on the Power
Section Test Box. If the needle moves, check that HEADING SWITCH is in the "ON" position. If needle
still moves, console MUST be replaced. If there is no needle movement, proceed with next step.
33. Find six adjustment potentiometers located on the front of the console and directly under
the trim meter. (Refer to Figure 5-1.) Insert SMALL slot head screwdriver in SECOND HOLE FROM LEFT
and adjust the roll centering adjustment until needle of voltmeter of Power Section Test Box centers and
holds on ZERO. If unable to adjust needle to ZERO by rotating the adjustment screw, replace console.
CAUTION
When making any adjustment on the AItiMatic IIIC, it is
MANDATORY to wait a minimum of 30 seconds before taking
any readings until the computer has time to digest any new
information.
34. With needle holding ZERO on Power Section Test Box, push the HEADING SWITCH, on
the console, to the "OFF" position and observe needle on Power Section Test Box. If needle DEFLECTS
off of zero, carefully adjust it back to zero by ROTATING the ROLL COMMAND KNOB on the console,
again waiting for the computer to digest the new command.
35. After the needle holds zero by adjusting the roll command knob, press HEADING SWITCH,
on the console, to the "ON" position and observe NO CHANGE occurs on the Test Box Needle Indication.
NOTE
If needle does change, repeat Steps 33 thru 35.
36. With needle holding zero in each mode, observe the physical position of the roll command
knob on the autopilot console is straight up approximately 3 degrees. If ROLL COMMAND KNOB is out
of tolerance, replace console.
37. Press HEADING SWITCH, on the console, to the "ON" position.
38. Place DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR CONTROL KNOB, located on the lower right
hand corner of the Gyro Substitute Test Box, to the right hand 45 degree position or full CLOCKWISE.
Observe needle deflects RIGHT on the Power Section Test Box.
39. Rotate LARGE VERNIER KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box CLOCKWISE to the right
hand 20 degree position reading the TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
NOTE
Large increments represent 5 degrees each.
5-4 SET.,UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
LEFT BANK ADJUSTMENT
ROLL CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
RIGHT BANK ADJUSTMENT
DOWN LIMIT ADJUSTMENT
PITCH CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
UP LIMIT ADJUSTMENT
PIPER ALTIMATIC I1IC SERVICE MANUAL
PITCH COMMAND KNOB
Figure 5-1. AltiMatic HIC Console
40. With small slot head screwdriver, adjust the potentiometer located inside the THIRD HOLE
from the left DIRECTLY below the trim meter on the console to center the needle on the Power Section
Test Box to zero. If unable to adjust to zero, replace console.
41. Leaving the HEADING SWITCH "ON", rotate the DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR
CONTROL KNOB, located on lower right hand corner of the Gyro Substitute Test Box, to the LEFT
HAND 45 degree position or full COUNTERCLOCKWISE. Observe needle on Power Section Test Box
deflects far left on scale.
42. Rotate LARGE VERNIER KNOB ON Gyro Substitute Test Box COUNTERCLOCKWISE
to the LEFT HAND 20 degree position, reading the TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES. With small slot
head screwdriver, adjust the POTENTIOMETER inside the LEFT HAND HOLE below the trim meter on
the console to center the needle on the Power Section Test Box to zero. If unable to adjust to zero, replace
console.
43. Rotate DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB, located on lower right hand corner of
Gyro Substitute Test Box to the LEFT HAND 1 0 degree position. Observe needle on Power Section Test
Box moves to the RIGHT.
44. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER KNOB on the Gyro Substitute Test Box
CLOCKWISE to center the needle on Power Section Test Box, again waiting for the computer to digest the
new information until the needle stays centered after at least a 30 second wait.
45. Read the degree of bank in the Gyro Substitute Test Box from the TOP SCALE labeled
ROLL DEGREES. The pointer must be between 8 and 13 degrees of bank angle. IF OUT OF
TOLERANCE, REPLACE AMPLIFIER.
46. Rotate the DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB, located at the lower right hand
corner of the Gyro Substitute Test Box, to the RIGHT HAND 1 0 degree position. Observe needle of Power
Section Test Box deflects to the RIGHT.
47. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER KNOB, located on the Gyro Substitute Test Box,
CLOCKWISE to center the needle of the Power Section Test Box. Again wait for the computer to digest
the new information until the needle stays centered after at least a 30 second wait.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-5
48. Read the degree of bank on the Gyro Substitute Test Box from the TOP SCALE labeled
ROLL DEGREES. The pointer must be between 8 and 13 degrees of bank angle. IF OUT OF
TOLERANCE, REPLACE AMPLIFIER.
49. Push the HEADING SWITCH, on the console, to the "OFF" position. Rotate the ROLL
COMMAND KNOB full right. Observe needle on Power Section Test Box indicates right.
50. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER KNOB on the Gyro Substitute Test Box CLOCKWISE to
center the needle on Power Section Test Box, again waiting for the computer to digest the new information
until the needle stays centered after at least a 30 second wait.
51. Read the degree of bank on the Gyro Substitute Test Box TOP SCALE labeled ROLL
DEGREES. Bank MUST be 28 degrees 3 degrees. IF OUT OF TOLERANCE, REPLACE CONSOLE.
52. Rotate the ROLL COMMAND KNOB full LEFT. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER KNOB on
the Gyro Substitute Test Box COUNTERCLOCKWISE to center the needle on the Power Section Test Box.
53. Read the degree of bank on the Gyro Substitute Test Box on the TOP SCALE labeled
ROLL DEGREES. Bank MUST be 28 degrees 3 degrees. IF OUT OF TOLERANCE, REPLACE
CONSOLE.
54. Recenter ROLL COMMAND KNOB to the center position. Rotate the POWER SECTION
TEST BOX SELECTOR KNOB, turning COUNTERCLOCKWISE to the CENTER or "OFF" position.
Rotate the DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB, located on lower right hand comer of Gyro
Substitute Test Box, to the ZERO or straight "UP" position.
55. Push ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH to the "OFF" position.
56. Refer to the following paragraph for Roll Threshold Adjustment Procedure.
5-3. ROLL THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT FOR ALTIMATIC IIIC.
Remove the base plate from the bottom of the amplifier to gain access to the roll threshold
adjustment potentiometer. (Refer to Figure 5-2.)
aside.
CAUTION
Threshold adjustments are to be accomplished with a 12-volt
calibrated bench set-up. When adjusting 28-volt systems, convert
bench set-up to 12-volt configuration until threshold adjustment
procedure is completed. Verify all switches are returned to the
28-volt position prior to reinstallation in 28-volt aircraft. Setting
of the large vernier control knob on the Gyro Substitute Test Box
is critical when doing this adjustment procedure.
1. Disconnect the AMP connector CD-20 from the rear of the console and set the console
located on the lower left hand comer of the Console Substitute Test Box, to the DOWN or "OFF"
position.
3. Plug the AMP connector CD-20 into the receptacle, located on the top left corner of the
Console Substitute Test Box.
4. Immediately to the right of the AMP connector CD-20 on the Console Substitute Test Box,
find the (14 or 28-volt) SLIDE SWITCH. Place this switch in the 14-volt position.
5. Place the DIRECTIONAL GYRO slide switch, located on lower left of Console Substitute
Test Box, in the UP or D.G. position.
"RES" position.
7. Ascertain the DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB, located on lower right hand
corner of Gyro Substitute Test Box, is in the ZERO or straight "UP" position.
5-6
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/14
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
ROLL THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT
POTENTIOMETER
Figure 5-2. AltiMatic IIIC, lC515-1/1C515-3 Amplifier
Threshold Adjustment Potentiometers
5-7
8. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box to the
9. Place the POWER SELECTOR SWITCH on lower left hand side of Console Substitute Test
Box to the "ON" position. Observe SOLENOID LIGHT now glows on Power Section Test Box.
10. Rotate the ROLL TRIM KNOB on Console Substitute Test Box as required to center the
needle on the Power Section Test Box to ZERO .
. 11. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box
CLOCKWISE for a one (1) degree right bank.
12. Observe voltmeter on Power Section Test Box and record meter reading. (Refer to Figure
5-3 for enlarged view of voltmeter.)
13. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box,
COUNTERCLOCKWISE for a one (1) degree left bank.
14. Observe voltmeter on Power Section Test Box and record meter reading. Average the meter
readings obtained and refer to Table V-I for correct voltage settings.
15. If voltage setting is correct proceed to next step. If voltage setting is incorrect find the Roll
Threshold Adjustment Potentiometer, located on the lower section of the amplifier printed circuit board
(refer to Figure 5-2), and adjust to obtain an average of the voltage settings listed in Table V-I by repeating
Steps 11 thru 14.
16. Rotate the Power Section Test Box Selector Knob COUNTERCLOCKWISE to the center or
"OFF" position.
Box to the "OFF" position.
18. Refer to the following paragraph for the Pitch Bench Set-up.
5-4. PITCH BENCH SET-UP FOR ALTIMA TIC IIIC.
1. Disconnect AMP connector CD-20 from the Console Substitute Test Box and connect it to
the console.
2. Unplug CD-47 connector attached to the face of the Power Section Test Box Amplifier
receptacle. Set aside the CD-47 that was removed and in its place install the 4-pin male CD-16 connector.
3. Plug the 5-pin female CD-lO connector into the 5-pin male connector on right hand side of
the Console Substitute Box.
4. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on the Gyro Substitute Test Box to read
zero on the BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES. '
5. Immediately below the vernier control knob, find a SLIDE SWITCH labeled ROLL and
PITCH. Place this switch in the "DOWN" or PITCH position.
6. Ascertain that the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCHES of all the components are in the
same position (14 or 28-voIts DC) as the bench power supply. This will insure proper autopilot operation
and prevent damage to the components.
7. Engage the ALTIMATIC IIIC by pushing the ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH, on the console, to
the "ON" position. DO NOT EXPECT SOLENOID LIGHT TO GLOW.
8. Push PITCH ENGAGE SWITCH, on the console, to the "ON" position and observe solenoid
light, located on the face of the Power Section Test Box, glows. If light glows, proceed with Step IS.
5-8
a. If solenoid light does not glow, recheck that CD-16 connector is installed in the
receptacle on the face of the Power Section Test Box labeled Amplifier.
b. If solenoid light does not glow, recheck power supply voltage and wiring harness for
correct connections.
c. If solenoid light still does not glow with cables properly connected and proper voltage
applied, turn off power supply and proceed with next step.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
9. Place the POWER SELECTOR SWITCH, located on the lower left hand corner of the
Console Substitute Box to the DOWN or "OFF" position.
10. Remove the AMP connector CD-20 from the rear of the console and plug it into the CD-20
receptacle located on the top left corner of Console Substitute Test Box.
11. Immediately to the right of the CD-20 AMP connector, find a 14 or 28-volt SLIDE
SWITCH. Ascertain the switch is in the proper voltage position to agree with both the voltage selector
switch on top plate of amplifier and the selector switch on the lower left corner of the Power Section Test
Box.
12. Reapply voltage from power supply and place power selector switch on lower left hand side
of Console Substitute Test Box to the UP or "ON" position. Observe solenoid light now glows on Power
Section Test Box.
NOTE
If light DOES glow, replace autopilot CONSOLE. If light DOES
NOT glow, replace autopilotAMPLlFIER.
14. Unplug the AMP connector CD-20 attached to the Console Substitute Test Box and connect
it to the CD-20 receptacle on the rear of the console.
15. Rotate the selector knob, . located on the face of the Power Section Test Box, full
CLOCKWISE to the "RES" position.
16. Make sure LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box is reading
ZERO on the BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
17. Rotate the PITCH COMMAND DISC up on AltiMatic Console, for a full DOWN command
and observe needle of Power Section Test Box deflects LEFT.
18. Rotate the PITCH COMMAND DISC down for a full UP command and observe needle of
Power Section Test Box deflects to the RIGHT.
19. Recenter PITCH COMMAND DISC so that the indice calls for a level attitude.
20. With a small slot head screwdriver adjust the FIFTH POTENTIOMETER from the left,
located directly below the trim meter on the console, to center the needle on the Power Section Test Box
to ZERO. (Refer to Figure 5-1.)
NOTE
Keep in mind you MUST WAIT 30 SECONDS for the autopilot to
digest any new information.
21. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box
COUNTERCLOCKWISE to indicate 7 degrees nose down, reading BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH
DEGREES.
22. Rotate PITCH COMMAND DISC up for a full "DOWN" command.
23. With a small slot head screwdriver adjust the FOURTH POTENTIOMETER from the left,
to ZERO. If unable to adjust to zero, replace console.
CLOCKWISE to indicate 10 degrees nose up reading BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
25. Rotate PITCH COMMAND DISC down for a full "UP" command.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-9
26. With a small slot head screwdriver adjust the SIXTH POTENTIOMETER from the left,
27. Push the ALT ENGAGE SWITCH, on the console, to the "ON" position.
COUNTERCLOCKWISE until the needle of the Power Section Test Box returns to ZERO .
. 29. Rotate PITCH COMMAND DISC down for a full "UP" command and then up for a full
"DOWN" command and note little change occurs on Power Section Test Box meter. Should a large amount
of needle movement be present during Pitch Command Disc movement recheck ALT ENGAGE SWITCH,
located on the console, is in the "ON" position. (If a large amount of needle movement is still present
during Pitch Command Disc movement, replace console.) Recenter Pitch Command Disc.
30. Push all console switches to the "OFF" position.
31. Refer to the following paragraph for Pitch Threshold Adjustment Procedure.
5-5. PITCH THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT FOR ALTIMATIC lIIC.
Remove the cover plate from the top of the amplifier to gain access to the Pitch Threshold
Adjustment Potentiometer. (Refer to Figure 5-2.)
aside.
CAUTION
bench set-up to 12-volt configuration until threshold adjustment
procedure is completed. Verify all switches are returned to the
position.
5. Place the ALT. CONTROL slide switch, located on lower left of Console Substitute Test
Box, in the UP or Alt. Control position.
6. Place the ALTITUDE CONTROL KNOB, located on upper right of Console Substitute Test
Box, to the straight up or 12 o'clock position.
7. Rotate the SELECTOR KNOB, lower center of Power Section Test Box, CLOCKWISE to
the "RES" position.
ZERO position on the BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
9. Immediately below the large vernier control knob on Gyro Substitute Test Box, find a
SLIDE SWITCH labeled ROLL and PITCH. Place this switch in the "DOWN" or PITCH position.
10. Place the POWER SELECTOR SWITCH on lower left hand side of Console SUbstitute Test
5-10
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUEU: 11/25/74
11. Rotate the PITCH TRIM KNOB on Console Substitute Test Box as required to center the
needle on Power Section Test Box to ZERO.
12. Rotate LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box
COUNTERCLOCKWISE to indicate three-quarters (3/4) degree nose down, reading BOTTOM SCALE
labeled PITCH DEGREES.
5,-3 for enlarged view of voltmeter.)
. 14. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER' CONTROL KNOB on Gvro Suhstitute Test Box
. CLOCKWISE to indicate three-quarters (3/4) degree nose up, reading BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH
DEGREES,
readings obtained and refer to Table V-II for correct voltage settings.
16. If voltage setting is correct proceed to next step. If voltage setting is incorrect find the Pitch
Threshold Adjustment Potentiometer, located on upper section of amplifier printed circuit board, (refer to
Figure 5-2) and adjust to obtain an average of the voltage setting listed in Table V-II by repeating Steps 12
thru 15.
17. Place the POWER SELECTOR SWITCH on Console Substitute Test Box to the "OFF"
position ..
18. Disconnect test equipment and associated cables and reinstall the components in the
airplane.
19. Proceed with ground checks and flight adjustments.
TABLE V-I. ROLL THRESHOLD
AIRCRAFT MODEL NOMINAL TIIRESIlOLl) VOLTAG!'
PA-23-250
P A-28 RT-20 I ;-20 I T
PA-31-310;-325
PA-31-350
PA-3IP
PA-32-260;-300, PA-32R-300
& PA-32RT-300;-300T
PA-32-301 ;-30IT
& PA-32R-301;-30IT
PA-34-200T
PA-44-180
PA-44-180T
3.0 volts
2.5 volts
2.5 volts
2.5 volts
2.5 volts
2.5 volts
2.5 volts
2.5 volts
2.5 volts
2.5 volts
TABLE V-II. PITCH THRESHOLD
AIRCRAFT MODEL
PA-23-250
PA-28RT-201 ;-20 IT
PA-31-310
I' A-31-325
PA-31-350
PA-3IP
PA-32-260;-300
PA-32R-300 & PA-32RT-300;-300T
PA-32-30 1 ;-301 T
& PA-32R-301;-30IT
PA-34-200T
P A-44-180
PA-44-180T
SET-UP PROCEDURES
UEVISED; 10/16/81
THRESHOLD YOLTJ\(il'
4.0 volts
4.0 volts
3.0 volts
4.0 volts
4.0 volts
4.0 volts
3.5 volts
4.0 volts
4.0 volts
4.0 volts
4.1 volts
4.1 volts
5-11
5-6. ALTIMATIC IIIC GROUND CHECK WITHOUT RADIO COUPLER (ROLL).
1. Remove the console face plate by removing the roll command knob and the four face plate
in-fligh t adjustmen ts.
2. Center the roll command knob and position HDG and ROLL engage switches to the "OFF"
position.
'3. Start airplane engine to obtain gyro stability.
4. Place the airplane control wheel to approximately neutral aileron or level flight position.
Push roll engage switch to the "ON" position. Move control wheel right and left to check for servo
engagemen t.
5. Rotate the roll command knob to the right and to the left and observe that the airplane
control whee1movcs in the correct direction.
NOTE
The airplane control wheel can be stopped in any position and will
not return to level position by centering the roll command knob.
The airplane control wheel will remain stationary at the time the
roll command knob is approximately centered or at its zero
electrical output position.
6. Center the Heading Bug of the Directional Gyro or Horizontal Situation Indicator and push
console HDG SWITCH "ON." WITH CONSOLE HEADING SWITCH PUSHED TO THE "ON" POSITION,
THE ROLL COMMAND KNOB ON THE CONSOLE BECOMES INOPERATIVE.
7. Set the Heading Bug for a heading change to the right, observe control wheel should turn
right. Make same check to the left. Return the Heading'Bug to existing aircraft heading.
8. Push ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH TO THE "OFF" position. Rotate the CONTROL WHEEL
right and left and observe servo disengaged.
9. Refer to paragraph 5-13 and proceed with AltiMatic IlIC Pitch Ground Check.
5-7. AL TIMATIC IIIC FLIGHT ADJUSTMENTS WITHOUT RADIO COUPLER (ROLL).
I. The aircraft shall be loaded to or near it's AFT-e.G. LI M IT for flight set-up to assure all flight
profiles are met. Consult AIRCRAFT WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA TO ENSURE FUEL BURN
DURING FLIGHT SET-UP DOES NOT PLACE AIRCRAFT OUTSIDE THE e.G. ENVELOPE.
Previous Altimatic series Autopilots do not require this loading. (Refer to Flight Manual for proper power
settings.) NOTE
For adjusting descent, 19 inches of mercury manifold pressure
must be used on all airplanes except the PA-31-31O, PA-31-325
and PA-3l-350 which must be adjusted at 20 inches of mercury
and the PA-31P which must be adjusted at 25 inches of mercury.
2. MAKE CERTAIN RUDDER TRIM IS ADJUSTED TO CENTER THE BALL. IF RUDDER
IS INCORRECTLY TRIMMED, THE ALTIMATIC WILL FLY THE AIRPLANE WITH A WING LOW TO
COMPENSATE FOR THE OUT OF TRIM RUDDER.
NOTE
SMOOTH AIR IS REQUIRED.
3. Push console HDG ENGAGE SWITCH to the "ON" position. Set the HEADING BUG to
the aircraft heading.
5-12
SET-UP PROCEDURES
HEVISED: 10/16/81
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
NOTE
METER INCREMENTS ARE
Q,6-VOLTS ON SCALE
1,2-VOLTS ON 30-VOLT SCA.LE
3 >
,
\' " ,/1111/
... :111
,0 vo TS "0
Q

XQ

0
COI ,TCQCO .. ' ROLL 10
SOLENOID
SERVO AMPLIFIER
0

14V PUSH

(5)
INPUT
28V
SELECTOR
VOLTAGE
0 POWER SECTION 660141.2
Figure 5-3. Power Section Test Box
5-13
4. Push ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH to the "ON" position. If the airplane does not maintain the
selected heading, adjust roll centering adjustment as necessary so that airplane remains on selected heading.
5. Set the HEADING BUG 150 degrees to the left of heading and observe the angle of bank on
the artificial horizon. Adjust the left bank screw of the console to obtain 20 degree bank. Rotating the
adjustment screw clockwise will increase the bank angle.
CAUTION
Make certain HEADING BUG does not get within 25 degrees of
the airplane's heading until the adjustment is completed.
6. Set the HEADING BUG 150 degrees to the RIGHT and observe the angle of bank. Adjust
the right bank adjustment screw of the console to obtain a 20 degree bank. Rotating adjustment screw
CLOCKWISE INCREASES bank angle.
CAUTION
Make certain HEADING BUG does not get within 25 degrees of
the airplane's heading until the adjustment is completed.
7. Allow the airplane to become established on the selected heading. Observe that autopilot
maintains a selected heading within 2 degrees. If not, repeat Step 4.
NOTE
Always recheck bank settings after adjusting roll centering.
8. Make certain roll knob is centered. Push console HDG ENGAGE SWITCH to the "OFF"
position and observe that the airplane flies wings level within 2 degrees.
9. Turn the roll command knob full LEFT and observe that airplane banks LEFT 28 3
degrees.
10. Turn the roll command knob full RIGHT and observe that airplane banks RIGHT 28 3
degrees.
11. Refer to paragraph 5-15 and proceed with AltiMatic IIIC Pitch Flight Check Adjustments.
5-8. BENCH SET-UP AND ADJUSTMENTS FOR ALTIMATIC IIIC CONSOLE AND lC515-1/1C515-3
AMPLIFIER WITH RADIO COUPLER.
NOTE
If either the console or the amplifier is replaced, the console must
be set up through its complete adjustment procedure.
a. The following equipment will be required from the Autopilot Test Kit, Piper PIN 753439
(66DI41).
514
1. Gyro Substitute Test Box 66D 141-1.
2. Power Section Test Box 66DI41-2.
3. Console Substitute Box 66DI41-3.
4. Radio Coupler Tester 66D 141-4.
SETUP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
_____ .I_CD_-_34 .... E
CD-33! !30A256-36[
__ _______ C_D_-47/C_D_-16 ________ __
Figure 54. Extension Test Cables
5. AltiMatic III test harness, identified by a large 30-pin AMP connector feeding through five
connecting cables labeled CD-16, CD-18, CD-20, CD-33 and CD-47. This cable also contains two white
wires, one wire terminating at a Delco fitting labeled CD-27 and the other terminating at a knife connector
labeled CD-26.
6. Servo Extension Cable CD47/CD-16 with a male CD-47 connector on one end and a female
CD-47 connector on the other end.
7. One radio extension cable approximately 3 feet long with a female 9-pin connector labeled
CD-34 on each end.
8. Two amplifier extension cables, approximately 3 feet long, with a female 7-pin connector
labeled CD-33 on one end and a male 7-pin connector also labeled CD-33 at the other end.
9. One Coupler Test Box power cable, approximately 3 feet long, with a RED and BLACK
alligator clip on one end and a red and black male plug on the other end.
b. BENCH SET-UP AND ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ARE AS FOLLOWS:
bench set-up adjustments.
2. Determine that the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCHES, located on top plate of amplifier
and the right side of the console are in the same position (14 or 28-volts DC) as the bench power supply.
This will insure proper autopilot operation and prevent damage to the components.
3. Hold the AMPLIFIER with 30-pin amplifier board facing you. Plug large 30-pin AMP
connector of the test harness onto the amplifier board with the cable fanning out to your right.
Identification placard on the amplifier should be visible.
4. Plug AMP connector CD-20 from the test harness onto the CD-20 receptacle located on the
rear of the console.
5. Check that all WHITE ENGAGE SWITCHES are pushed to their "OFF" positions on the
autopilot console.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-1S
AlliGATOR CLIP (BLACK) TIP PIN (BLACK)
AlliGATOR Cli P (RED) TIP PIN (RED)
Figure 5-5. Radio Coupler Power Cable
6. Plug the 4-pin male CD-47 connector from the test harness into the female 4-pin receptacle
located on the right hand side of the Power Section Test Box. This receptacle is labeled AMPLIFIER. On
the Power Section Test Box, find the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH on the lower left hand comer and
insure that this switch is positioned to match the bench power supply and the amplifier voltage selector
switch in Step 2. (14 or 28-volts DC).
8. Connect the CD-33 CABLE coming from the large AMP connector of the amplifier, into the
male 7-pin connector located on the face of the Radio Coupler Test Box at the upper left hand comer
(LABELED AMPLIFIER).
9. Find the RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB located on the RADIO COUPLER TEST
BOX, immediately to the right of the bottom omni meter. MAKE SURE THIS RADIO SIGNAL KNOB IS
IN THE "IN" POSITION.
10. Find the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH located immediately to the left of the Red and
Black DC input terminals on the face of the Radio Coupler Test Box. Place this VOLTAGE SELECTOR
SWITCH in the proper voltage position.
11. Connect one of the two CD-33 EXTENSION CABLES to the 7-pin female connector
LABELED COUPLER, located on the face of the Radio Coupler Test Box.
12. Connect the 7-pin female connector at the other end of the CD-33 cable to the 7-pin male
connector located on the rear of the radio coupler LABELED CD-33.
13. Find the CD-34 EXTENSION CABLE with female connectors at both ends. Connect one
end of this cable to the male 9-pin connector located on the rear of the radio coupler LABELED CD-34.
Connect the other female 9-pin connector CD-34 on this cable to the male 9-pin connector located on the
face of the Radio Coupler Test Box, LABELED RADIO, CD-34.
14. Connect the short cable coming from inside the radio coupler with a 5-pin female connector
LABELED CD-33 on the end to the 5-pin male connector located on the face of the Gyro Substitute Test
Box.
15. Connect the CD-18 cable coming from the large AMP plug at the amplifier to the 7-pin male
connector located on the face of the Gyro Substitute Test Box LABELED CD-18.
16. Rotate LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on face of Gyro Substitute Test Box to the
CENTER or "ZERO" position on the TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
17. Below the large vernier knob on the Gyro Substitute Box, find a SLIDE SWITCH labeled
"ROLL" and "PITCH." Place this slide switch in the "UP" or "ROLL" position.
KNOB.
5-16
18. Immediately to the right of the slide switch, find a DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
19. Place this DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB to the CENTER or "ZERO" position.
20. Find the RADIO COUPLER POWER CABLE with the RED and BLACK alligator clips on
one end. (Refer to Figure 5-5.) Plug the RED and BLACK MALE PLUGS of the Coupler Test Box Power
Cable into the red and black female receptacles located on the face of the Radio Coupler Test Box
LABELED DC INPUT.
21. Connect the RED and BLACK ALLIGATOR CLIPS to a 14 or 28-volt DC power supply,
whichever is applicable, FUSED at 3 AMPS USED TO CHECK COUPLER LIGHTS ONLY.
CAUTION
OBSERVE POLARITY.
22. Make sure all white buttons on the console are PUSHED to their "OFF" position.
23. Set aside the remaining cables labeled CD-16 and CD-IO. Connect a ground lead to the
bottom mounting flange of the AltiMatic I1IC amplifier.
CAUTION
DO NOT place the ground lead near the output transistors located
between the cooling fins along the side of the amplifier.
24. Connect the face plate to the console face plate lighting connector with servo extension
cable CD-47/CD-16 (with large hole Pin A on connector matching blank on console). Find two WHITE
WIRES originating at AMP connector CD-20 on rear of console, one wire terminating in a Delco fitting and
one white wire terminating in a knife connector. Connect the white wire CD-26 terminating in a knife
connector to a positive 14 or 28-volt supply, whichever is applicable, and observe all face plate lights glow.
NOTE
Console translucent material glows very dimly, shield from
external light source. If some lights do not glow, replace bulbs
and/or console face plate as required. If none of the lights glow,
check DC power source and fuse.
25. Disconnect A+ lead from the knife connector and remove the servo extension cable
CD-47/CD-16 from the face plate and the console face plate lighting connector.
26. Attach the DELCO fitting from the remaining white wire to the positive side of the power
supply.
27. Push the ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH, located on the autopilot console, to the "ON" position
and observe that SOLENOID light located on the face of the Power Section Test Box glows.
NOTE
If solenoid light glows, proceed to Step 28. If solenoid light DOES
NOT glow, recheck power supply voltage and wiring harness for
correct connections. If solenoid light still does not glow with
cables properly connected and proper voltage applied, tum off
Power Supply and proceed to Step 31.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-17
28. Disconnect A+ lead. The roll engage switch should disengage.
29. Connect A+ lead. Push ALL console switches to the ON position. Ascertain that the Roll,
Heading, Pitch and ALT Switches engage. If switches fail to engage, replace console.
30. Push all console switches to the OFF position except the ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH and
proceed to Step 36.
position.
32. Remove AMP connector CD-20 from the rear of the console and plug it into the CD-20
receptacle located on the top left corner of the Console Substitute Test Box.
33. Immediately to the right of the AMP connector CD-20 find a 14 or 28-volt SLIDE SWITCH.
Place this switch to the proper voltage position to agree with VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH on the top
plate of the amplifier, also the selector switch on the lower left hand corner of the Power Section Test Box.
34. Reapply voltage from power supply and place POWER SELECTOR SWITCH on lower left
hand side of Console Substitute Box to the "ON" position. Observe SOLENOID LIGHT now glows on
Power Section Test Box.
console.
NOTE
NOT glow, replace autopilot AMPLIFIER. If component is
replaced return to beginning of test sequence.
35. Disconnect AMP connector CD-20 from Console Substitute Test Box and connect it to the
36. Depress RED BUTTON on lower right corner of Power Section Test Box labeled INPUT
VOLTAGE. Test box needle should deflect to the right and read 12-14 volts DC or 24-28 volts DC.
full right position labeled "RES."
38. Rotate the ROLL COMMAND KNOB, located on left side of the console, full left and
observe voltmeter on Power Section Test Box points LEFT to read approxima tely l2-volts.
39. Rotate ROLL COMMAND KNOB full right and observe voltmeter on Power Section Test
Box indicates right approximately l2-volts. Proceed to Step 41 if correct indication is recorded.
NOTE
If voltmeter DOES NOT deflect when rotating roll command
knob, recheck that heading switch, on the console, is pushed to
the "OFF" position.
40. If needle of voltmeter on Power Section Test Box still does not respond to the roll
command knob rotation, substitute the console with Console Substitute Box. Remove the CD-20 plug from
the rear of console and plug it into the CD-20 receptacle on the Console Substitute Box. Place the
DIRECTIONAL GYRO MANUAL SLIDE SWITCH in the MANUAL POSITION. Make sure the POWER
SWITCH is in the "ON" position. Rotate the roll manual knob full RIGHT and observe if voltmeter on
Power Section Test Box points RIGHT. Rotate the roll manual knob full LEFT. Observe if voltmeter on
Power Section Test Box points LEFT. If needle on voltmeter now MOVES, REPLACE the CONSOLE. If
not, replace the AMPLIFIER.
41. Make sure the large vernier knob on Gyro Substitute Test Box is centered and points to
ZERO on TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
5-18 SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
42. Place radio coupler SELECTOR SWITCH to the LOC/NORM mode and push HDG
ENGAGE SWITCH to "ON" position.
43. Depress the RED BUTTON on rear of the radio coupler.
44. Find six adjustment potentiometers located on the front of the console and directly under
the trim meter. (Refer to Figure 5-5.) While holding IN the RED BUTTON on rear of radio coupler, insert
small slot head screwdriver in SECOND HOLE FROM LEFT and adjust roll centering adjutment until
needle of voltmeter of Power Section Test Box centers and holds on ZERO. If unable to adjust needle to
ZERO by rotating the adjustment screw, replace console.
CAUTION
When making any adjustment on the AltiMatic IIIC,it is
MANDATORY to wait a minimum of 30 seconds before taking
any readings until the computer has time to digest any new
information.
45. Push the HDG SWITCH, on the console, to the "OFF" position.
46. Carefully adjust the ROLL COMMAND KNOB on the console to center the needle of the
Power Section Test Box to ZERO. Remember to wait at least 30 seconds before taking any readings.
47. Push in the HDG SWITCH, on the console, to the "ON" position and also press in RED
BUTTON on rear of radio coupler to observe the needle of the Power Section Test Box recenters on ZERO.
a. If needle does not recenter on ZERO, repeat Steps 41 thru 47 until centering is
accomplished.
48. Push HDG SWTICH, on the console, to the "OFF" position.
49. Observe the physical position of the roll command knob on the console. Make sure the knob
is straight up approximately 3 degrees. If ROLL COMMAND KNOB is out of tolerance, replace console.
50. Press HDG SWITCH, on the console, to the "ON" position.
51. Place radio coupler SELECTOR SWITCH to the HEADING mode. Place the
DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR CONTROL KNOB, located on the lower right hand comer of the
Gyro Substitute Test Box, to the RIGHT HAND 45 degree position or full CLOCKWISE. Observe needle
deflects RIGHT on the Power Section Box.
52. Rotate LARGE VERNIER KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box CLOCKWISE to the
RIGHT HAND 20 degree position, reading the TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
NOTE
Large increments represent 5 degrees each.
53. With small slot head screwdriver, adjust the POTENTIOMETER inside the THIRD HOLE
from the LEFT directly below the trim meter on the console to center the needle on the Power Section
Test Box to zero. If unable to adjust to zero, replace console.
54. Observe NEEDLE OF OUTPUT METER, located on Radio Coupler Test Box, indicates
RIGHT.
55. Leaving HEADING SWITCH "ON," rotate DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR CONTROL
KNOB, located on lower right hand comer of the Gyro Substitute Test Box, to the LEFT HAND 45 degree
position or full COUNTERCLOCKWISE. Observe needle deflects LEFT on Power Section Test Box.
56. Rotate LARGE VERNIER KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box COUNTERCLOCKWISE to
the LEFT HAND 20 degree position, reading the TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES. With a small slot
head screwdriver, adjust the POTENTIOMETER inside the LEFT HAND HOLE below the trim meter on
the console to center the needle on the Power Section Test Box to zero. Wait a minimum of 30 seconds for
the computer to digest the information.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-19
57. Observe the NEEDLE OF THE OUTPUT METER, located on Radio Coupler Test Box,
indicates LEFT.
corner of the Gyro Substitute Test Box, to the LEFT HAND 10 degree position. Observe needle on Power
Section Test Box moves to the RIGHT.
59. Observe the NEEDLE of the Output Meter on Coupler Test Box indicates LEFT.
center the needle on Power Section Test Box, again waiting for computer to digest the new information.
61. Read the degree of bank on the Gyro Substitute Test Box from the TOP SCALE labeled
ROLL DEGREES. The pointer must be between 8 and 13 degrees of bank angle.
NOTE
If out of tolerance, replace amplifier.
corner of the Gyro Substitute Test Box, to the RIGHT HAND 10 degree position. Observe the needle of
Power Section Test Box moves to the RIGHT.
63. Observe the NEEDLE of Output Meter on Coupler Test Box indicates RIGHT.
64. Rotate LARGE VERNIER KNOB, located on the Gyro Substitute Test Box CLOCKWISE
to center the needle on the Power Section Test Box, again waiting for the computer to digest the new
information.
65. Read the DEGREE OF BANK on the Gyro Substitute Test Box from the TOP SCALE
labeled ROLL DEGREES. The pointer must be between 8 and 13 degrees of bank angle.
NOTE
If out of tolerance, replace amplifier.
66. Rotate LARGE VERNIER KNOB, located on Gyro Substitute Test Box, back to the ZERO
DEGREE position on the TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
67. Rotate DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB, located on lower right hand corner of
the Gyro Substitute Test Box, COUNTERCLOCKWISE to the ZERO DEGREE position.
68. Push the HEADING SWITCH, on the console, to the "OFF" position.
69. Rotate the ROLL COMMAND KNOB full right. Observe needle on Power Section Test Box
indicates right.
center the needle on Power Section Test Box, again waiting for the computer to digest the new information
until the needle stays centered after at least a 30 second wait.
71. Read the degree of bank on the Gyro Substitute Test Box TOP SCALE labeled ROLL
DEGREES. Bank must be 28 degrees 3 degrees.
NOTE
If out of tolerance, replace console.
72. Rotate the ROLL COMMAND KNOB full LEFT.
73. Rotate LARGE VERNIER KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box COUNTERCLOCKWISE to
cen ter the needle on Power Section Test Box.
74. On the Gyro Substitute Test Box, read the degree of bank on the TOP SCALE labeled
ROLL DEGREES. Bank must be 28 degrees 3 degrees.
S20
SETUP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
NOTE
If out of tolerance, replace console.
75. Recenter ROLL COMMAND KNOB to CENTER position. Recenter LARGE VERNIER
KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box back to ZERO on TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
76. Push the HEADING SWITCH to the "ON" position.
77. Place the radio coupler SELECTOR SWITCH to the LOC/NORM mode and while holding
IN the RED BUTTON on the rear of the coupler, observe needle on the Power Section Test Box points to
zero 2 divisions and the needle on the Output Meter on the Radio Coupler Test Box also reads zero 2
small divisions.
78. Place the radio coupler SELECTOR SWITCH to the OMNI mode.
79. On the Radio Coupler Test Box, fmd RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB immediately
to the right of the lower Omni Meter. Pull this KNOB to the OUT or "ON" position.
80. Rotate the RADIO SIGNAL KNOB to deflect lower OMNI METER to the RIGHT 100%
POSITION. Observe needle of upper OUTPUT METER deflects RIGHT.
8!. Rotate DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box to the
LEFT HAND 45 degree position full COUNTERCLOCKWISE.
82. WAIT 90 SECONDS. After waiting the required minimum 90 seconds of time, adjust the
right INTERCEPT POTENTIOMETER SCREW located on the side of the radio coupler to center the
needle of the Power Section Test Box to ZERO.
83. With OUTPUT METER of Power Section Test Box adjusted to ZERO, observe OUTPUT
METER NEEDLE of Radio Coupler Test Box also indicates ZERO.
CAUTION
REMEMBER TO WAIT A MINIMUM OF 30 SECONDS AFTER
MAKING ANY INTERCEPT ADJUSTMENTS.
84. Rotate RADIO SIGNAL KNOB on Radio Coupler Test Box to place the needle of the lower
Omni Meter to the LEFT HAND 100% POSITION.
85. Rotate the DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box
CLOCKWISE to the RIGHT HAND 45 DEGREE POSITION. WAIT 90 SECONDS.
86. Adjust the LEFT INTERCEPT POTENTIOMETER SCREW, located on the side of the radio
coupler, to center the needle of the Power Section Test Box to indicate ZERO.
CAUTION
REMEMBER TO WAIT AT LEAST 30 SECONDS BEFORE
TAKING ANY READINGS AFTER MAKING INTERCEPT
ADJUSTMENTS.
87. After needle of Power Syction Test Box indicates ZERO, observe that upper OUTPUT
METER of Radio Coupler Test Box indicates ZERO.
88. Refer to Paragraph 5-17 and set radio gain of coupler as outlined in Paragraph 5-17, Page
5-30 of this manual prior to completing the Roll Threshold Adjustment Procedure in the following
paragraph.
5-9. ROLL THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT FOR ALTIMATIC IIIC.
Remove the base plate from the bottom of the amplifier to gain access to the roll threshold
adjustment potentiometer. (Refer to Figure 5-2.)
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-21
aside.
CAUTION
bench set-up to 12-volt configuration until Threshold Adjustment
Procedure is completed. Verify all switches are returned to the
located on the lower left hand comer of the Console Substitute Test Box, to the DOWN or "OFF"
position.
3. Plug the AMP connector CD-20 into the receptacle, located on the top left comer of the
5. Place the DIRECTIONAL GYRO slide switch, located on lower left of Console Substitute
Test Box, in the UP or D.G. position.
"RES" position.
7. Ascertain the DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB, located on lower right hand
comer of Gyro Substitute Test Box, is in the ZERO or straight "UP" position.
10. Rotate the ROLL TRIM KNOB on Console Substitute Test Box as required to center the
needle on the Power Section Test Box to ZERO.
CLOCKWISE for a one (1) degree right bank.
13. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box,
COUNTERCLOCKWISE for a one (1) degree left bank.
readings obtained and refer to Table V-I for correct voltage settings.
15. If voltage setting is correct proceed to next step. If voltage setting is incorrect find the Roll
Threshold Adjustment Potentiometer, located on the lower section of the amplifier printed circuit board
(refer to Figure 5-2), and adjust to obtain an average of the voltage settings listed in Table V-I by repeating
Steps 11 thru 14.
16. Rotate the Power Section Test Box Selector Knob COUNTERCLOCKWISE to the center or
"OFF" position.
Box to the "OFF" position.
18. Refer to the following paragraph for the Pitch Bench Set-up.
5-22
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-10. PITCH BENCH SET-UP FOR ALTIMATIC IIIC.
1. Disconnect the AMP connector CD-20 from the Console Substitute Test Box and connect it
to the console.
2. Unplug CD-47 connector attached to the face of the Power Section Test Box Amplifier
receptacle. Set aside the CD-47 that was removed and in its place install the 4-pin male CD-16 connector.
3. Plug the 5-pin female CD-IO connector into the 5-pin male connector on right hand side of
the Console Substitute Test Box.
4. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on the Gyro Substitute Test Box to read
zero on the BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
5. Immediately below the vernier control knob, find a SLIDE SWITCH labeled ROLL and
PITCH. Place this switch in the "DOWN" or PITCH position.
6. Ascertain that the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCHES of all the components are in the
same position (14 or 28-volts DC) as the bench power supply. This will insure proper autopilot operation
and prevent damage to the components.
7. Engage the ALTIMATIC IlIC by pushing the ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH, on the console, to
the "ON" position. DO NOT EXPECT SOLENOID LIGHT TO GLOW.
8. Push PITCH ENGAGE SWITCH, located on the console, to the "ON" position and observe
solenoid light, located on the face of the Power Section Test Box, glows. If light glows, proceed with Step
15.
a. If solenoid light does not glow, recheck that CD-16 connector is installed in the
receptacle on the face of the Power Section Test Box labeled Amplifier.
b. If solenoid light does not glow, recheck power supply voltage and wiring harness for
correct connections.
c. If solenoid light still does not glow with cables properly connected and proper voltage
applied, turn off power supply and proceed with next step.
10. Remove the AMP connector CD-20 from the rear of the console and plug it into the CD-20
receptacle located on the top left corner of Console Substitute Test Box.
11. Immediately to the right of the AMP connector CD-20 fil!d a 14 or 28-volt SLIDE SWITCH.
Ascertain the switch is in the proper voltage position to agree with both the voltage selector switch on top
plate of amplifier and the selector switch on the lower left corner of the Power Section Test Box.
12. Reapply voltage from power supply and place power selector switch on lower left hand side
of Console Substitute Test Box to the UP or "ON" position. Observe solenoid light now glows on Power
Section Test Box.
NOTE
NOT glow, replace autopilot AMPLIFIER.
14. Unplug the AMP connector CD-20 attached to the Console Substitute Test Box and connect
it to the CD-20 receptacle on the rear of the console.
15. Rotate the selector knob, located on the face of the Power Section Test Box, full
CLOCKWISE to the "RES" position.
16. Make sure LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box is reading
ZERO on the BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
17. Rotate the PITCH COMMAND DISC up on AltiMatic Console, for a full DOWN command
and observe needle of Power Section Test Box deflects LEFT.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-23
18. Rotate the PITCH COMMAND DISC down for a full UP command and observe needle of
Power Section Test Box deflects to the RIGHT.
19. Recenter PITCH COMMAND DISC so that the indice calls for a level attitude.
20. With small slot head screwdriver, adjust the FIFTH POTENTIOMETER from the left and
located directly below the trim meter on the console to center the needle on the Power Section Test Box to
ZERO. (Refer to Figure 5-1.)
NOTE
Keep in mind you MUST WAIT 30 SECONDS for the autopilot to
digest any new information.
COUNTERCLOCKWISE to indicate 7 degrees nose down, reading BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH
DEGREES.
22. Rotate PITCH COMMAND DISC UP for a full "DOWN" command.
23. With a small slot head screwdriver adjust the FOURTH POTENTIOMETER from the left,
CLOCKWISE to indicate 10 degrees nose up reading BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
25. Rotate PITCH COMMAND DISC down for a full "UP" command.
26. With a small slot head screwdriver adjust the SIXTH POTENTIOMETER from the left,
27. Push the ALT engage switch, on the console, to the "ON" position.
COUNTERCLOCKWISE until the needle of the Power Section Test Box returns to ZERO.
29. Rotate PITCH COMMAND DISC down for a full "UP" command and then UP for a full
"DOWN" command and note little change occurs on Power Section Test Box meter. Should a large amount
of needle movement be present during pitch command disc movement recheck ALT ENGAGE SWITCH,
located on the console, is in the ON position. (If a large amount of needle movement is still present during
pitch command disc movement, replace console.) Recenter pitch command disc.
30. Push all console switches to the "OFF" position.
31. Refer to the following paragraph for Pitch Threshold Adjustment Procedure.
5-11. PITCH THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT FOR ALTIMATIC IIIC.
Remove the cover plate from the top of the amplifier to gain access to the Pitch Threshold
Adjustment Potentiometer. (Refer to Figure 5-2.)
5-24
CAUTION
bench set-up to 12-volt configuration until Threshold Adjustment
Procedure is completed. Verify all switches are returned to the
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
aside.
position.
5. Place the ALT CONTROL slide switch, located on lower left of Console Substitute Test
box, in the UP or Alt Control position.
6. Place the ALTITUDE CONTROL KNOB, located on upper right of Console Substitute Test
Box, to the straight up or 12 o'clock position. .
7. Rotate the SELECTOR KNOB, lower center of Power Section Test Box, CLOCKWISE to
the "RES" position.
ZERO position on the BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
9. Immediagely below the large vernier control knob on Gyro Substitute Test Box, find a
SLIDE SWITCH labeled ROLL and PITCH. Place this switch in the "DOWN" or PITCH position.
11. Rotate the PITCH TRIM KNOB on Console Substitute Test Box as required to center the
needle on Power Section Test Box to ZERO.
12. Rotate LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box
COUNTERCLOCKWISE to indicate three-quarters (3/4) degree nose down, reading BOTTOM SCALE
labeled PITCH DEGREES.
14. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Console Substitute Test Box
CLOCKWISE to indicate three-quarters (3/4) degree nose up, reading BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH
DEGREES.
readings obtained and refer to Table V-II for correct voltage settings.
16. If voltage setting is correct proceed to next step. If voltage setting is incorrect find the Pitch
Threshold Adjustment Potentiometer, located on upper section of amplifier printed circuit board, (refer to
Figure 5-2) and adjust to obtain an average of the voltage setting listed in Table V -II by repeating Steps 12
thru 15.
17. Place the POWER SELECTOR SWITCH on Console Substitute Test Box to the "OFF"
position.
18. Disconnect test equipment and associated cables and reinstall the components in the
airplane.
19. Proceed with ground checks. and flight adjustments.
5-12. ALTIMATIC I1IC GROUND CHECKS WITH RADIO COUPLER (ROLL).
in-flight adjustmen ts.
2. Center the roll command knob and position HDG and ROLL engage switches to the "OFF"
position.
3. Start airplane engine to obtain gyro stability.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-25
4. Place the airplane control wheel to approximately neutral aileron or level flight position.
Push ROLL engage switch to the "ON" position. Move control wheel right and left to check for servo
engage men t.
5. Rotate the Roll Command Knob to the right and to the left and observe that the airplane
control wheel moves in the correct direction. (The airplane control wheel can be stopped in any position
and will not return to level position by centering the roll command knob. The airplane wheel will remain
stationary at the time the roll command knob is approximately centered or at its zero electrical output
position.)
6. Center the heading bug of the directional gyro or horizontal situation indicator and push
console HOG SWITCH "ON." WITH THE CONSOLE HDG SWITCH PUSHED TO THE "ON" POSITION,
THE ROLL COMMAND KNOB ON THE CONSOLE BECOMES INOPERATIVE.
7. Set the heading bug for a heading change to the right, observe control wheel should turn
right. Make same check to the left. Return the heading bug to existing aircraft heading.
8. Turn on number one (1) NA V receiver and tune in a local OMNI station.
9. Observe warning flag on face of OMNI converter or HSI retracts from view. (If flag does not
fully retract, this indicates an unusable OMNI signal is present.) Before proceeding, a usuable OMNI signal
must be present or utilize an approved OMNI simulator.
10. Rotate the OBS knob (or the CRS knob of the HSI) to center the COl needle and provide
an on course signal with a "TO" indication.
NOTE
On installations incorporating the DG-360 the A/P Radio Course
Arrow is placed on the heading corresponding to the radial
selected by the OBS.
11. Place radio coupler in omni mode. Rotate OBS knob (or the CRS knob of the HSI) to cause
the course deviation indicator to move to the right and to the left and observe that the control wheel moves
to the same side as the Course Deviation Needle.
12. Repeat Steps 8 thru 11 with number two (2) NAV receiver on systems incorporating the
standard DG or the DG-360.
13. Push ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH to the "OFF" position. Rotate the control wheel right and
left and observe that the servo disengaged.
5-13. GROUND CHECK - PITCH.
1. Plug the CD-I8 lead from attitude horizon into the CD-I8 plug of the Gyro Substitute Test
Box.
2. Place the roll pitch selector switch on Gyro Substitute Test Box to the PITCH position.
3. Rotate the large vernier control knob on Gyro Substitute Test Box to read ZERO on
BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
4. Pull AUTOMATIC PITCH TRIM CIRCUIT BREAKER and/or place panel mounted trim
switch to the OUT position.
5. Turn ON airplane Master Switch.
6. Push roll engage switch "ON" and stop control wheel rotation by adjusting ROLL
COMMAND KNOB.
7. Center trim meter on console by rotating pitch command disc.
8 Push pitch engage switch ON. Move control column fore and aft and note that pitch servo
engaged. Listen for audible sound.
5-26
9. Rotate PITCH COMMAND full up and observe control column moves aft.
10. Rotate PITCH COMMAND DISC full down and observe control column moves forward.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
NOTE
On the PA-31 series airplane, when checking the pitch portion of
the autopilot on the ground, due to the weight of the elevator and
the down spring in the elevator control system, with the pitch
servo engaged, the pitch servo clutch will slip instead of moving
the elevator.
11. Rotate PITCH COMMAND DISC to center position.
12. Push pitch engage switch OFF: Move control column fore and aft and note that pitch servo
disengaged.
13. Push TRIM CIRCUIT BREAKER and/or the panel mounted trim switch to the IN or ON
position.
14. Push the roll engage switch and the pitch engage switch ON.
15. Rotate pitch command disc for full NOSE UP command and hold control wheel from
moving aft. Pitch trim should trim nose UP after a slight delay and trim meter should deflect up.
16. Rotate pitch command disc for full NOSE DOWN command and hold control wheel from
moving forward. Pitch trim should trim nose DOWN after a slight delay and trim meter should deflect
down.
17. Recenter pitch command disc.
18. Depress the disengage button incorporated in the trim switch and move the trim switch
forward. Autopilot should disengage and pitch trim should trim nose DOWN.
19. With the disengage button depressed move the switch aft. Pitch trim should trim nose UP.
20. The trim switch should be inoperative in both directions if the disengage button is not
depressed.
21. Disconnect the CD-18 lead from the Gyro Substitute Test Box and connect it to the
artificial horizon.
NOTE
PA-31 series airplanes ONLY. In the event it cannot be determined
by an audible sound that the pitch servo motor is running in
response to pitch signals from the pitch command disc, it will be
necessary to remove the center floor panel. When removing panel
on PA-31P airplanes, handle panel carefully to avoid damaging
panel sealing gasket. Ascertain panel sealing gasket is clean and
undamaged prior to installation to prevent cabin pressure leaks.
Connect the CD-16 connector to the amplifier connector on the
Power Section Test Box and the CD-16 extension to the servo and
the servo connector also on the Power Section Test Box. Place the
selector switch on the Power Section Test Box to the MTR
position. Check for pitch amplifier output on the meter of the
Power Section Test Box and verify the servo motor is operating
when performing Steps 8 thru 12.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
REVISED: 10/16/81
5-27
5-14. AL TIMATIC IIlC FLIGHT ADJUSTMENTS WITH RADIO COUPLER (ROLL).
I. The aircraft shall be loaded to or near its AFT -e. G. LIM IT for flight set-up to assure all flight
Previous Altimatic series Autopilots do not require this loading. (Refer to Flight Manual for proper
power settings.)
NOTE
For adjusting descent, 19 inches of mercury manifold pressure
must be used on all airplanes except the PA-31-310, PA-31-325
and Pt\-31-350 which must be adjusted at 20 inches of mercury
and the PA-31 P which must be adjusted at 25 inches of mercury.
2. MAKE CERTAIN RUDDER TRIM IS ADJUSTED TO CENTER THE BALL. IF
RUDDER IS INCORRECTLY TRIMMED, THE ALTIMATIC WILL FLY THE AIRPLANE WITH A
WING LOW TO COMPENSATE FOR OUT OF TRIM RUDDER.
NOTE
3. Set the coupler selector switch in the OMNI mode.
4. Set the heading bug to the aircraft heading.
5. Push roll engage switch "ON." Depress RED BUTTON on rear of coupler and push HOG
engage switch ON. Keep coupler switch depressed during next adjustment.
6. Allow airplane roll attitude to stabilize and if necessary, adjust for straight and level flight
(wings level and ball centered). To do this, adjust the potentiometer located inside the SECOND HOLE
from the left. After each adjustment, allow the airplane attitude to stabilize and observe it for two minutes
to insure airplane is maintaining level flight. Release coupler adjustment switch.
7. Place COUPLER SELECTOR SWITCH in the HEADING mode and observe that airplane
maintains selected heading :t 2 degrees.
8. Rotate HEADING BUG 150 degrees left and observe airplane bank angle. Adjust left bank
screw of console to obtain 20 degree bank. Rotate ADJUSTMENT SCREW clockwise to increase bank
angle.
NOTE
Keep heading bug at least 25 degrees left of directional gyro
HEADING until adjustment is complete.
9. Rotate HEADING BUG 150 degrees right and observe airplane bank angle. Adjust right
bank screw of console to obtain 20 degree bank. Rotate ADJUSTMENT SCREW clockwise to increase bank
angle.
5-28
SET-UP PROCEDURES
REVISED: 10/16/81
full left.
NOTE
Keep heading bug at least 25 degrees right of directional gyro
HEADING until adjustment is complete.
10. Turn on radio and rotate the OBS knob (or the CRS knob of the HSI) to deflect CDI needle
NOTE
Full left needle deflection must be maintained until adjustment is
complete. This can be accomplished by being at least 20 miles
from the Omni station and flying approximately to or from the
station.
11. Push HDG SWITCH "OFF" and set HEADING BUG 45 degrees right of center index. Place
COUPLER in OMNI mode.
12. Push HDG SWITCH "ON" and allow the airplane heading to stabilize for 90 seconds.
13. Adjust LEFT INTERCEPT SCREW on side of radio coupler as necessary to stabilize heading
bug 45 degrees right of center index. Turn adjustment screw CLOCK WISE to increase intercept angle.
Allow 90 seconds for HEADING to stabilize after each adjustment.
SET -UP PROCEDURES
ADDED: 10/16/81
5-28a
S-28b
--Left Intercept Angle
Right Intercept Angle
Figure 5-6. Radio Coupler Adjustment Points
14. To adjust right intercept angle, repeat Steps 10 thru 13 with omni needle deflected full right
and heading bug 45 degrees to left of center index.
15. Center CDr needle on a "TO" bearing and set heading bug to match omni bearing. Allow
airplane to fly to the omni station and observe that CD! needle stays CENTERED. If COl needle does not
maintain center, adjust ROLL centering toward CD! needle. Repeat Steps 7,8 and 9.
5-15. ALTIMATIC IIIC FLIGHT ADJUSTMENT - PITCH.
1. The aircraft sha II be loadcd to or Ilca r it's A FT-C. G. LI M IT for fI igh t sct-up to assu rc a II nigh t
Previous Altimatic series Autopilots do not require this loading. (Refer to Flight Manual for propcr
power settings.)
NOTE
2. For adjusting descent, 19 inches of mercury manifold pressure must be used on all airplanes
except the PA-3 I -31 0, PA-3 I -325 and PA-31-350 which must be adjusted at 20 inches of mercury and the
PA-31 P which must be adjusted at 25 inches of mcrcury.
3. Push roll engage switch ON, adjust roll command knob as reqUIred for wings level f1iuht.
4 Rotate pitch command disc as required to center trim meter.
5. Observe existing altitude and push ALT engage switch ON. Allow aircraft to stabilize and
observe that aircraft is holding the same altitude at which the AL T hold function was engaged. If aircraft
does not hold engage altitude, adjust the FIFTH POTENTIOMETER from the left, on the console, as
required to maintain existing altitude. NOTE
Turning potentiometer clockwise will increase altitude.
6. Push pitch engage switch OFF. Observe existing altitude and push ALT engage switch ON
and allow aircraft to stabilize and observe that aircraft is holding the same altitude at which the AL T hold
function was engaged. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until correct results are obtained.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
REVISED: to/16/81
5-29
7. Center the pitch command disc and push AL T engage switch OFF.
8. Rotate pitch command disc, if necessary, to maintain level flight. After aircraft is stabilized
in level flight, observe that pitch command disc is centered. 1/8".
9. Reduce the power setting per appropriate airplane Flight Manual and rotate the Pitch
Command Disc UP for a full DOWN command. After the aircraft has stabilized in descent, adjust the
FOURTH POTENTIOMETER from the left, on the console, for a 7 degree descent. (5 degrees on PA-32
and PA-34-200T.)
CAUTION
It may be necessary to reduce power to prevent excessive speed.
10. Advance the power setting per appropriate airplane Flight Manual and rotate pitch
command disc DOWN for a full UP command. After the aircraft has stabilized in climb, adjust the SIXTH
POTENTIOMETER from the left, on the console, for a 10 degree climb. (7 degrees on PA-32 and
PA-34-200T.)
11. Recen ter the pitch command disc.
12. This completes the Flight Set-up.
5-16. ALTIMATIC IIlC GROUND CHECK (OPTIONAL YAW DAMPER).
1. Level the aircraft laterally using a level or bubble protractor. Refer to appropriate Airframe
Service Manual for leveling instructions.
2. Gain access to yaw damper amplifier and loosen locknut on adjustment potentiometer.
3. Turn ON airplane Master Switch.
4. Push panel mounted yaw damper engage switch ON.
5. Observe system for rudder pedal movement or slowly running rudder servo.
6. Adjust centering potentiometer as required to stop rudder servo movement.
7. Recycle the system two or three times to insure servo movement is completely cancelled.
8. After adjustment is complete secure locknut on potentiometer.
NOTE
Any movement of the aircraft, or moving around in the aircraft
with the yaw system engaged, can cause the rate gyro in the yaw
damper to send a corrective signal to the servo. This signal will
cause the servo to run unintentionally, so during the adjustment
procedure all movement should be kept to a minimum.
9. With the yaw damper system engaged, go to the rear of the aircraft and move the tail of the
aircraft, laterally back and forth. Observe rudder action. The yaw damper should attempt to move the
rudder opposite to the yaw direction.
5-17. CHECK AND ADJUSTING RADIO GAIN.
Although the radio gain on all couplers from the factory is preset, the following procedures are for
bench adjustment of the radio coupler gain. For omni converters with standard ARINC meter outputs, it
will be necessary to set up the autopilot on the bench as per paragraph 5-8 for the AltiMatic mc. After the
equipment is connected and functioning, perform the following adjustments and steps.
5-30
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
NOTE
The Piper Omni/Localizer Coupler presents a high impedance load
(greater than 10K ohms) to the radio installation. Therefore, it
will not "load down" the omni converter.
a. Adjusting Coupler Gain for Standard ARINC.
1. VERY SLOWLY rotate the RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB in the direction required
to cause the omni meter needle to move slowly back toward center.
2. While omni meter needle is traveling slowly toward center, observe upper output meter
(directly above omni meter on Coupler Test Box) and note the moment the upper output meter begins to
respond.
3. The instant the upper output meter needle shows response, stop rotation of the RADIO
SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB.
4. Read the lower omni needle and determine what percentage on the dial was reached when
upper output meter needle shows response.
NOTE
At 100% ( one meter division) the upper output meter should
just begin to move. Adjust the radio gain screw on the coupler
until the above indication can be obtained.
5. If radio gain has been adjusted, recheck both intercept angles and adjust if necessary.
6. Upon completion of radio gain adjustment, refer to Paragraph 5-9, page 5-21 of this manual
for Roll Threshold Adjustment Procedure.
b. Adjusting Coupler Gain for unknown Omni Converter: It is necessary to determine the output
signal capabilities of the unknown omni converter as compared to a standard ARINC signal.
1. Remove the airplane cable CD-34 connector from the rear of the radio coupler in the
airplane.
2. Plug this airplane cable CD-34 plug into the CD-34 connector located on the top right
comer of Radio Coupler Test Box labeled "RADIO."
NOTE
The CD-34 extension cable can be used to make this connection.
3. Make sure RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB on Coupler Test Box is in the "IN"
position.
4. Tum on Master Switch.
5. Turn on VOR Radio.
6. Tune in a local OMNI station.
CAUTION
Make sure you are receiving a strong usable OMNI signal before
taking any readings. It is good practice to use an OMNI signal
generator.
7. Center CDI on OMNI set with OBS by rotating OBS with a "TO" reading.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-31
8. Note OMNI meter needle on Radio Coupler Test Box is centered.
9. Rotate the OBS of the radio enough to drive CD! just to the end of its travel (off scale) to a
full deflection.
10. Read the OMNI meter needle on the Coupler Test Box and note the reading in percent.
11. Turn off airplane Master Switch and remove Coupler Test Box from airplane.
12. Proceed with the following steps if the roll set-up has been completed. If the roll has not
been set up, complete set-up at this time.
13. After completing roll set-up, pullOUT the RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB on the
Coupler Test Box.
14. Place the switch on the radio coupler to the LOCALIZER/NORM position.
1 S. Place roll switch "ON."
16. Place heading switch "OFF."
17. Place DG to "ZERO."
18. Rotate the RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB right or left until OMNI meter needle
indicates the same percentage figure as read in the airplane.
19. Wait three minutes to insure Coupler Memory Bank is filled.
20. VERY SLOWLY rotate the RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB in the direction required
to cause the OMNI meter needle to move slowly back towards center.
21. While OMNI meter needle is traveling slowly towards center, observe upper output meter
and note the moment the upper output meter needle begins to respond.
22. The instant the upper output meter needle shows response, stop rotation of the radio signal
substitute knob.
23. Read the lower OMNI meter needle and determine what percentage on the dial was reached
when upper output meter needle shows response.
NOTE
Adjust radio gain on coupler so that upper output meter needle
responds within 1 lower meter division of the percentage as
originally read on airplane radio.
24. If coupler gain has been adjusted, recheck both intercept angles and adjust if necessary.
5-18. PIPER OMNI/LOCALIZER COUPLER MODIFICATION (lC388 SERIES).
The Piper Omni/Localizer Coupler is used in conjunction with various configurations of avionics
equipment. Depending on the type avionics equipment installed in the airplane, the coupler should be
modified as follows:
a. When the coupler is used in conjunction with the VOA-4, -5, -8 or -9 and/or other converters
where 20 = I SO microamps, modify as follows:
1. Identify the 1 C388 coupler as "F" mod or higher (letter F at end of serial nos.).
2. Remove eight screws and cover of radio coupler.
3. Locate clipped jumper across 10K resistot. (Refer to Figure 5-7.)
4. Using small soldering iron, carefully re-solder jumper. (Exercise extreme caution to prevent
inadvertent damage with soldering iron.)
S. Replace cover and secure with eight screws.
b. When the coupler is used in conjunction with VOA-40 or VOA-sO and/or other converters where
10 = ISO millivolts, the jumper is clipped so the 10K resistor is in the circuit.
5-32
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
I
I
:

i
i
i

w

I
I
:

6

.
.
.

P
I
P
E
R

A
L
T
I
M
A
T
I
C

I
1
I
C

S
E
R
V
I
C
E

M
A
N
U
A
L

F
i
g
u
r
e

5
-
7
.

P
i
p
e
r

O
m
n
i
/
L
o
c
a
l
i
z
e
r

C
o
u
p
l
e
r

M
o
d
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

D
e
t
a
i
l

S
E
T
-
U
P

P
R
O
C
E
D
U
R
E
S

I
S
S
U
E
D
:

1
1
/
2
5
/
7
4

5
-
3
3

PIPER AL TIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANU AL
TP I --tt---
T P 2 . . . . j j ~ ..
TP-COMMON
'0
Figure 5-8. NAV Converter (1C707) Adjustment Potentiometers
5-34
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-19. NAV CONVERTER (lC707) ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE.
The Navigation Converter (lC707) is designed to accept any VHF radio receiver omni composite signal
between .3 VRMS and 3.0 VRMS signal level and any standard ARINC resolver signal level as specified by
ARINC Report No. 407-1 for OBS resolvers. The lC707 can provide sufficient output, isolated from
ground but not necessarily from the deviation output circuit, to drive a total of 4 flag alarm movements of
1000 OHMS, 250ua from the VOR/LOC function. The flag alarm output requires no adjustment when
adding one to four loads. The deviation indicator output circuits will provide a suitable signal, isolated from
ground, to drive 5 localizer 1000 OHM 150-0-150 micro ampere deviation indicator movements in parallel
with suitable service adjustments to set proper course sensitivity independently on localizer and VOR
functions, to the particular standardized course width. The TO/FROM circuits of the lC707 is capable of
delivering 200 micro amperes ( 20%) to each of two paralleled TO/FROM indicators, each of 200 OHMS
15%. No adjustment is required to vary TO/FROM loads.
CAUTION
The EDO-AIRE 1 C707 VOR/LOC Converter Maintenance Manual
AK423 should be utilized in conjunction with the Alignment
Procedure outlined in the following paragraphs.
a. lC707 OMNI/LOCALIZER CONVERTER SET UP PROCEDURE. (Refer to Figure 5-8.)
NOTE
Required Test Equipment - TIC-12A VOR Simulator Generator
or, IFR-401L VOR Simulator Generator or Equivalent.
1. Connect lC707 Omni Converter to Navigation Receiver and Deviation Indicator.
2. Supply 28/14 VDC to Pin 13 (standard A/C power).
3. With converter connected and all equipment set up for standard VOR operation, apply a
standard VOR test signal from a TIC-T-12A Omni Simulator (or equivalent) to the antenna terminals of the
navigation receiver. (Use simulator operating procedure to accomplish task.)
4. Verify that all equipment is operating before proceeding. (See Note)
CAUTION
Test Point Common is approximately 6 volts above ground. Do
not inadvertently ground the test point with scope or meter
ground lead.
NOTE
When using YOM set level at 1.41 VRMS between TP-l or TP-2
and Test Point Common.
When using scope set level at 4 VP-P. From TP-ground use either
AC coupling or D.C. coupling. TP-l and TP-2 have approximately
6 V.D.C. component.
5. With a standard VOR signal applied adjust R-l VOR receiver (input level) for 4.0 VP-P or
1.41 VRMS at Test Point 1. See Figure 5-8. (See Note)
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-35
6. Check for 4 VP-P or 1.41 VRMS 15% at Test Point 2. See Figure 5-8. (See Note)
7. Set generator to 0 "TO" and resolver to 0. Adjust R + 2 (Omni Centering) for zero on
deviation indicator. Access to omni centering adjustment on side of the converter.
8. Set generator to 0 "FROM." Adjust R-3 (Phase Detector Bal) to correct for 50% of the
error on deviation indicator. Access to phase detector adjustment on side of the converter.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 until the generator can be changed from 0 TO, to 0 FROM with no
error indicated on deviation indicator.
10. Set generator to 90. Set resolver to 90. Adjust R-4 (Resolver 0) to reduce deviation
indicator reading approximately 80%. Access to resolver adjustment on side of the converter.
11. Repeat Steps 7 and 10 until no error is indicated in either step.
12. Recheck Step 5.
13. Set generator to 0 "TO." Set resolver until deviation indicator just reaches full scale
deflection. The resolver should read 11 1 (minor adjustment of input level control may be made to
accomplish above but reading in Step 5 should not vary more than 20%).
14. Vary resolver from 80 to 280. "TO - FROM" should indicate "TO."
a. Vary resolver from 100 to 260 "TO - FROM" should indicate "FROM." (The above
may also be accomplished by setting the resolver to 0 and varying the generator to the
same bearings indicated.) Check VOR error. Limit 1 at any point.
15. Delete 9960 Hz. Check for NAV flag in full view.
a. Delete 30 Hz. Check for NA V flag in full view.
16. Set NA V receiver to localizer frequency.
17. Set up simulator for standard localizer signal as defined by simulator operating manual.
18. With modulation depth control set to 0 db adjust R-5 (90 Hz level) or R-6 (150 Hz level) for
zero deflection on the deviation indicator. Access to the 90 Hz and 150 Hz adjustment can be found on the
side of the converter box.
19. Set modulation depth control to + 4 db. Deviation indicator should deflect 60%.
20. If deflection exceeds 60%, set modulation depth control to zero db and simultaneously
decrease R-5 (90 Hz level) and R-6 (150 Hz level) 2 or 3 turns to maintain zero deviation on indicator. (If
less than 60% increase 90 and 150 Hz.)
21. Repeat Steps 19 and 20 until 4 db modulation depth gives 60% deflection.
22. -4 DB modulation depth should give 60% right deflection. Set modulation depth to zero.
23. "TO - FROM" should indicate "TO."
24. Delete 90 Hz; NAV Flag should be in full view, "TO - FROM" should be out of view and
full left deflection.
25. Delete 150 Hz. Indications same as Step 24, except with full right deflection.
26. Set modulation depth control to +4 db. "TO - FROM" should start to indicate "TO."
27. Decrease the simulator signal level until 4 db modulation depth gives 30% deflection. NAV
Flag should be in partial view.
5-36
NOTE
When OBS is 180 out of phase with the deviation test signal
reverse pins 20 and 2 on converter connector CD-112.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-20. ADJUSTMENTS OF SLAVING SUB-SYSTEM.
The following adjustments of the slaving sub-system must be made any time a component is replaced
in the system or if large heading errors exist in the system A compass rose must be available to accurately
determine the actual airplane heading or a Master Sighting Compass may be used. Make duplicates of the
sample charts in Figure 5-9 to record pertinent information required during the following adjustment
procedures.
CAUTION
All Flux Sensor mounting hardware and other hardware within
one to two feet of the Flux Sensor must be of non-magnetic
material to reduce the stray magnetic fields in the area of the Flux
Sensor.
NOTE
The serviceman must gain access to the Flux Sensor and
North-South/East-West Corrector as outlined in Section III of this
manual, Removal and Installation, for the type of airplane being
serviced.
1. Taxi the airplane to the compass rose and align the airplane on 0 degrees heading, utilizing
the compass rose or a Master Sighting Compass to arrive at the heading.
2. Record the actual magnetic heading on the deviation chart.
3. Record the Horizontal Situation Indicator azimuth card reading on the deviation chart.
4. Determine and record the deviation between the actual magnetic reading and the azimuth
card reading. If the azimuth card reads high, the deviation is plus.
5. Taxi the airplane for an East Heading, utilizing the compass rose or a Master Sighting
Compass to arrive at the heading.
9. Taxi the airplane for a South Heading, utilizing the compass rose or a Master Sighting
13. Taxi the airplane for a West Heading, utilizing the compass rose or a Master Sighting
17. Plot the deviations on the initial deviation graph.
18. If the deviation pattern is not centered around zero, rotate the Flux Sensor clockwise for
minus deviations or counterclockwise for plus deviations. Plot fmal deviations on the Final Deviation
Graph.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-37
19. Taxi the airplane for a 0 degree heading, utilizing the compass rose or a Master Sighting
20. Adjust the North-South Corrector Adjustment (refer to Figure 5-10) by rotating the
potentiometer (clockwise for minus or counterclockwise for plus deviations) in the correct direction for
one half the difference between North and South deviations. Record the new deviation for North and
South on the Final Deviation Graph. _
21. Taxi the airplane for an East Heading, utilizing the compass rose or a Master Sighting
22. Adjust the East-West Corrector Adjustment (refer to Figure 5-10) by rotating the
potentiometer (clockwise for minus or counterclockwise for plus deviations) in the correct direction for
one half the diffelence between East and West deviations. Record the new deviation for East and West on
the Final Deviation Graph.
23. Taxi the airplane for a South Heading, utilizing the compass rose or a Master Sighting
Compass to arrive at the heading. Record new deviation on Final Deviation Graph.
24. Taxi the airplane for a West Heading, utilizing the compass rose or a Master Sighting
Compass to arrive at the heading. Record new deviation on Final Deviation Graph.
25. The deviations should now center around the zero reference line of the Final Deviation
Graph. If the error exceeds 2 degrees, the complete procedure must be reaccomplished.
5-38
DEVIATION CHART
APPROX MAG. ACTUAL MAG.
HEADING HEADING
NORTH
EAST
SOUTH
WEST
INITIAL DEVIATION GRAPH
NORTH EAST SOUTH WEST
+10 -+_-+_-+-_+-
+ 8 -t--+--j--+-
+ 6
+ 4 --+--+-_+--+-
+ 2 --+--+-_+--+-
o -t-_+--+---I-
- 2 -t-_+--+---j-
- 4 -+--+-_+--+-
- 6
- 8 -t-_+--+---j-
-10 -+--+--+----+-
AZIMUTH CARD
DEVIATION
READING
FINAL DEVIATION GRAPH
NORTH EAST SOUTH WEST

o
- 2
- 4
Figure 5-9. Sample Deviation Charts
SET-UP PROCEDURES
REVISED: 4/15/77
.).) .)
o V ~ 0 0
~ ~ J
.)0
.) .) .)
2+ 2
.).).) 2f2
J
I I N-S
E-W
I '
0
I') 1"1 1"11"1
.:::::::>.:::::::> 0
1"1 1"1 f'I'\
cC"u
-.:::>
c-
COMPENSATOR
(REMOVE COVER FROM 1C714 AND/OR DUST
PLUGS FROM 1C722 SLAVING AMPLIFIER
L..
;r'"
FOR ACCESS TO COMPENSATOR POTENTIOMETERS)
Figure 5-10. Slaving Amplifier, N-S/E-W Corrector Adjustment Potentiometers
5-21. ALTIMATIC IIIC WITH OPTIONAL KING KCS-55 COMPASS SYSTEM ALIGNMENT
PROCEDURE.
The AltiMatic IIIC may incorporate the optional KCS-55 compass system in lieu of the EDO-AIRE
Mitchell compass system. The KCS-55 compass system utilizes a KA-52 autopilot adapter which requires
special adjustment to obtain correct bank and intercept angles. The following paragraphs provide the
information to accomplish the required adjustment procedures.
The I C3 88-3 Radio Coupler is utilized with this system as it will couple any ARINC compass system
to the autopilot. Should the KA-52 autopilot adapter require replacement this procedure must be
accomplished. If the KA-52 is not adjusted properly, on existing systems, the bank and intercept angles will
be something less than the recommended setting. Therefore, this procedure should be utilized prior to
setting the bank and intercept angles of the autopilot.
a. KA-52 AUTOPILOT ADAPTER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE. (Refer to Figure 5-12.)
NOTE
Required Test Equipment - Precision Voltmeter and a locally
fabricated In-Line Test Box as shown in Figure 5-11.
1. Disconnect the compass system harness connector CD-33 from the radio coupler pigtail
connector CD-33.
2. Install the In-line Test Box by connecting it in series with the compass system harness
connector CD-33 and the radio coupler pigtail connector CD-33.
3. Position the In-line Test Box so it is accessible for making voltage measurements.
SET -UP PROCEDURES
REVISED: 4/15/77
5-39
4. Gain access to the KA-52 autopilot adapter as outlined in Section III of this manual,
Removal and Installation, for the type of airplane being serviced.
5. Remove cover from KA-52 autopilot adapter (refer to Figure 5-12) to gain access to the
adjustment potentiometers.
6. Center the roll command knob on the autopilot console and place the Roll engage and HDG
engage switches in the "OFF" position.
7. Start airplane engine to obtain gyro stability.
8. Rotate HDG knob as required to align heading bug with lubber line at top of HSI
(Horizontal Situation Indicator).
9. Rotate CRS knob as required to align the course arrow with lubber line at top of HSI.
10. Place radio coupler selector switch in the HDG mode.
11. Push Roll engage and HDG engage switches to the "ON" position.
12. Rotate HDG knob clockwise to displace heading bug 35 degrees to right of lubber line (to
reach maximum signal saturation) on HSI.
13. Connect Precision Voltmeter leads to In-Line Test Box (positive lead to pin A and negative
lead to pin F). Observe, AC voltage reading should be 7.0 .2 volts AC. If voltage reading is incorrect adjust
HDG potentiometer of KA-S2 autopilot adapter to obtain correct voltage setting.
14. Rotate HDG knob counterclockwise to displace heading bug 35 degrees to left of lubber line
(to reach maximum signal saturation) on HSI.
15. With Precision Voltmeter still connected to In-Line Test Box as outlined in step 13.
Observe, AC voltage reading should be 7.0 .2 volts AC. If voltage reading is correct proceed to next step.
If voltage reading is incorrect adjust HDG potentiometer of KA-52 autopilot adapter to obtain correct
voltage setting.
16. Rotate HDG knob as required to align heading bug with lubber line at top of HSI and
remove voltmeter leads from In-Line Test Box.
17. Rotate CRS knob as required to displace course arrow at least 90 degrees to the right of the
on course heading.
18. Connect Precision Voltmeter leads to In-Line Test Box (positive lead to pin B and negative
lead to pin C). Observe, AC voltage reading should be 7.0 .2 volts AC. If voltage reading is incorrect adjust
CRS potentiometer of KA-52 autopilot adapter to obtain correct voltage setting.
19. Rotate CRS knob as required to displace course arrow at least 90 degrees to the left of the
on course heading.
20. With Precision Voltmeter still connected to In-Line Test Box as outlined in step 18.
Observe, AC voltage reading should be 7.0 .2 volts AC. If voltage is correct proceed to next step. If
voltage reading is incorrect adjust CRS potentiometer of KA-S2 autopilot adapter to obtain correct voltage
setting.
21. This completes the alignment procedure for the KA-S2 autopilot adapter.
22. Disengage autopilot and shut down airplane engine.
23. Disconnect Precision Voltmeter leads from In-Line Test Box and remove In-Line Test Box
from airplane.
(Roll).
5-40
24. Connect KCS-SS harness connector CD-33 to radio coupler pigtail connector CD-33.
25. Install cover on KA-S2 autopilot adapter and secure.
26. Refer to paragraph 5-14 for AltiMatic IIIC Flight Adjustment Procedure with Radio Coupler
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ADDED: 6/13/75
MALE CONN.
(AMP)
CO-33
7 PIN CONN.
(AMP)
A
B
C
CD-33 D
MALE PINS

MALE PINS

(A) (F)COMM. (8) (C)COM
FEMALE CONN.
(AMP)
HOG.
MALE PINS

(0) (E)
ROLL
EXCITATION
CRS.
(A) (F)COMM. (0) (E)
ROLL
EXCITATION
HOG.
CO-33
7 PIN CONN.
(AMP)
A
B
C
D CO-33
E
F
H
(8) (C)COMM
CRS
Figure 5-11. In-Line Test Box (Locally Fabricated)
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ADDED: 6/13/75
5-41
PIPER ALTIMATIC Inc SERVICRMANUAL
COURSE ADJUSTMENT
POTENTIOMETER
Figure ~ 1 2 . KA-52 Autopilot Adapter
~ 5-22. YAW DAMPER GROUND CHECK.
The Yaw Damper consists of four components: the Yaw Damper Amplifier (which contains the rate
gyro, electrolytic potentiometer, and the servo amplifier); the Rudder Servo; the Yaw Damper ON-OFF
Switch and Control Wheel disconnect switching; and the interconnecting wiring harness.
The Logic Chart is designed to help locate and isolate, an in-aircraft system problem without
dismantling the system. (Refer to Fig. 5-13 and Fig. 5-14 for Bench Test hook-up and wiring diagrams in
Section VI.)
5-42 SET-UP PROCEDURES
REVISED: 10/16/81
PIPEn ALTIMA TIC IIIC SEIlVICE MANUAL
TABLE V-III. TROUBLE ISOLATION BLOCK DIAGRAM
IN AIRCRAFT TROUBLESHOOTING
LOGIC CHART
1. Level Ihe a!rcral! in roll.
II the annunciator sWitch does not stay on
2, Obtain access to the Yaw Damper,
check:
3, Turn on aircraft m3sler sWitch,
1. Circuit breaker
4, Press Y/O annunciator sWllcll on 2, Tf'st 1110 5Wlt:h for rr Olwr ('01111(1('\10"<; ilnd
0rt'I"llon. fl'l"f 10 Wlltr\(l f '<1 J ()
Check solenoid engage voltage CD-1O 3 p'"
I Check rudder servo engaged I
1.
A to ground or use a 660141-2 power section
See nole: I
lest box,
2, Check wiring per ligure 3-6,
1, Listen to the unit, you should be ablo to Iwar
Rotate the Yaw Damper (or the alr-
Ihe Yaw Dnmper rate gyro running.
2, Check for A ,. voltage on the Yaw Damper
crall) slightly lelt and then flgll1. Ob-
plug CD-1O 4 pin /I,
serve the rudder lor movement in op-
3, Check Yaw Damper servo output CD-103 pin
position to the turns
C to 0, Use a 660141-2 power section test
box set to RES position,
NOTE: Because 01 nose wheel steering/rudder interconnect in
some aircraft, it may be necessary to observo the rudder
servo while it IS engaged to be sure it is operating
properly,
Loosen mounting screws on Yaw Dam-
1, Check servo oulpul. If possible
per and lilt left (approx, 5 roll),
use 660141-2,
Don't rotate it in Yaw,
2, Check rudder servo,
Yaw Damper applies left rudder,
r
1, See above.
Tilt Yaw Damper to the right 2, Check centering, level aircral! and null out-
(approx, roll \,
put to Yaw Damper,
Yaw Damper applies rigllt rudder. 3. If the servo drives in only one direction,
Yaw Damper defective,
Press Yaw Damper annunciator off. I I
Check switch per figure 3-6 wiring SChematic.j
Yaw Damper disengage,
I
With the aircralt leveled in roll; adjust tho polan II", Iront of the
lC651-( ) lor a zero output 10 IIiQ Yaw smllo malor Usc a
6601412 pOW8r section or eqUlvalenl meier to manllor servo
molor vollage,
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ADDED: 10/16/81
5-43
At GND.
TO 66D141-2
AMPLIFIER INPUT CD-104
A ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ A
~ ~ B B
D
E
H
C
D
4-PIN PLUG
(AMPHENOL NO.126-215)
5-PIN RECEPTACLE
(AMPHENOL NO.126-223)
o
o 0
o
POWER SECTION
(66DI41-2)
~ 5-4'"
Figure 5-13. Bench Test Wiring Harness
Yaw Damper
28VDC POWER SUPPLY
(BENCH TEST WIRING HARNESS)
IC651-0 YAW DAMPER
Figure 5-14. Test Equipment I-look-Up
Yaw Damper
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ADDED: 10/16/81
Paragraph
SECTION VI
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Page
6-1. Introduction............................................... 6-1
ISSUED: 11/25/74
vi-i
SECTION VI
WIRING DIAGRAMS
6-1. INTRODUCTION. This section of the manual consists of wiring diagrams of the electrical harnesses
and mating connectors of the AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot. The wiring diagrams should be utilized for
troubleshooting the system for defective wiring and mating connectors. A continuity test of the system can
be performed with an ohmmeter. This test will clarify the harness is good and capable of carrying current.
Should any wire or connector fail to produce a reading on the ohmmeter, they are defective and must be
replaced. Refer to the following pages for the Wiring Diagrams for the AltiMatic IIIC installations on the
various Piper airplanes.
WIRING DIAGRAMS
ISSUED: 11/25/74
6-1
0\
I
'"r1
N
.... -
~
>-t
(!)
0\
I
-
~
......
.... -
3
~
......
.....
(")
-
-
-('J
t::I:'
-0
(")
:;.;-
0
.....
~
>-t
~
3
'"d
:>
I
N
W
I
N
VI
0
,-...
'"
....
:><
'0
-
(")
(!)
'-'
tr:1
~
'"r1
,-...
$:=:
'0
......
0
V)
--- Z
~ ~
N
-.l
I
-.l
<2
-.l
VI
1';10
.f:>.
0
~ E
0
N
.. :> '-'
w ~ ~
~ ~
0
0-
(!)
-
'" (XlV)
15647-8
1---------- --- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
I 1
+ RIGHT +LEFT-=-
A+GISL:T)--+---______
TRIM CIRCUIT
BREAKER
5A BUS
TO INSTRUMENT
LIGHT HARNESS
15647-B
~ ~
<e "I1
fij:Z
~
t!1C')
'"I
~ O
(l)
~ >
0\
I
tv
U
TRIM CIRCUIT
;I>
BREAKER
-
......
..... BUS
. til
S
~
r:t
(')
-
-
-
l.l
t:C
- 0
(')
:;00;"
I:'
.....
~
S
""CI
~
N
W
I
N
VI
0
,-..
fIl
.....
>< :g
'0
-
~
8
~
'-"
"I1
~
s::
~
0
BUS
a:
0..
(l)
- ~
Y'
AUTOPILOT
-
CZl CIRCUIT l.l
Z
BREAKER
-
-
-
N (')
-...l
I CZl
-...l
-...l
t!1
VI
~
0
0 -
(')
w tTl
a:
0..
;I>
s=
:z
'0 c:::
0\
I
~ W
>
::+
s

_.
(")
-
-
.....
54572-&
TRIM CIRCUIT
BREAKER

TRIM MASTER
SWITCH

54572 -&

W;>
::::-Q

tZ!
"Ij
.....

'"I
(D
0\
I

.....
.....
s:::
po
.....
C=;.
FCP2
......
C 71
......
,.....
(J
I::ij
0"
()
:;;-
1::1
.....
M
- (J'Q
'"I
po
S
""d
>
I
W
-
I
W
VI
0
CD26
---"""L-W1RE TO INSTRUMENTI
g LIGHT HARNESS
1
8
i

I
5AI 'ClRCUIT
'--.; BREAKER

I
I
TRI M CIRCUIT
BREAKER

r TR 1 M MASTER
r SWITCH
CD42
48882-A
(OPTIONAL)
BUS_ I
AUTOPILOTR
CIP L5A
TAPE AND TIE BACK--
IN ALL CASES
TAPE AND TIE BACK
WHEN YAW
IS NOT INSTALLED

-:: WHITE
I CD44
-+---<1. WIRE IN INSTRUMENT I
I . LIGHTS HARNESS 6
i /1'-.:
'-___ i
(GREEN)
I
TAPED a TI ED BACK
WHEN YAW DAMPER
IS NOT INSTALLED
ELECTRIC
TRIM SWITCH r+----
~ __ -+ ______ -, __ ________ t--+ ______ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ M E R
'-----__ .r-
TRIM CIRCUIT
BREAKER
~ U S
TO INSTRUMENT
LIGHT HARNESS
'Tl
Oti
c
...,
(l)
0-.
I
;--l
;p
.....

!):>
.....
n
-
-
- n
t:c
0"
()
;0::-
0
p;o
tJC/
...,
!):>
:3
'"0
;p
I
Vol
.j::.
I
N
C
C
....,
!):>
=
0..
'"0
;p
I
.j:::..
.j::.
I
Z
00 0
C
--I
m
BUS
CD26
WIRE TO INSTRUMENT!
LIGHT HARNESS
::
I
I
I
TRIM CIRCUIT
BREAKER
BUS
L TO INSTRUMENT
LIGHT HARNESS
D. G. SIG.
ROLL EX.
ROLL EX.
MOT. COM.
MOTOR
GROUND
ROLL SIG.
D. G. EX.
D. G. EX.
ROLL SOL.
14 V
GROUND
GROUND
ROLL COMMAND
L. BANK ADJ.
R. BANK ADJ.
PITCH SOL.
GROUND
GROUND
PITCH IND.
PITCH SIG.
PITCH MOTOR
ON. ADJ.
UP ADJ.
PITCH MOT COM
PITCH EX.
PITCH EX.
PITCH COMMAND
R-1-A
R . 2:-AR:J.Ci'].4'
R .2:-Bif.3.Fp"TS"
R2D Rl-B p..j.

R -3'::HiSffiELD)
R-2-C
R-1-E
R-1-D __ _
M P-4-A_
N P- 7- 2_
p-
R P,,4-B (SHIELD
S R-2(SHiELD)
I
2 P-7-7
1 P-7 __ ./
4 1'::7-=1. P-6-A
5 p-7-201SHieLo)
6
7 P-7-11 ---
8 R-2-ti""_
9
10 -" --'7
11-- . (SH)
12 P-6-C P'7-14 R-2-
F
I 1 R -=-1'; E :1'=7:"9
14 P-7-10
15 p-7-fi-
AMP
R-I
A
B
_ R-1-A
HOR
R-2
ROLL EX.
ROLL EX.
ROLL SIG.
ROLL COM.
1'''- ,.- 'J ;,0=- PITCH EX.
PITCH COM.
PITCH SIG.
D. G. SIG.
SIG. COM.
ROLL EX.
D. G. EX.
0, G, EX,
ROLL EX.
GROUND
ROLL SOL.
GROUND
MOTOR. ROLL
10"-14 28 V. CKT. BKR.
DELCO
L
CONSOLE
P-7
R - 14 28 V IN
R-I-4 2 14 V 10 AMP. (ROLL SOL.)
'R-I-B 3 PITCH SOL.
R-I-C 4 ROLL EX.
R-I-I 5 ROLL EX.
R-=-r'::2 6 ROLL COMMAND
R-I-l 7 L.BANKADJ.
R-I-13R-8.B 8 R. BANK ADJ.
R.]-14if8.A 9 PITCH EX.
R-=1-T5- 10 PITCH EX.
R-8-4 11 PITCH COMMAND
P--r:-7 12 ALT.SIG.
11 PITCH IND
PITCH COMM.
'_IGHTS
ALT. ENGAGE 14 V
ON. LIMIT
UP LIMIT
GROUND
GROUND
"'---------_ LIGHTS
K.D.
D.G.
C
o
E
R-1-C. P-7-4
R-2-B. R-1-F. R-7-5
R-l-O. R-1-B. P-4-D R-1-B (SHLD.)
R-I-D (SH.) R-I.:-O I, S
- Rt-1
F
G
H
P-4-C' --
fi::j-H iSHieLO)--
R-l . .'"C ---.. -
WIRING FOR 30D207-2
HORIZON R 2
-
DIR. GYRO R-1
CD-33
ROLL
p
S:
4
RVO =====::::
CO-47
PI TCH SERVO
P-6 CD-16
LIGHTS
CD-26
A' LEAD
CONSOLE
P-7
CD-27
_1l.::!=!1 _." C
R-I-L ,,_.--
-Ii 0
E
R-l_C ,,---
R- i-F
.---- .. H
WIRING FOR 3002072
R-8 ')
ALT. SELECTOR
-
Figure 6-8. AltiMatic IIIC Harness
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 6/13/75
IOMI95 WIRE TO 9577
RECEPTACLE
WIRES FROM CABLES
DETAIL A"
AMPLIFIER
R-l
o
6-9
PIPER A,LTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
r-----------I
I TRIM I
I I
: I
I c_ I
I NO I
I CONTROL I
L ___ " ______ ViliF.LJ

.... ,
YAW DAMPER
ON-OFF SWITCH
CONN
R456
-
RPII D 5A DAMPER
C/P
IMPULSE
RELAY
TERMINAL
STRIPS
r----;Ico -104 YAW DAMPER
,
;CD-103 RUDDER SERVO
,.
Figure 6-8a. Yaw Damper Block Diagram, PA-31-31O, PA-31-32S and PA-31-3S0
YAW DAMPER
RUDDER SERVO
6-10
WIRE IN INSTR. LITES HARN. H
R
p
1
Figure 6-8b. Yaw Damper Block Diagram, PA-3IP
YAW DAMPE.R c/p
CONTROL WHEEL CO I L ED CORD
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 8/10/78
1--------------- - - --l
I 81C32 lOP PLATE ASSY
B
E
EXCITATION
GYRO
MOTOR
r--- S I G .---.
f-:L
I 2 :5 4 5 -
I
I
,sj--- -- - f_ ---- I 81831 FRONT I
,.- I PLATE ASSY
I 7 C
I I

I
I
I
I
I
I J 8 I
I I 9 '- r-
81C27 BOTTOM ,..! I
I
PLATE ASSY I I 5
I 14 I
I II I 16 __ i i v
CO-I04R
I I I =-3 ____ C-.,O-1041
: 01::3055 : I; ) :
A/C
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
PIPER AL TL\1A TIC mc SERVICE
CO-i03 h GRN WHT
A I IN4001 t . CLUTCH
f- 'NHT ;5 COIL
..------+---1 B WHT
'- - RED ...
..---1---__ -. -l':'
')DREDA _
'-
BU<
J..TI uf
25V
SCHEMATIC FOR IB485
40S74-1 MAGNETIC
SWITCH
I r: ; !. i I
I CISy !; : 1AAc C11-'- I
J: /
r-------+<J.-
4 4
0-...... -+-------1
A/C LIGHT
REOSTAT
I 7 i I :2 R-41 I !
81C29 LEFT HEAT L 30C410 CABLE ASSY J 81C30 RIGHT HEAT I
I SINK A!SY ______ -- -- -- SINK ;SSY I
L ________ IC651-() YAW DAMPER _____________ J
,-A/C A+
Figure 6-9. Y3.W Dampl!r Schl!IT'.atic (Optional)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
ISSUED: 11/25/74
_I
1 A Q ..-. ,2. +-T+1
\...J. 0-- 0-
1
J .: -i . L....e
SWITCH I,
UGHTyw I I
I -
A/c A+

CO-48
'------- PANEL LIGHTS
r -NC
B544
RELAY BOX OR
40S76 WHEEL SWI TCH
r
6-11
t
33986

-<:
-
-
Z
00
C'l

0 0
->
QC
C'l
-

'"I1
... .....
=
OC/
-

-..J
>;
QC fZl
(1)
0\
,
-
9
::r:
0
::to
N
0
::l
-

-

-

-
.....
0
::l
......
::l
0-
.....
(")

-
0
>;
::r:
e;
::l
(1)
(Jl
(Jl
--- 0
"d
-
.....
0
::l

- '-"

.....
-

-
n
.....,J
0
.....,J
0\
,
...
t-.)
NSO-360 COUPLER
CONN. CD-l06 CONN. CD-34
RADIO
COUPLER
CONN. CO-33
FUNCT I ON
7 I NAVFLAGH
NAV I
HARNESS
1C707
CONN. RJ10 CONN. CD-112
1
16
------'- - --r-- ---- AIRFRAME GND [AN2D]
I NAV FLAG ('l ___ --.:.._______ _
--- ' -------- 14/28VINPUT[AN20J
15
DBS
DBS ROTOR (el
1 OBS STATOR (E) AN22
OBS STATOR (D) SHLD
OBS STATOR (G)
26--B--CJD DBS STATOR (F)
31---CO LDe FLAG
I TO
34-cL) : TO FROM' FROM
-- - - - - -,- - - ---- -,- --- LIR RADIO' LT fAN221
- - -- - ------ - - --- L/R RADIO. RT
: 0 -,- - - - - - - --' - - - GND r
0--CillID : H - - - - - -t + -- --- --: ----A' 28V AN20
=--<::m:::::)f----!., --------F, - - - - - - -; - - - - - - - ,-- - - -- LIGHTS
19---+---CTI=:J 0- -- - - - - - - - - - - '14V ROLL MOD. SUP. (OUT)
E- - - - - - - -,- - - - '14V ROLL MDD. SUP (OUT)
=t=8B
' I 21 23 '; A--------,----HDGSIGNAL
22 24. 8- - - - - - - - - - - -- COURSE

_ . 'i'a' -.---- GIS SIG ('UP) [AN22
2:7 - 'TO GIS REe (.UP)

--1
SHLD] 1
---2 )---'---------------t+-'-: --- TO GIS REC ('DN)
-- -- GIS SIG (.DN) [AN22 SHLD]
1
I
20
22
4
21
1
19
1 a
'l:. O ---GNO
I LOC KORN I
OIllN'LOC MODE SW INPUT 6
1 OMNI LOC MODE SW. INPUT --3
I GND ----------------5------@D-O
I
(,Is RAb - ---5

-----<#

=a

>

i:
>
=:j
n
-
-
-
("")
tn
tt1

-
("")
tt1
s::

C
>
-
t
54549

trjO

QO>
'l1

-.

a
QOrn
9'
-
-
:.:c:
0
"1
N'
0
::s
-e.
til
....
-
f5
-
....
0
::s
-
::s
c:l<
....
n
III
g
"1
:.:c:
e;

CIl
CIl
-0
"d
-
....
g
e.
'-'
tl
....
go
g
-
(")
" 0
"
NSO-3&0 COUPLER
CONN. CO 10& CONU. CO-).4
RAO 10
COUPLER
CONN. (0-33
____ _
GIS COUPLER
HARNESS
CONN. CD-58

15 12

, .
)
fUNCT I ON
NAV 1
HARNESS
CONN. FCP-l b
AIRFRAME GNO [AN20] 1'7
NAv FLAG I-I ----!.,--------
NAv FLAG (+)
14/28V INPUT [AN20]
I
I
OBS ROT OR'A. ,,(, '. 1- I
OBS R010R (C) -++- 1
OBS SlA10R (El AN22--.;;r2
O"S SlA10R (0) SHLO'----,,-------+=.:+-. 9
OBS S 1A lOR (G) rJ 21
OBS STATOR (F) _ --.;;r 3 I
:-,
I
I
TO FROM TO
--------;.--------'---- '0 FROM fROM -----'-----------,'5
--------;.--------'----- LIR RAO'O L1
----------------,'---- LIR RADIO Rl i
, t I IAN2;1
")...---'-------- F - _J - - - -. LI GHT S l J )
2
'90--&----aLJ201 b
E
_- _ .- '. - - - - '14V ROLL MOO. SUP. (OUTI I
14V ROLL MOO. SUP. (ouTi I
;- A - HOG SIGNAL
B- COURSE
TO GIS REC (o\IP) ------7
, ---:----------------t(Tj B' - - - GIS SIG (.UP) [AN22 SHLO) I
28. TO GIS REC ('ON) ---b
A' - - -- GIS S'G (ON) [AN22 SHLO] I
K' - - - - GND I
35 --- -CL:) OOIII1LOC MODE SW 'NPUT --9
, I
I
',IS -
-----<JI::) (./, HI'(, +
-----4
---5
0\
I
-
"!j

0\
I
.....
.....

0

g
....

til
....
.....
s::
III
r::t
0
::s
S-
o.
5'

0
'"t
f

.-..
0
'0
.....
....
g

"-'

....

:;tl

<
tIl'-l
f!10
01-4
.. >
O\'-l

u.tIl
NSD-360
CD-106

COUPLER
CD-34
RADIO
COUPLER
CD-33
G/S COUPLER
HARNESS
CD-58 FUNCTION
NAV I
HARNESS
FCP-30
RNAV
HARNESS
FCP-16
7 NAV FLAG (-) -------------- 13

- - - - - - - - - - - -AIRFRAME GND
8 NAV FLAG (+) 4
- - - - - - -- - - --14/28 VDC INPUT
- - -L
'2
15 -+-1 +-) -----------------OBS ROTOR (A)OR(H)
16 (-, OBS ROTOR (C)
23 i-I OBS STATOR (E) ______ --+a+
l
_
Ii 2 24 ,I OBS STATOR (D)
25 !" OBS STATOR (G)
STATOR (F)
34 + FRO M
33 t TO
" " -
17 U '.: B -+-I.t-J------------L/R
,. 0 " t i =- =-
RADIO tLT
RADIO +RT
8VDC
S
19 ---------+14_10_ - - - --+14 V
20 I'" E - - - - --+ 14 V
DC ROLL MOD. SUP. (OUT)

DC ROLL MOD. SUP. (OUT)
21 I J A - - - -HOG SIGNAL
..
22 () B -- - - --COURS E
27 B---G/9 (+UP)
28 A---G/S ( tON)
29 G/S F LAG (-)
30 G/S F LAG(+)
K---------- C - -GND
-------------------OMNI LOC MODE sw. INPUT
SHIELDS ------
3
7
6
4
5
__ I
8
__ L-
15
2
3
16
12
24
NSO 360 CO-I06 CO-33 1088- 2 RADIO COUPLER
I
+HDGICOURSE EX. 19 ,-, 0,+141/ ROLL MOOULE SUPPLY (OUT) I
- HOG/COURSE EX. E -14V ROLL MODULE SUPPLY (OUn
I HOG COMMAND SIG OUTPUTI+LT 21 A1 HDG SIGNAL
COURSE DATUM SIG OUTPUT I+LT p3 I I La
I--... I I CO-34 IC388.2 RADIO COUPLER
L/R NEEDLE INPUT + LT 117 1 , , I '" LIt< RAuiu I., I
L/R NEEDLE INPUT + RT A L/R RADIO .. RT
0 GROUND
-- AT H
r- -IA/P MASTER SWITC.. CD.28 30C291 GIS COUPLER CAB
G/S.SIG (T UP)
GIS SIG [+ ONI
OMNI LOC MOOE SW. INPUT
AIRFRAME GNO
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
NAV FLAG-
NAV FLAG +
SPARE
14V INPUT
14/28 V INPUT
14/28V INPUT
FUTURE USE
FUTURE USE
'OBS ROTOR (A) OR (H)
08$ ROTOR (e)
OBS STATOR (E)
OBS STATOR (0)
OBS STATOR (G)
Des STATOR IF)
GIS FLAG-
GIS FLAG +
LOCFLAG
Loe FLAG
TIl -FROM + TIl
TO-FROM .. FROM
SPARE

I J '.' GIS SIG (+ON)
t- ...r::-- J ________ ---'
r-

3 -=
4
:i
6
tON +uP
10 GIS REC NAV RECEIVER TO P" K OF CD- 34
r--LOC SWITCH

:

ISt--------f 1
2;1
24 I : l!

341--

'------------' JO-AIRE MITCHEU.I
L ____
A+ TO LOAD SIDE OF NSD-360 C.!!.
TOAIRCRAFT GROUND
10 cOon ON THE r
MAGNETIC FLUXl
NSD 360 AIR DRIVEN SLAVED
OETECTDII
NAVIGATION SITUATION DISPLAY
CT ROTOR (C) H
-III
CT STATOR [XI J
CT STATOII (Y) B
CT STATOR (Z) C
CT ROTOII [HI A
IJ I
SLAVING COIL D
SLAVING COIL F
SLAVING COIL +
JJUMPER
SLAVING COIL CENTER TAP
AMPHENOL 126-1082 ""1
(9 PIN PLUGI
\cODE SELECTOR
MITCHElL PIN 102 SWITCH, 3 POT
ON-OFFON
CD 115 - IC714 GYRO SLAVING AMP
24i ',,"/26 V.D.C.
,. ZZ GROUNO
6 F.D. STATOR
I
a F.D. STATOR
I
10 F.D. STATOR
I
I F.O. ROTOR ,
2 F.D ROTOII
I,
23 S;:OAIIE
-
31cr ROTOR (CI"1
51 CT STATOR (Xl "I
' , 7 CT STATOR (Y"'I
9 CT SfATOR (Zl '"
'4jcr ROTOR (H'",'
I,
16 jSLAVING COIL"
't......
17IsL:'VING CO'L"
20 GROUND [SH'ELD" )
r-- 21 GROUND [SHIELD oi!l
... SPARE
II SPARE
IZ SPARE
13 S;:OARE
IS cr ROTDR [HI .. 2
, . 18 i SLAVING COtl.b2
,- I'
AMPHENOt.. 57-30240
(24 PIN IIECEPTACLE I
MITCHELL PIN Z8561
NSD360
GROIJNO J
Z
.sPAIl .!
4
.sPAIl 5
:SPAIi! 6
NAV 7 f-\'--_T/VIO
NAV f-!f--
.sPAIi!E <;J
INPUT 10 --l
U/ZA v INPUT 1/ I I A'"
141 ZIJ v INPUT. IZ r---' NSIJ C.B.
rorul!E: UJE: 13
PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MAl'JUAL
I
'-----wWT/eLK/vlo -------...;,J .. "
""NT/IJL"16IlAJ' flN 21117 Ie
I
C7JTV1i!E: 1 I I
l!jr-""":--------t--+-t-+------------------i lJ /I I IZ
Rt:JTOIi!(C) 16 _. I C ,IT 2 Of
LrTR/GNTr.Uf!TJ n I( 2' /I I'
IfJ 7 12 16
AlP 1 r 19
AlP' APPIi'!!Pf'fAT ---1 20
AlP i"' . I 21
ALL WIIi'ING ANLW-SOO6A
ZZ ca. MIN NOTED
AlP; INTERCONNECT l IZ
1!1-----7"',;--------+--+-t-+-----------------lH Ij :s
0":5 STA11)1i! (0) 14 :.: z,! J /I
OIJJ .s7ATOIi! fal Z! AI IZ: 6 /I
OtnJTATQe(;:1 z '.' 1. M 4 6
G/sr.uP1 27 L W.s fHjNI Izo
GIS nAGl-'
GIS (.1 JO
I..DC Cl.AG (.11)1 !l
I..DC jZ
TO;:/lOM I.TOI .w-rr/tJuc/OIrN----..,lff-;S 'I" 14
TO;:Ii!OM ... z ..
LOCALIZ1i? lSt- (J J It; 12
.$PAIi'E: .l6 L I
'------------________ J,..,...,... rn NAV l?ECIVEk!
4l USED WITI-! CONVERiERS
THAW MITC'HELL Ie 707.
Figure 6-12. Horizontal Situation Indicator Schematic Slaved (Optional)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
6-15
PIPER ALTIMATIC IIlC SERVICE MANUAL
6-16
S -I; TRIM DIRECTION SWITCH
S-2:TRIM DIRECTION SWITCH
.S-3
NC\
S-2 S-I
NC
C C:-o----.
NO
AlP A+
SUS BAR
RELAY SOX
.t=n
TRIM SERVO
----11---
SOLENOID

,I\-

S- 3: TRI M ENABLE lAP DISCONNECT

t;

TRIM
INNTERRUPT SWITCH
A+
CO-83
CO-I02
CD-1t3
CD-36
II r
CO-76 IAlslclolE IF IHI CD-73
CD-73
A

.1'/'
T ,I,
B
-
/1'/' C
I

0-
-.. -
TO CD-27
CD-45
,--

CD-43 " ,.t, -
'------=:......;.:=-<, _ C
CO-44L; _______ 4-____
(
L--___ -==-"-'-(" I - _.,-

(
CO-/l3 '

.---_-oA CD-42
TRIM MASTER
SWITCH
CD-39
PITCH SERVO MOTOR
LEAD FROM MAIN
CASLE HARNESS
CO-IS

--------_-+--;re
T 1. rc
,1, -
----------0-+----1 0
- '---
CD-16 --

TRIM CIRCUIT
SREAKEr.
1 I - ro-
CO16 ,ATal
3 AMP
IAlslclol CO-40
1
SHOWN IN PITCH
OFF POSITION
CONSOLE
L.
PITCH SERVO
SOLENOID 4. Y (---
Figure 6-13. Electronic Trim System Schematic
IC709 ELECTRONIC
PITCH TRIM
AMPLIFIER
I
I
WIRING DIAGRAMS
ISSUED: 11/25/74
A
B
C
0
A /P DISCONNECT
REL A Y ASS'y.

GREEN
WHITE
BLACK
RED
WHITE
WHITE
CLUTCH COIL
SWITCH IN "R" POSITION
Figure 6-14. Servo Schema tic
CD-76
F
E
D
lie 1
C
lie
B
A
IMFO
25V
CD.
10
-
WHITE - A
-
0
YELLOW,,- -
WHITE ,;
H OUT
-
E
r--
YELLOW- S EXCITATION
0.....-
Figure 6-15. Relay Box Schematic Figure 6-16. Altitude Hold Unit Schema tic
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
6-17
6-18
HORllON
CD-18
A BLACK---CI-r ----"
CANNON PLUG
CI- SIDE
CD-20-2 A WHITE/BROWN 20
B WHITE ---CI-s ------J
C GREEN ---C I-g ------J
SH IELD, EX TERNA L (CI- h 1
CD-20-3 B WHITE/VIOLET 20
CD-20-10 C WHITE 20
o RED C I-p ----+-i-+---____
E ORANGE ---C I-d -----1
F , , SHIELD ---CI-e-----1
H " BLUE ---CI-f ----./
CD-33
I
B
C RED CI-Z -----J
GREEN ---CI-Y -----+------.J
E WHITE/BLACK -CI-W-----1
F BLUE CI-V-----1
H SHIELD---CI-j----J
CONSOLE
CD-20
WHITE ---CD-27 20
WHITE/BROWN-CI-A 20
WHITEIVIOLET-CI-B 20
ORANGE ---C 1- R -----.,J
YELl.OW ---CI- T -----.J
GREEN ---CI-H -----.,J
BLUE ---CI-J-----.J
VIOLET ---CI-P-----.J
GRAY CI-S WHITE CD-IO-B
WHITE CI-C RED CD-IO-A
BLACK---CI-U-----.J
GREEN ---CD-IO-H -----..I
BROWN ---CI -N ----..,..-----<
REO CI-K -----1
WHITE ---CD-26 20
BLACK ---CD-IO-D ---1
WHITE/BLUE -CI-F ----1
WHITE/YELLOW-CI-G ----1
SHIELD ---CD-IO-E ---1
SHIELD ---CD-IO-E CI-M
(NOT CONNECTED TO CD-18)
CD-43 D WHITE/BLUE 20
CD-39 E WHITE/RED 26
CD-20-17 F WHITE/BLUE 26
30B343
CD-20-IB G WH I TE/ YELLOW 26
CD-20-6 H GREEN 26
CD-20-7 J BLUE 26
CIJ-20-14 K RED 26
GROUND L SHIELD 26
CD-20-20 SHIELD 26
- CD-20-13 N BROWN 26
CD-20-8 P VIOLET 26
CD-20-4 R ORANGE 26
CD-20-9 S GRAY 26
CD-20-5 T YELLOW 26
CD-20-11 U BLACK 26
CD-33-F V BLUE 26
CD-33-E W WHITE/BLACK 26
- CD-33-D Y GREEN 26
CD-33-C i! RED 26
CD-33-A a BLACK 26
CD-33-B b WHITE 26
CD-44- WHITE/YELLOW 26
CD-IB-E ORANGE 2B
CD-18-F SHIELD, INTERNAL 28
CD-18-H BLUE 28
CD-18-C GREEN 28
CD-18 SHIELD SHI ELD, EXTERNAL
CD-33 SHIELD
CD-IB-D RED 26
CD-IB-A--...r.""'1-- BLACK 26
CD-IB-B WHITE 26

CD-92-1 WHITE/BLK/RED 20
CD-4B WHITE/BLK/ORN 20
3OC40B-2 CD-92-3 WHITE (SHIELDED) 20
w SHIELD(CD47-C EI CD47-D) -- 20
CD-4B-4 Y WHITE (SHIELDED) 20
ALTITUDE SEL.
CD-IO
CD-20-9 B WHITE --------
CD-20-10@it RED
CD-20-16 0 BLACK ========
CD-2D-19 E SHIELD
CDIB
CD 3
CD-20-12 H GREEN --------
ARROWS .. OW PROCIDU'U! FOR
SOLDERING LEADS AfTER
CONNECTING ALL LIIAOS, DI", TO
at TIED, THIN H)nED.
Figure 6-17. A1tiMatic IIIC Pressure Bulkhead Connectors (PA-31 P)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
ISSUED: 11/25/74
AMPLIFIER
RI
DG SIG A C2-o BLACK
ROll EX B C2-R ORANGE
ROll EX C C2-T YEllOW
MOTOR /COM D CD- 47-D WHITE
MOTOR E CD-47-C BLACK
GROUND CD-33 F C2- J SHIELD
ROll SIG. H C2-g GREEN
DG EX. J C2-W WH I TE / BLACK
K
DG EX. l C2- Y GREEN
ROll SOL. M CD 47-A RED
14 V D.C. N C2-A WHITE/BROWN (20GA)-
P
GROUND R CD 47-B SHIELD
GROUND S
ROLL COMMAND I C2-H GREEN
l T. BANK ADJ. 2 C2-J BLUE
RT BANK ADJ. :3 C2-P VIOLET
PITCH SOL 4 CDI6-A RED (20GA)
GROUND 5 C2-M SHIELD
GROUND 6 CD 16-B SHIELD
PITCH IND 7 C2N BROWN
PITCH SIG B C2-f BLUE
PITCH MOTOR 9 CDI6-D WHITE
UP ADJUST 10 C2-F WHITE/BLUE
DOWN ADJ. II C2-G WHI TE/ YEllOW-
PITCH MOTOR /COM 12 CDI6-C BLACK
PITCH EX. 13 C2-S GRAY
PITCH EX. 14 C2-C WHITE
PITCH COMMAND 15 C2-U BLACK
D4
CANNON PLUG
fBlK C2-r
AUGE
20 RI-N WH
20 RI-4 WHI
26 RI-14 WHI
20 WHI
20 WHI
ITE/BROWN
TE
TE
TE/BlUE
TE/RED-----
RED C2-r
G
iWHT. C2-s

BLUE C2-V

l---
iRED C2-p ,-I---
WHT. C2-b
V-
I--:
26 RI-IO WHI TE/BlUE
26 RI-II WHI TE/ YELLOW
30B347 26 RI-I GRE EN
26 RI- 2 BLU E
1,.--: 26 RI-12 RED
1'-. I--20 SHI ELD
26 RI-5 SHI ELD

26 RI-7 BRO WN--------
I,.-- 26 RI-:3 VIO LET
I,.-- 26 RI-B ORA NGE
26 RI-13 GRA Y
26 RI- C YEl lOW
l--: 26 RI-15 BLA CK
28 RI- C BlU
28 RI-J WHI
28 RI- l GRE
28 RI- BRED
28 RI- A BlA
28 RI-D WHI
E
TE/BlACK--------
EN
CK
TE
lWHT.IV,O C2-B

"-:
"-
20 WH
26 RI-13 ORA
26 RI-12 SHI
26 RI- 8 BlU
ITE/YELLOW
NGE
ElD
E --.--------
r, RED C2-K(SH 2z:e
-
fORN. C2-d
"--.:
'--:
PITCH
26 RI- H GRE
OPE
26 RI- F SHI
EN
N
ElD

'--
r- SHIELD RI- 6 B
'--
BLACK RI-I2 C
'--
'--- WHITE RI-9 0
- OPE N
C2
A j---
B j---
c- j---

I--
E I--
F j---

I--
I--
,'"'-
j---
.-K-
I--
L j---
M j---
N I--
P ,--.
If I--

I--
,L
-
li -
V-
w-
Y-

-

f---
c I--

j---

f -
9r--
h r--
I j---
k
I
ii'f---
CD-20
CD-20
CD-20
CD-45
CD-45
CD-20
CD-20
CD-20
CD-20
CD-20
CD-45
CD-20
CD-20
CD-20
CD-20
CD-20
CD-20
CD-20
CD-:33
CD-33
CD-33
CD-33
CD-33
CD- 33
CD-45
CD- IB
CD- IB
CD- IB
CD-IS
CD- IS
CD-3:3
CD-48
N ------.. ---.---- n -

CK r -
TE

-
CD-4S
CD- IS
CD- IS
CD- IS
ROLL '--
RI-M A .-
SHIELD RI-R B '--:
'-- BLACK RI- E C '-- ill
WHITE RI-D rn E20 CD 47-B WHT
'--..-
/BlK /RED ....L - CD-92-1
-20 CD 47-A WHT .t8LK /ORN u
-
CD-4S
3OC408-1 - --20 CD 47-C WHI
-20 CD 47-CBD
--CD 47-D WHI
TE (SHIELDED) ------ v
SHIELD--------- w
TE (SfH ElDED) ..:L
c--
-
CD-92-3
SHIELD
CD-92-4
ARROWS SHOW PROCEDURE FOR
SOLDERING LEADS AFTER
CONNECTING ALL LEADS, DIA. TO
BE TIED, THEN POTTED.
A-A
A
A
Figure 6-17. AltiMatic IIIC Pressure Bulkhead Connectors (PA-31P) cont.
WIRING DIAGRAMS
ISSUED: 11/25/74
6-19
'l'
....
....
N
co
N
CON N.-
(Pl.lRc..I-I:)
PSIC>C>2.'S-14-3PQS RI:Q)
C.ONN.-I
(PURc..i-I';)
CONN, - 12.<. -2.15 --
(PUR.c.I-I';)
CONN.-I 2..(,,-2.15
(PUR.CI-\.)
6-20
CClNN. COM ..... \" C.ONN. CD-'\1 CONN.CD-I Co CONN. CO
SOL,
B 1: B -------------I------------I-----GROUND
C '\ CL:) C -------- ---1---------- -1- ----MCiTOR ROLL
f '* D-----------I-----------I-----MOIORROLLc.OM,
E-.-1-- - - - ---- -- ------- --- ---------1--- - -- --- - --- -----1-- ---SI\\I:.LDS
F A ---- -- - -----I-----P\\C\-\ SOL,
H ;1 B-----------I-----C,RClUNO
J " c::::r=J
K ;.< D------------I-----MO,OR pIIC.1-\ CJ,)M,
______ --- ----- ------- -- --- -----I------S\-\\Ul)<;.
A-----TRIM'66\...
N CJ.D It B -----GROUNO
P ;i< c:IC) )-< C - ---- MDIDR IRII-'\
______________________ __ D_-=--=--=--=:::L::RIM COM.
ROLL
SERVO
PLUG
CONN.
C.0-41
---
C6NN.
CO-lID
PITCH TRIM
AMPLIFIER
1---1------------ '--------------------------. . --{
Figure 6-18. Servo, ALT mc A/P Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 4/15/77
Cf
M
'" en
If)
.....
HSI
CONNC,OI'l-
51- ;O"?>IoO (PURt.\\)
CO"lN C.t:>IOIo
FUNCTION J-BOX
=====r,==== ,I
I I
1 GND
1 NI>..V .L"'c::,(-)
E\ NA-V nr..G(t) _ P5100G5-2.-5B
--,
PM'1.(OCI2 IS :
---;
I
PMS-E.OOII-l-2Z
I
__ -.I
---,
II ItJPUI
L __________ 14V/28VII\IPIJI
,
R010R H
I ____
R010R C. =
I

Il- LEFT
I

I ____
ROLL
I
=
I
PI1\S.EOOI'.I'Z2 f.\Oc::, SIGt\)I'.l (2CI3_) ! =
I !
HSI
2.2 CO\lf\SE ---<.1:c.l'O C t...=
:
n -...,'..,.'------ SIp..'QR :
I
24 --2-------- 5111.,01".0 6 =
I
,'" -...,..,.----------- SI"',OR <:'0
:
__ ...1 ','" --+;------- '1.111.101'\ I'
I
21---------
I
ZEI ---------
,
.'
29 ----------

31
32

G S 'LI$; - ---c:mJ.----=
G5 1" ---c::ffi)----=
,3 ------------ '10
34
35 -. ----------------OII\W\ LQC MOOt 5lI It.) Ie
'WIRE R&1lC.
C.Ot$N
CO-lOb J-BQX
1"0,," c.m.llll.l::iS SEt:
1-j!>.I'IN1::.5'O. I"'''-'\...
NOT U.se:D WITH N.50 - 3bOA
Figure 6-19. HSI Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
6-21
')'
...
'"
'" III
.....
PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL,
CONVER1ER
(ONNf;t."YOR. J
FUNCTION J-BOX
(PllRCI-I)
I CIH"/II

I
t I
I
I I
1
--..,
2
.-
1".01 OF>. C
-cmD
......
=
I
!
t ,
,

Phl5-EOOII-1-2Z. :
I
3 R010 F\ I)
--cillD
......
=
I
,
!
,

,
I

__ oJ <\ ROTOR G
I

qj
,
J 5
"--
(;I\lO

,
,
6
7
10 ::t ----:- -----1'IIIc.R LClf\O
II ---------I'IIE.IR LO"Cl
12. - - - - - - - - - I'IIC'fE:R LOM
---,
PI'II'>-t:OOI?-IS I I; -.J 14/2.SIIOC.l>-t'5W---<:TID---=
__ ...I 14
15 NAil FL .... C. +
''''- N .... II
17 f '51Q. ,; c:::J
Ie. - t 1 0 --<1IID c:::J
tF'ROl'l\
--'20 ROl'QRH
I I I
PNI'S-EOOII-l-Z2 : 21
I I I
, 2'Z
- --' ,
ROiOR 1"
ROiOR E
"
23-------- t LE: r,
,
I
24 --------- + RIGHi

, \... FOR (.ONT .... C.,-'" '<>EE HI\I\NE':>'" 11\1",,-0..;
CONV(RIt:R
6-22
'-'I'RE
/
e.0-1I2. J-------..L....---l J- BOX
Figure 6-20. Converter Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
ADDED: 4/15/77
N
.;,
CD
en
'"
..
en
M
en
ID
..
.....
CD
en
en
'"
..
RI>-OIO COUPLER
cotJl\}(.C,1"i)f'I.
12''-217-1000I.. PI.IR.c.I-\')
(01\11\3
RM)IO
CClUI'LlR
FUNCYION J-BOl<-
I
I I
-t RIGHl
FOR USE WITH HSI
SWll(H J-BO)('
I
HARNESS I
E I I
D) I I
F I I
(

=---CIfL)- K : : SEt. I41\RNESS
1 ZC:5q .
LIIlB IN FUSELAGE

OMNI
COUPLER
SWnc.H
o-----aTI:)--c
(lap., 41i., bac.k when GIS
couple.r ;!> "/lot hsta,I\e.cI.)
J-BOX
FOR USE WITH STANDARD D.G.
PANL
PiN JBIS-l3

WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 8/10/78
Figure 6-21. Radio Coupler Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)
6-23
111

')'
C>
N
'"
'"
6-24
'-"';:';:-=':-i--'=-=-"----' F\JNC.TIONS
A/C GROUNO
STATOR
STATOR
S TA lOR
ROTOR
I
CT STATOR (X) III ----fl5- I
CT STATOR (I) III ----flS-B
ROTOR
CT ROTOR (C) III
--1 14
16
CI STATOR (1) III ----BG- C I
CT ROTOR (H) #1 -----+1
)------f---:----&LAV I NG CO I L #1 I "
I 0
--1
1 7 -,.,..----,.
20- ----------- H--
21
15 - /" ,
18 ---f;--(
19
SLAVING COIL #1
SH I EL 0 GROUND
SHI ELO GROUND
CT ROTOR (H) 112
SLAVING COIL 112
SLAVING COIL 112
CT ROIOR (H)
SLAVING COIL
SLAVING COIL
--3
I' I
_-+-1
I 0
I
- ----A -c:IL:)--- 7 --7
---8
1-- 9
SLAVING COIL + ----- E
" ------{1ffJ-QQ)---{) ______ ";; =-_K__ ___ ___ ___ _ __ J
I
- - - - E USED WHEN RMI IS INSTALLED.
GYRO
SLAVING
AMPLIFIER
CONN
CD-lIS
WIRE (SA-G)
SLAVING MODE
SELECTOR
SWITCH
PS1002.5-1-IF
9REQ
---- K
L ______ _
C/p '- WIRE (SA-P)
CONN
FLU"
MAGNETIC FLUX
DETECTOR
Figure 6-22. Gyro Slaving Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
o
,.
e:'
o
.,.
'" ill
....
I
CONN
5W-1
'+dJ I
~
't-
-s ---,
~
~
T
~
-
1991-9P PLUG (PURCH.)
PS1002.5-1-1M (9 RE.Q.)
FIGURE I
WIRING DIAGRAM
I
I
VIEW A-A
--l
1-
.S
I
. 6
'----
NOTE:
WjO RMI ONLY
Figure 6-23. Slaving Switch Harness, PA-23-250 (six place), PA-31-310; -325; -350 and PA-31 P
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED; 3/10/78
6-25
'l'
'"
II>
'" II>
....
<.l
,
'l'
00
II>
II>
...
It>

r-r-
6-26
GYRO
SL,b,.. VI NG
6..M PLI \="\ E R
FUNCTION J-80X
J-BOX
I
Figure 6-24. RMI Boot Strap Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)
PL\lG-MfS-LS-H'n
(PURCH)
CONN. RJ98 FUNCT ION
A --e---c:J::)-- S TA TOR
B STATOR
D' --B-CD-- STATOR
ROTOR
ROTOR
PLUG 12&-1 H
(rURCH)
CONN. RJ97

B

-A-E
':1- Ii PS1002S-2-5B

Figure 6-25. Flux Sensor Harness, PA-31-31 0; -325; -350 and PA-31P
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
RADIO
NSO-JbO COUPLER COUPLER
CONN. 57-JOJbO CONN. 12b-222 PLUG 12b-211-16'"
( PURCH) (PURClll ( PURCH)
CONN. CD-lOb CONN. CO-J4 CONN. CO-33
GIS COUPLER
HARNESS
CONN 12b-21) -1 DOl
(PURCH)
CONN.
FUNCT I ON
NAV I
HARNESS IC707
CONN 57-301.40
(l'URCHl
CONN. CO-112
7 __ ...!'_______ -,-_______ .;-__ NAV FLAG(-)
8 I I : NAV FLAG(') 15
()-QQI[)-- 'I!- ----' -- --r - - - - -1- - AIRFRAME GNO [AN20]
- - - - -1- - - - - 1- - - - - - -:- -

1 08S ROTOR (C) 1--!......------<'O'J-
22 , .---"---------''---_------"---- 08S STATOR (E) AN221---!......------.=.-
24 OBS STATOR (D) SHLO C
OBS STATOR (G) 4
2b--8---CJ1:)--+--------':---------L-- aBS STATOR (F") 21
Jl . LOC FLAG
J2 LOC FLAG
J4--cI:) + F'ROM

-----"---------18
JJ-G:) -TO
17--B--OD-E+- -:; LIR RAOIO' LT .J
()--(]D i.' __________ RADIO' RT l+
: (}--{]lljD I H------t.!...-------I-- 1
: =-e:m::::::::>- : F - - _ - - '-- ..J - - - - - - - .!... - - LI GHTS [ J
"4VROLLMOO. SUP.
20-s-crr:::> I E- _______ 1 ___ "4V ROLL MOD. SUP. (OUT) ANI
:. .;, A ________ : ___ HOGSIGNAL SHLO
22+<:::iI::> A 8- - - - - - - - - - - COURSE
28
1
:: 25
8
I Bi ___ GIS SIG (.UP) [AN11 SHLO]
I - I . TO GIS REC (.UP) -1
: I 1: TO GIS REC ('ON) --1
I ::: b I Ai - - GIS SIG ('ON) [AN22 SHLO] I
I K C - - Loe NORMIIL I
I OMNILOC MODE SW INPUT . _u..----. / b
: L
NOT
UQ.UIP.EO WITH Nsn Ji>OAL __ Lc:.c. -=.: 5Q[ill}O
I NAV SIG. IN - - - -c:II::>-17
. (,/S HA'" -
r,/s FlII&+ --5
Z8VA+ SWITCHED - -- - 1 -
2----(GR]D----O--- --- --:...----LtGHTS ION!)
;3 .T -------.:----LlIHIT!02.8v.
BOLT LI GHT HARNESS
WIRE RGbO -----.--.,.
WIRE RP118
!\II-IGOH
SHLD/WIRES
WIRE RP10C
WIRE RG70
GIS COUPLER
HARNESS
COUPLER
\l.\Nr, OH SHLO

\\INC; OFf
SIILQ (WIRES l5"/V;')
GNO.
WI RE RG7C
Figure 6-26. HSI, EDO AIRE Mitchell Harness, PA-31-31O; -325 and -350
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
6-27
:r
,
')'
.,.,
..,.
III
..,.
III
NSDUO
CONN. 51-JOJbO
(PURCHl
CONN. CDIU
COUPLER
CONN. 12b-221
(PIIRCII! .
CONN.Co.l4
RADIO
COUPLER
GIS COUPLER
HARNESS
I---:-------j FUNCTION
NAV 1
HARNESS
CONN. Ot.-25$
OB-24b59 SHELL
!la-SIUI-I !i.L.1\
CONN. rCP-l b
IcrOl
I
-----,- ----I-------I--AIRFRAMEGND' I
1 I 1 NAV FLAG (1

RP10C '11- -- _ _ _ _ _ 1 ____ -- -!. __ I4/UV INPUT 1
L.ll I
ROTOR (AI OR (HI ,_ ,-, 2.
1
14 OBSSTATOR(EI ,-, t2-
14--v-a:r::> OBS STATOR (01 _--:-______ -"""::'_ 9 ___ ... , -- .,
._-.:-, -!.oj z 1
I 1 I I
1 I I
J J---c:::I::) TO FROM +TO' I 1 &
J4---CC::::> TO FROM + FROM 15
LtRRADIO+LT I ,_ 23
LtR RADIO + RT I c::iI::)-E+-lb (, 21
, Z 0 - - - - - - -..!. - OND I 1 '
0---amD--- : H ! I : A+2IY. 13
r ______ J _____ --_ LIOHTS I 1 1.-14
I' b- _______ + _+14V ROL,L MOO. SUP. I 1
1 _ E---------+I4VROLLMOD.SUP.(OUTI 1 1
21--e--ar::::>: ? A _______ 1 1 1
22-G--<lL:) e B--- - - -----COURSE I I
27m : TOOISREC(+UPI -/ I 1
I - 24 I 1
28 r I \ TO GIS REC (+DN) b 1 1
I' ---;;-A - GIS SIG (+ONI 1 1
I K CJ::)--c - L.OC NORM 1
J5 --rr::> .OMNILOC MODE SW INPUT - 9 -OJC) l,
I L ... ",.o, VORV'DOHI I
: NOT REIlUIR;D "'IHI NSDll>OA voR VIDEO LO:
GIS FLAG ---4
- GIS FLAG t ---- 5
- - - - - -- -- -- - - - - --- - --- --lIGH,.' e.ND
J-- - - - - - - -- - -- ---- --- -----L",.,IT$ 2.Sv.
6-28
WI RE RPll B
I\IIIG OH

RP10C
aOL' LIe. H T H A.A.NE. 55
(OUPLER
RG7D
p..q.J(,orF
2.5'(
OFF
SHLD. (WIRES 12,15,1&,2& & 27)
RIW& OH SIILO,
nl NG orr
SHLD (WIRES 13,14' 17)
CI4IIIlE.S 12,15,1&,
2.1.,2.7,13,1-4,/7.
n "'30)
Figure 6-27. HSI,_ EDO AIRE Mitchell Harness, PA-31-31O; -325 and -350
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
____ __________________ .... ____ ____
#24043-0196 (SUPPLIED WITH UNIT) 0
SEE TABLE I ..
SE.t:. FIG, 2
"12.6-1'5 CONN. (?URc\-\,)
*(,,10("4-\ \G:RM, (?URCI-I,)(l REQ,)
5EE \j)"BLE. 2.
'SE.E. FIG, ,
"4-200'9 ClOSURIO:.. (PURCH,)
T!>'PE. (PURC\-\,)
A'S RE.G.,
.. D- 144-02. SOLDER SLEEYE (PURCI-I,)
\N \ R.E.(I\N.2.2.) I'" oCr ":.., S (<0.001..,)
R.c.\-\,)
FIGUR.E 1
'50LDE.R 5LEE.\!1::, I NS\I\LLA, ION
RING OFF
S\-\IELO'O I\S
""HewN,
FIGURE 2
'W I RE.( I)
'-oN \ R. .(2.)
\N \ 1'1.1::(3)
'NIRE(4)
\NIRE(S)
'W I RE(,,)
"'"0-'44-02. eDLOER., SLEE\lE(PURCH,')
<;)LI:\lE INS,!>,lL!\\\oN
Tt\BLEI
PIN GI>.UGE
t\ I t\t-l2.2.
B 2. . : o;)\-\IE.LOElJ
c Bl1\NK ---
_12-
3

4 /ioN 2. 2-
F
--5---
'5\-\IELOEO
\-\
'"
.-
PIN 'VJIRECODE -GJ;;UGE.--
A I
eo 2
C 3 PoN.?-"2..
D <\ S\-II E:.LOEO
E S
F ("
H 1
A.N?-Z-
Figure 6-28. Compensator Harness, PA-31-31O; -325, -350 and PA-31 P
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
6-29
rD
I

':'
.....
'"
...
...
III
PIPER' A LTIMATIC lIIC SERVICE MANUAL
6-30
;7- 10!QO COIilI.
( PU!1CH)
cOlm. C()II5
'---'-'-""-''':':-'-_-1 FUNCfI ON S

b 1 __ \ ; 1 - -
8 -.----<:=10-") .. 2 --

__

)
I
7
I Q
I b 1 I
AIC [AN aQ]
S TA lOR I
STATOR
STATOR
ROTOR
I
CT ROTOR (C) 111
CT STATOR (X) "I
CT STATOR (V) "I B
CT STATOR U) "1
CT ROTOR (H) '1
SLAVING COIL '1
o C I I
1 X
I v
J __ ______ _
21
I 5 ---"'---_.....r-.
SLAV I NG CO I L '1 -----;1:---------...;3;--
-,-- SHIELD GROUND 1 I
---- SHIELD GROUND
)-------+--::,-- CT ROTOR (H) '2 -----;:--------'::0;.--
18
I q
I
I
I
I
24 ----<:J!D---O-
SLAVING COIL '2 S I
I SLAVING COIL '2 I \ I
I
: 11
SLAVING COIL ---F .r-----
1 SLAVING COIL + --- E -,
I SLAV COIL CENTER TAP - - - K -J
-T-- 28V.D.C J
--1
--2
--3
--7
--8
--9
.7 ---SHU) I --- -- -- -- --- --
I=-= -:::. -= WHEN RMIIS INSTALLED.
GYRO
SLAVING
AMPLIFIER
CONN
CD-I 15
WI RE (SA-G)
SLAVING MODE
SELECTOR
SWITCH
PSIOO2.5-1-IF
9RCQ
C/p
L ______ _
WIRE (SA-P)
CONN
CD-71
MAGNETIC FLUX
DETECTOR.
Figure 6-29. Gyro Salving Harness PA-31-310, -325 and -350
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
')'
00
00
C>
00
...

rrv-1"t""A<)
PIPER ALTIMATIC mc SERVICE MANUAL
co- /2;' /'Cp. <J
;
J J 1
9
7 7
6,</DIAv/[O<?12'/d'J - - - - - 6'
Cf
/- 4.S<J.Y<J9-o S",a-LT .')
Pf/oa?r- O'.2)T
________________________
GYRO
/PM!
IA/STI!'. .
Figure 6-30. Boot Strap Harness, PA-31-31 0; 325; -350, and PA-31P
WIRING DIAGRAMS
, REVISED: 3/10/78
6-31
6-32 WIRING DIAGRAMS
ADDED: 4/15/77
24 PIH RECEPTACLE
HAV 1 AHD HAV 2
SELECTOR SWITCH
HOTE:
o
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 4/15/77
THE HUMBERS SHOWN 01'1 THE SO
PIH PLUG BRACKET ARE FOR
REFERENCE OHLY.
lua
u ..
aZlla
IZ101.
lsollS ...... , "loIS" 1.11 . 1.))9 11 17 16 ]s.).a nln Jlt1QI",1 27:U 2. %l 12 2111011,(,
W W U
II 11 " 21 It 10
L.-
L.....-
IS
17 ,. f--

..---
r--
-
..--
,..-
,..........
II I
11 1 (!J 1-/-1-1+11-10 l+III,I -J0 l-
Ie -IJ -I m .1or+ c -I@

o
Figure 6-31. Plug Bracket Schematic for Altimatic me (PA-31)
PIPER ALTThlATIC IIIe SERVICE MANUAL
.1,7 16 JUi 'I. 111121, 1 ,;r 7 S 4 1 '2 I
U
'--
"--
L.--
r II
-,1+ -IT m -1- E.' -1 ill IEIi-I,H'lelI1
6-33
GYRO
SLAVING
AMPLIFIER
C!P
''l9'-9P
(3) PSIOO,.:;I-IM
(I) P5'OO2.!H-2.."1
CONN ":301'"
YAW
DAMPER
.elb-z.p PLUG(I'I.R:H
(2) P;I(JQ<5 -1-21'1
CONNR.%OP,
SLAVING
MODE.
SELECTOR RADIO GIS tOUPlEQ
SWITCH NSC-360 NSD-36Q COUPLER COUPLER I-iA::'t,/lSS
1'I'II-'1R RECEPT. 57-}O}bi) CONI!. 12&-1I2 cellN. 112&-215-1001 CONN.
(l'\JROI.lmP510025-I-lf (PURe:..) (PURCH.' i (PURCH.)
S,",-l '[:-10& cctm (0-;4 I CONN
REQUIRro '.MEN ilMI I:. I
IS NOT INSTALLfO I I
I
--t --------L ----- m; -----
I I I
I I I
I I
24
I I
I I I
I n 9
I
I
t
I
}4
17
_______ -1-]- ________ _ ----
I'I--&--CIT::) )( C ----- - - - - -t - - --
-=-__

I a ----- WIRE 1& NOTREQUIMOON-J

:; 4----- /WlREZZtiOTI\tQU'IlEOOH-!
- --------------'l....?!.....J C-----./
l5 22
2'1

:: H ------------------------------------------
i I J - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - -- -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- - -.-.
t 8-------- ___________________________ _
I I _ c ----------- -------------------------
I I ----- ------_ - - __ - - - ___________ - _________ _
I I : 2 ------------------------------------
ft. 17-y-o:D' I .: 3-------- 1 - - -- ------ ------------ --- ------------ - - ---
:= ------=i-=--=---------===:=-=---------- ---: =-=-___--=-___
: ,:: St'Rt$3Z - - ____________________________ - _ --
19--;....QD I .J:: - -- --- - - - -- --- - -- - - - - _ - - -- - _ - ____ - - - - -- - -- - - - -
I : \J1Rf"535.3<..... 37 f7 ------------------
I I B_...QD---0 \-------------------
I I I 'I ---c::::E::)--F /----------------
I I I JU"PERFR01'\PINE TO PIN 11.1"- l{EQU.RfO ,-f. _..:. __ _____________ , ________________ _
I I I ..... HEN RMI IS NOT 'N!.TALLEO---LK ------i f:Y ----________________ T 1-- ________________ _
-------..t. ________ -- ___ -------- _ ______________ _
: I L- -,,0, !>.. ,KI-I(PURt.,,)
I It ... ,
4T ..J
.....'RE::. ,4". i 41 WITH RI1I _____ _
- ._.. ! .--.
_______________________ _
Figtue 6-32. HSI, EDO-AIRE Mitchell Harness, PA-31P
6-34
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
PRESSURE.
8ULKH(AD
PRESSURE.
BULKHE.AD
NAV 1
HARNESS
NAV1
HARt-.{.SS
il6I'I. -2S? CONN.
MAGNE.TIC
FLUX
DETE.CTOR
:2CbJ1O-1 CONN. (MOi)
PSlOOlS-6- JOS (;is REO.
2O'>}l,'H CCH< (I"JROL)
PSlOOlS-?-JOS(28 REQ.)
a:u; R410S
Iqql-'lR PLl.(; (f'IJf!Ol.l
(8) PSI002S-I-lf
a:H< FCP-JO
08-Z4659 SHEll
(2)DSJOI8 P<JST (f'IJf!Ol)
1210-1%-1(0) C.ONN.
(PUI'.C.H)
CONN H4108 FUNCTIQN (UtI FCP-lb
I I
: I I
-----------AIRFRllMECwO. [PMS-EOOI2-Z0j-_:' I
---- I------NAV FLAG (-) L-. --------i---c=cr---17
---- FLAG (0) I'I-IS-EOOI1-22 - Z CC)--- 4
-----.-----14128V INPU: : I
I I
}------08S ROTOR (4) OR (H)------ }-'..o... ________ -{
---77-" 4 ______ -08S ROTOR (el ______ 1
3
I
---i;=--- SUTOR (El ----__ 2
---f7-o------OBS STATOR (0) ------ 0
__ 7------08S STATOR (G) ______ )( I
8 _____ -08S ST(.TOR (F) ______ J
I
o::::J--&- q

I
---1.- q -- ____ TO FRO!< - TO r 1-_
MS-E001Z-221
---+--10 ______ TO FRO!< J--1(}-+--------'---<
--)(5-1-11 _____ RADIO' LT ______ II-r-;-.'------'---{
--e+-'lZ------t/R RADIO - RT ------I:!-+-;3-------l---(
--t-t-37 - -- -- GNO. (P.,",S-EOO I<.-".J 37-t-t------;----{l
; J - - - - - - A - 28V 1
-T------LlGHTS L J I
- - --- --- '14V ROLL SUP_ (OUT) I
---
_1. ______ -14V ROLL .. 00_ SUP_ (OUTl :
- ....!.-- - - --HOG SIGNAL I
_l ______ eouRsE I
--+-+-14 ------TO GIS 2-22J - 1
-- -----G/S SIG_ j-UP) I
--+-+-15-------TO GIS ilE':(+QNlEMS-EOOI2-2ZJ-1
__ ______ G/S SIG (- ON) ,
--+--+--1: ! 7
--+-+-18------ GIS FL4G ;.) r -I
-- - - -- -- - Ale GROUND I
7
I
6
I
I
a:u; C)-71
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
PSloo?5-(!-c,S I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
,
I
- l'!l-- --- STATOR
------<.0-+-+-".:-----------------1 i3
..
SUTOR
1
A
<.0-----
-- ---- <' C;
- -----<.c--r-i-+::+-----------------z.."-".....J-c- 0
--- ---Z3-i-+--..;:----------------{
STATOR
If
al -- ---
ZZ-- --- ROTOR
I
ROTOR
<3-----
,
I
I
-I- - -------CT ROTOR eC) -I
-r -.!.-- ____ CT STATOR (X) ,I
-r.- -..!.-- ____ CT STATOR (n ,I
__ STATOR (.) 41
- r.- - - '-- ____ eT STATOR (H)
f--- _L _______ SLAVING Call -I
-1-1_ - .!.. _______ SlAVING COIL ,I
I
-1- - - r - - - - SHI"LD
- ,- - -- - SHIELD GRCOND
- - - -,------ CT ROTOR (H) ,2
--I--T------SLAVING COIL.2
1
- -I- --------SLAVING COil p!'s-
- -I- -.!...-------5LAVING Call E0012
I
- - - -.- - ____ SLAViNG COIL - -22 J
_________ SLAV. COIL C!NTEiI T
- - - -.!.. ------28 V_D.C. MS-E0012-Zg
, SHI"LD ----_ -- - _______________________ _
-JO------ SHIelD ------1
L...31 ______ SHIELD ---- -JI
'---3Z------
I I
YAW
DAMPER
J4------A+Y,."'O .. MP.R
t
CE:)--
----35------A+CLUTCH PMS-tooIZ-18
- -------- - -A+YAW DAl'IptR
WI RE P.M.
c/p COUPLER
Figure 6-32_ HSI, EDO-AIRE Mitchell Harness, PA-31 P (cant.)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
PIPER ALTIivIATIC lIIC SERVICE MANUAL
COUPL"R
OEiECTOR
(;ND
"'--WIIl.E
6-35
PART II
GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER
ISSUED: 11/25/74
Paragraph
SECTION VII
DESCRIPTION
Page
7-1. Description............................................... 7-1
ISSUED: 11/25/74
vii-i
PIPER AL TIMA TIC I1IC SERVICE MANUAL
SECTION VII
DESCRIPTION
7-1. DESCRIPTION. The Glide Slope Coupler is an optional supporting system to the AltiMatic mc. It is
a completely Automatic Analog Computer that directs the Autopilot around the lateral axis to intercept
and track the approach glide path. The system automatically provides for variances in glide path angle, wind
direction and various approach configurations of the airplane.
When the Glide Slope is properly adjusted and normal approach power is applied, the airplane will
accurately follow the glide path. (Refer to Figure 7-1.)
A self contained logic circuit provides for certain conditions to be prevalent before "Lock On" or
coupling will occur. This will prevent the Glide Slope from being "Armed" under unfavorable conditions.
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED: 11/25/74
Figure 7-1. AltiMatic IIIC Glide Slope Coupler Approach
7-1
SECTION VIII
THEORY OF OPERATION
Paragraph Page
8-1. Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8-1
8-2. Coupling................................................. 8-2
ISSUED: 11/25/74
viii-i
SECTION VIII
THEORY OF OPERATION
8-1. THEORY OF OPERATION. The fundamental principle of the Glide Slope Coupler is to couple the
Glide Slope to the Autopilot. The Autopilot will then allow the airplane to descend at an angle which
corresponds to the Glide Slope to be flown and to introduce a radio deviation signal that will cause descent
angle to deviate an amount proportional to the radio signal deviation from the Glide Slope Indicator.
Note in Figure 8-1 that the Glide Slope Coupler is connected in series with the Gyro Horizon and the
Altitude Hold. Figure 8-2 shows the Glide Slope Coupler with the complete AltiMatic mc system.
Shown in Figure 8-3 is a block diagram of the elements which make up the Glide Slope Coupler. The
low level DC signal is derived from the Glide Slope Deviation Indicator and is converted into AC in the low
level chopper and then amplified in the AC amplifier. From the amplifier the signal is transformer coupled
to a phase detector. This will provide DC isolation from the Glide Slope Indicator. The high level DC
voltage out of the phase detector is applied to the integrator circuit. The detector furnishes a signal to a rate
network which supplies a DC input to the high level chopper. The high level chopper then receives a signal
from the integrator. The AC output of the high level chopper is fed into the output amplifier which is fed
in series with the pitch output from the Gyro Horizon.
PITCH
COMMAND
ALTITUDE
HOLD
GLIDE
SLOPE
COUPLER
PITCH
HORIZON
I TO RADIO
I COUPLER
AMPLIFIER
L ________ o ~ O R ~ _____ _
CENTER
UP I DOWN
ADJUSTABLE
VOLTAGE
LIMITER
SERVO
AMPLIFIER
ELECTRONIC
FOLLOWUP
NETWORK
AIRCRAFT
DYNAMICS
LO PASS
FIL TER
ELEVATOR
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
____ .J
Figure 8-1. Pitch Axis Control System with Glide Slope Coupler
THEORY OF OPERATION
ISSUED: 11/25/74
8-1
8-2. COUPLING. Coupling or "Arming" will occur ONLY when three conditions have been met, these
conditions are:
1. The airplane must be in ALT Hold Mode.
2. The Radio Coupler must be in Localizer Normal Mode.
3. The airplane must be flown under the glide path (at least 60% up indication) for 20 seconds.
The logic circuit, which consists of a bistable multivibrator circuit, insures that all the above
conditions prevail prior to arming the coupler. The logic circ'uit also has a reset function which disarms the
circuit if anyone of the three inputs are interrupted. After anyone of the inputs are interrupted all three
conditions must be met again prior to rearming.
8-2 THEORY OF OPERATION
ISSUED: 11/25/74

r;;0

., 0

-0

-..Jt!j

o-j
......

00
I
W
"'I'j
.....
(JQ
Ei
(l)
00
I
IV
t::O
0-

o
&'
'"1

S
o
.....,
C:
......

.....
.....
(")
......
......
......
(j
:::::
.....
c.
....
9
.....
0..
(l)
(JJ
0-
"0
(l)
(j
o
C
"0
(S'
'"1
,..----.... f-:-,WIRE TO INSTRUMENTY
LIGHT HARNESS
I
ICOIO]
'COIOI
-!-
TRIM CIRCUIT
BREAKER
TO INSTRUMENT
LIGHT HARNESS
TRIM
SERVO

I I!
l r I rl '''F-
J .
COIS
1 1 ICOIS I
Fern

BUS

, SA-P SA CIRCUIT
. i--JPROTECTOR
?
(CD
1
36 )
'"d
=a
t!1

:>
t"'"
t-3
S2
:>

C1
-
......
......
C1
CI"l

(=5
t!1
s=
:>
z

t"'"
P
I
P
E
R

A
L
T
I
M
A
T
I
C

I
I
T
C

S
E
R
V
I
C
E

M
A
N
U
A
L

I

8
-
4

I
-
:
J

)

1
=

q

:
J

o

t

t
a
:

w
O

(
/
)
1
-
u

J
:
W

0
.
1
-
W

o

t

a
:

w

'
i
L

u
_

'
.
.
.
1

a
.

:
!
E

t
a
:

.
.
J
w

3
:
W
I
l
.

0
>
1
1
.

.
.
J
W
O

.
.
J
J
:

U

I

~

w
a
:

1
-
I
-
a
:
w

Z

t

F
i
g
u
r
e

8
-
3
.

G
l
i
d
e

S
l
o
p
e

C
o
u
p
l
e
r

B
l
o
c
k

D
i
a
g
r
a
m

r
-
-
>

.
.
.
I

w

a
:

a
:

>
!
!
!

I
L

.
.
.
1
-
w
.
.
J

a

!
:
:

:
J

U

a
:

U

u

C
l

o

.
.
.
I

L

T
H
E
O
R
Y

O
F

O
P
E
R
A
T
I
O
N

I
s
s
u
e
d
:

1
1
/
2
5
/
7
4

SECTION IX
Paragraph
Page '.
9-1. Introduction ................................................................ 9-1
9-2. Removal of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ............. 9-1
9-3. Installation of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models ........... 9-1
9-4. Removal of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-31-31O, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-3IP) ............................................................ 9-1
9-5. Installation of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-3IP) ............................................................ 9-1
9-6. Removal of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7500001 to 7700023
and PA-32-300, SIN 32-7540001 to 7840045) ................................ 9-2
9-7. Installation of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7500001 to 7700023
and PA-32-300, SIN 32-7540001 to 7840045) ................................ 9-2
9-8. Removal of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7800001 and up;
9.9
9-10.
9-11.
9-12.
9-13.
PA-32-300, SIN 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301,
PA-32R-30 I T and P A-34-200T) ........................................... 9-2
Installation of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7800001 and up;
PA-32-300, SIN 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T
PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301, PA-32R-30IT and PA-34-200T) ......... 9-2
Removal of Glide Slope Coupler (PAM-180) ................................... 9-3
Installation of Glide Slope Coupler (PAM-180) ................................. 9-3
Removal of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT) .............. 9-3
Installation of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T) ............ 9-3
REVISED: 11/30/79 ix-i
PlPER ALTIMATIC IIlC SERVICE MANUAL
SECTION IX
9-1. INTRODUCTION. This section covers the removal and installation of the Glide Slope Coupler.
NOTE
For continuous Autopilot use with the Glide Slope Coupler
removed, it will be necessary to install a jumper plug, Mitchell PIN
9A88 (Piper PIN 757 325), in the 24-pin CD-63 receptacle of the
Glide Slope Cable Harness.
9-2. REMOVAL OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's.
The Glide Slope Coupler is located under the instrument panel on the right side of the fuselage and is
attached to the fuselage frame ..
a. Remove the Glide Slope Coupler from the mounting brackets by removing the screws and nuts
which secure the mounting brackets.
b. Release the spring clips on the. CD-63 connector. Disconnect CD-63 from the Glide Slope
Coupler.
c. If the airplane will be flown prior to reinstallation of the Glide Slope Coupler install jumper plug,
Mitchell PIN 9A88 (Piper PIN 757 325), in the CD-63 harness connector.
9-3. INSTALLATION OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's. (Refer to
Figure 9-1.)
a. If the jumper plug, Mitchell PIN 9A88 (Piper PIN 757 325), has been installed in the Glide Slope
Harness connector CD-63, remove it.
b. Connect CD-63 24-pin connector and make sure the spring clips are snapped in place.
c. Place the Glide Slope on the mounting brackets on the fuselage frame. Position it so the end with
the CD-63 receptacle is aft.
. d. Secure it with the screws and nuts previously removed.
9-4. REMOVAL OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-31-31 0, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
(PA-31 only.) The Glide Slope Coupler is located under the right side of the instrument panel.
(PA-3IP only.) The Glide Slope Coupler is located under the center of the instrument panel to the rear of
the pedestal.
a. (PA-31P only.) Remove the screws securing the center instrument panel and move panel slightly
aft to gain access to Glide Slope Coupler.
b. Release the spring clips on CD-63 connector. Disconnect CD-63 from the Glide Slope Coupler.
c. If the airplane will be flown prior to reinstallation of the Glide Slope Coupler, install jumper
plug. Mitchell PIN 9A88 (Piper PIN 757 325), in the CD-63 connector.
d. Remove the two screws which secure the Glide Slope Coupler to the mounting bracket.
e. (PA-31P only.) Remove the two screws which secure the Glide Slope mounting bracket to the
instrument panel and remove coupler and mounting bracket.
9-5. INSTALLATION OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
(Refer to Figure 9-2 or Figure 9-3.)
a. (PA-3IP only.) Place the Glide Slope Coupler with mounting bracket under the cellter of the
instrument panel. Position it so the 24-pin receptacle is to the left of the pedestal.
b. Place the Glide Slope Coupler on the mounting bracket under the right side of the instrument
panel. Position it so the 24-pin receptacle is on top of the Glide Slope Coupler.
REVISED: 8/10/78
9-1
c. (PA-3IP only.) Secure the Coupler with mounting bracket to the instrument panel with two
screws.
d. Secure the Coupler to the mounting bracket with two screws.
e. If the jumper plug has been installed in the Glide Slope Harness connector CD-63, remove it.
f. Connect the CD-63, 24-pin connector and make sure the spring clips are snapped in place.
9.6. REM.OVAL OF GLIDESLOPE COUPLER. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7500001 to 7700023 and PA-32-300,
SIN 32-7540001 to 7840045)
The Glide Slope Coupler is located beneath the instrument panel and is attached to the forward side of the
glove box.
a. Release the spring clips on CD-63 connector and disconnect the CD-63 connector from the Glide
Slope Coupler.
b. Remove the screws and nuts which secure the Glide Slope Coupler to the brake channel and remove
coupler.
c. If the airplane will be flown prior to reinstallation of the Glide Slope Coupler, install jumper plug,
9-7. INSTALLATION OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7500001 to 7700023 and PA-
32-300, SIN 32-7540001 to 7840045) (Refer to Figure 9-4.)
Coupler Harness Connector CD-63, remove it.
b. Place the Glide Slope Coupler on the forward side of the glove box with the CD-63 connector
pointing inboard.
c. Ascertain the ground wire CD-60 from the CD-63 connector harness is located under the screw on
the glove box.
d. Secure the Glide Slope Coupler to the glove box with the appropriate screws and nuts.
e. Connect the CD-63 24-pin connector to the coupler and make sure the spring clips are snapped in
place.
9-8. REMOVAL OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-300, SIN
32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301,
PA-32R-30 1 and PA-34-200T)
The Glide Slope Coupler is located beneath the instrument panel and is attached to the forward left side of
the brake channel.
Slope Coupler.
coupler.
9-9. INSTALLATION OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-32-260, SIN 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-300,
SIN 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-
301, PA-32R-30IT and PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 9-5.)
Coupler Harness connector CD-63, remove it.
b. Place the Glide Slope Coupler on the left side of the brake channel with the CD-63 receptacle ofthe
coupler pointing forward.
c. Ascertain the ground wire CD-60 from the CD-63 connector harness is placed under the forward
mounting screw of the coupler.
d. Secure the Glide Slope Coupler to the brake channel with the appropriate screws and nuts.
place.
9-2
REMOVAL AND INST ALLA TION
REVISED: 11/30/19
9-10. REMOVAL OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-44-180)
The Glide Slope Coupler is located on the forward side of the bulkhead at STA. 47.65 on the left side of
the airplane. .
a. Release the latches on the nose cone and swing it down out of the way to gain access to the Glide
Slope Coupler.
b. Release the spring clips on CD-63 connector and disconnect the CD-63 connector from the Glide
Slope Coupler.
c. Remove the screws and nuts which secure the Glide Slope Coupler to the bulkhead and remove
coupler.
d. If the airplane will be flown prior to reinstallation of the Glide Slope Coupler, install jumper plug,
Mitchell P / N 9A88 (Piper P / N 757 325), in the CD-63 harness connector.
9-11. INSTALLATION OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 9-6.)
a. If jumper plug, Mitchell P / N 9 A88 (Piper P / N 757 325), has been installed in the Glide Slope
b. Place the Glide Slope Coupler on the forward side of the bulkhead at ST A. 47.65 on the left side of
the airplane with the CD-63 connector pointing inboard.
c. Ascertain the ground wire CD-60 from the CD-63 connector harness is placed unqer the upper
inboard mounting screw of the coupler.
d. Secure coupler to bulkhead with screws and nuts previously removed.
place.
___ 9-12. REMOVAL OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT)
The Glide Slope Coupler is located under the instrument panel on the right side of the fuselage.
Slope Coupler.
coupler.
Mitchell P / N 9A88 (Piper P / N 757 325), in the CD-63 harness connector.
--- 9-13. INSTALLATION OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT) (Refer to
Figure 9-8.)
a. If the jumper plug, Mitchell P / N 9 A88 (Piper P / N 757 325), has been installed in the Glide Slope
b. Place the Glide Slope Coupler on the mounting bracket under the right side of the instrument panel
with the CD-63 connector pointing up.
c. Ascertain the ground wire CD-60 from the CD-63 connector harness is placed under the upper rear
mounting screw of the coupler.
d. Secure the Glide Slope Coupler to the glove box with the appropriate screws and nuts.
place.
\
REVISED: 11/30/79
9-3
THIS PAGE
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
REVISED: 11/30/79
1. GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER
2. SUPPORT BRACKET
3. NUT
4. SCREW
5. FUSELAGE FRAME
Figure 9-1. Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-23-250 (Six Place) E & F Model's
2. SCREW
3. MOUNTING BRACKET
4. RUDDER PEDAL SUPPORT CHANNEL
/
./'
J&

1& /
,

'--,

I , 'II

' "
j
"

"
/

,
1& /

"
,
,

Figure 9-2. Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350
\
REVISED: 11/30/79
9-5
I 9-6
2. SCREW
3. INSTRUMENT PANEL BRACKET
4. CONNECTOR
4
I
l-c= r
""""

oJ
1
oJ
""J:::;
L
c
c

\!)
$
"- -
I
Figure 9-3. Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-3IP
2. SCREW
3. GLOVE BOX
4. CONNECTOR
2 4
Figure 9-4. Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-32-260, SI N 32-7500001 to 7700023
and PA-32-300, SIN 32-7540001 to 7840045
REVISED: 11/30/79
I. GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER
2. SCREW
3. PARKING BRAKE SUPPORT CHANNEL
4. CONNECTOR
3
4
Figure 9-5. Glide Slope Coupler Installation, 1'1\-32-260, SI N 32-nOOOO I and up; P i\-
32-300, SI N 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, P A-32RT -300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-
32-301, PA-32-30IT, PA-32R-301, PA-32R-30IT and PA-34-200T
I
/1
I I
I
I
2. SCREW
3. FORWARD CABIN BULKHEAD
4. CONNECTOR
4
2
Figure 9-6. Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-44-180
ADDED: 11/30/79
\
\
3
9-7
t. GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER
2. SCREW
3. BRACKET
4. CONNECTOR
3 -+---)
4
~
2
,
,
'"
------- _.- --- - .. _._--
9-8
Figure 9-7. Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-20IT
UEMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
ADDED: 1l/30j79
SECTION X
TEST EQUIPMENT
Paragraph Page
10-1. Test Equipment Requirements ................................... 10-1
10-2. 66D141-4 Radio Coupler Tester .................................. 10-1
10-3. Glide Slope Cables .......................................... 10-1
10-4. Troubleshooting ........................................... 10-1
ISSUED: 11/25/74 x-i
PIPER ALTIMA TIC I1IC SERVICE MANUAL
SECTION X
TEST EQUIPMENT
10-1. TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS. Autopilot Test Kit Piper PIN 753 439 (66DI41). In addition
to this test equipment, there are several additional cables which will be required.
The use of the 66DI41-1, 66D141-2 and 66D141-3 is not explained because they are used the same as
described in Section IV of this manual. The 66D 141-4 Radio Coupler Tester is used differently. This is
explained in Paragraph 10-2.
10-2. 66D141-4 RADIO COUPLER TESTER. The Radio Coupler Tester contains a simulated radio signal
source to provide Glide Slope Signal Deviation thus allowing the system to be static tested. The Radio
Coupler Test Box will perform the following functions:
a. The Lower Radio Signal Meter simulates a Glide Slope Deviation Indicator. Blue represents UP
and yellow represents DOWN.
b. The Radio Signal Substitute Knob, located to the right of the Lower Omni Meter, when pulled
out "ON" and rotated will give either a fly "UP" or "DOWN" signal.
c. The 9-pin CD-34 connector connects to Test Cable 30A300 to provide simulated Glide Slope
information to the Glide Slope Coupler.
10-3. GLIDE SLOPE CABLES. Given in this paragraph are the additional items which are used for testing
the Glide Slope Coupler. (Refer to Figure 10-1.)
a. Glide Slope Coupler Light Cable, Mitchell PIN 30B317 (Piper PIN 757 873).
b. Glide Slope Coupler Test Cable, Mitchell PIN 30A300 (Piper PIN 757 874).
c. Glide Slope Coupler Cable, Mitchell PIN 3OC291 (Piper PIN 752 010). This is the same cable
used for installation in the airplane and is not shown in Figure 10-1.
d. Glide Slope Coupler Extension Cable, Mitchell PIN 30C267 (Piper PIN 757 875). Used for flight
adjustment.
e. Jumper Plug, Mitchell PIN 9A88 (Piper PIN 757 325). This is not used for testing. It is installed
in the airplane Glide Slope Harness while the Glide Slope Coupler is removed.
10-4. TROUBLESHOOTING.
a. It is recommended that the technician determine the nature and specific area of trouble as
accurately as possible by questioning the pilot.
b. Refer to Table X-I before attempting to troubleshoot the system. Isolate the trouble into one
group.
1. The first group concerns the inputs to the Glide Slope Coupler. It is recommended that the
technician, by use of the appropriate test equipment, reproduce the input signals and observe that the
output, in this case, the Autopilot, responds either correctly or incorrectly. The reason is that this group is
the easiest to work on.
TEST EQUIPMENT
ISSUED: 11/25/74
10-1
TABLE X-I. TROUBLE ISOLATION BLOCK DIAGRAM
INPUT MIDDLE OUTPUT
Altitude Selector
AltiMatic III B-1 Amplifier
Radio Coupler
Glide Slope Coupler
Pitch Servo
Gyro Horizon
Bridle Cable
Glide Slope Indicator
2. If, with the correct inputs, the Autopilot does not respond correctly, the middle group (in
this case the Glide Slope Coupler) should be removed and bench checked in accordance with Section XI.
3. If the inputs are correct and the middle section (Glide Slope Coupler) performs
satisfactorily on the bench check, the output group should be checked. Since the output group is the pitch
portion of the AltiMatic Autopilot, it is recommended that it be checked out in accordance with Section V
of this manual.
c. Since the Glide Slope Coupler signal is an additional input to the pitch portion of the AltiMatic
Autopilot it is essential that it be established as to whether or not the problem is peculiar to the Glide Slope
Coupler operation, an example: Complaint, aircraft "porpoises while making ILS approach." This problem
could be caused by malfunctions other than the Glide Slope Coupler such as AltiMatic Amplifier, loose
control or bridle cable and faulty electric trim. At this point it would be wise to check out the AltiMatic
pitch system without the Glide Slope Coupler engaged.
10-2 TEST EQUIPMENT
ISSUED: 11/25/74
TEST EQUIPMENT
ISSUED: 11/25/74

LII t:8
j

II I:)
Figure 10-1. Glide Slope Coupler Test Cables and Jumper Plug
10-3
SECTION XI
BENCH SETUP PROCEDURES
Paragraph Page
11-1. Introduction.............................................. 11-1
11-2. Equipment Required for Bench Check .............................. , 11-1
11-3. Bench Checking of the Glide Slope Coupler ........................... , 11-1
11-4. Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-4
ISSUED: 11/25/74 xi-i
SECTION Xl
BENCH SET-UP PROCEDURES
11-1. INTRODUCTION. The information in this section wi1llist the equipment necessary to bench check
the Glide Slope Coupler and the proper procedure for connecting this equipment. The bench set-up
procedure is also described. For red button and adjusting pot location on Glide Slope Amplifier, refer to
Figure 11-1. For functional ground and flight checks, refer to Section X. For Schematics, refer to paragraph
11-4 of this section.
11-2. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR BENCH CHECK. The following test equipment will be required to
bench check the Glide Slope Coupler.
a. Gyro Substitute Test Box, 66D141-1.
b. Power Section Test Box, 66DI41-2.
c. Radio Coupler Tester, 66DI41-4.
d. Console Substitute Test Box, 66DI41-3.
e. AltiMatic III Cable Harness, 30D207.
f. Glide Slope Coupler Cable, 30C291.
g. Glide Slope Coupler Test Cable, 30A300.
h. Glide Slope Light and Cable, 30B317.
i. AltiMatic IIIC Amplifier.
j. 14-Volt DC Power Supply or 28-Volt DC Power Supply, whichever is applicable.
11-3. BENCH CHECKING OF THE GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER.
a. Use the 66Dl41 Test Kit and make the following connections. After all connections are made as
described in Steps 1 to 27 incl. proceed to bench check.
1. Make sure VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH, located on top plate of amplifier is in correct
position (14-volt DC or 28-volt DC) to rna tch bench power supply.
2. Position amplifier so that 30-pin amplifier board is visible.
3. Plug large 30-pin AMP connector of the AltiMatic III test harness onto the amplifier board
with the cable fanning out to the right. Identification placard on the amplifier should be visible.
4. Plug AMP connector CD-20 from the test harness into the CD-20 receptacle located on the
5. Plug the 4-pin male CD-16 connector from the test harness into the female 4-pin receptacle
located on the right hand side of the Power Section Test Box. This receptacle is labeled AMPLIFIER. On
the Power Section Test Box, find the Voltage Selector Switch on the lower left hand corner and insure that
this switch is positioned to rna tch the bench power supply and the Amplifier Voltage Selector Switch in
Step 1. (14 volts DC or 28-volts DC.)
7. Find the RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB located on the RADIO COUPLER TEST
BOX, immediately to the right of the bottom Omni Meter. MAKE SURE THIS RADIO SIGNAL KNOB IS
IN THE "IN" POSITION.
8. Find the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH located immediately to the left of the Red and
Black DC input terminals on the face of the Radio Coupler Test Box. Place this VOLTAGE SELECTOR
SWITCH in the proper voltage position.
9. Rotate LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on face of Gyro Substitute Test Box to the
CENTER or "ZERO" position on the BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
ISSUED: 11/25/74
11-1
10. Below the Large Vernier Knob on the Gyro Substitute Box find a SLIDE SWITCH labeled
"ROLL" and "PITCH." Place this slide switch in the "DOWN" or "PITCH" position.
11. Connect a ground lead to the bottom mounting flange of the AltiMatic Amplifier.
CAUTION
DO NOT PLACE THE GROUND LEAD NEAR THE OUTPUT
TRANSISTORS LOCATED BETWEEN THE COOLING FINS
ALONG THE SIDE OF THE AMPLIFIER.
12. Place the POWER SELECTOR SWITCH located on the lower left hand corner of the
Console Substitute Test Box to the DOWN or "OFF" position.
13. Attach the DELCO fitting from the white wire CD-27 to the positive side of the power
supply.
14. Immediately to the right of the AMP connector CD-20, find a 14-volt or 28-volt SLIDE
SWITCH, place this switch to the proper voltage position to agree with Voltage Selector Switch on the top
plate of the amplifier.
15. On the Console Substitute Test Box, place the Altitude Selector Switch in the Altitude
Control position.
16. Connect the 24-pin male plug of the 30C291 harness to the Glide Slope Coupler.
17. Connect the FEMALE CD-IO of Glide Slope Coupler Harness (3OC29 1 ) to the CD-IO
connector on the Console Substitute Box.
18. Connect the MALE CD-1O of Glide Slope Coupler Harness (30C291) to the female CD-l 0 of
the AltiMatic Test Harness.
19. Connect FEMALE CD-18 of the Glide Slope Coupler Harness to CD-18 on the Gyro
Substitute Box.
20. Connect MALE CD-18 of the Glide Slope Coupler Harness to the female CD-18 connector
of the AltiMatic Harness.
21. Connect Power Supply of either 14-volts or 28-volts A+ whichever is applicable to Glide
Slope Harness as listed below:
14-volt A+ connects to CD-61
28-volt A+ connects to CD-62
22. Connect ground lead from 30B317 Light Assembly to Power Supply Ground.
23. Connect Glide Slope Harness CD-60 to Power Supply Ground.
24. Connect Glide Slope Coupler Harness CD-59 to the appropriate (14 or 28-volts) CD-59 of
the 30B317 Light Assembly.
25. Connect the CD-34 end of the 30A300 Test Cable to the CD-34 (Radio) receptacle of the
660141-4 Coupler Tester.
11-2
26. Connect the CD-58 end of 30A300 Test Cable to CD-58 of the Glide Slope Coupler Harness.
27. Connect the single lead of the 30A300 Test Cable to ground.
NOTE
Normally the Glide Slope Coupler logic circuit receives its ground
from Pin K (loc norm) of the Radio Coupler; however, when using
test cable 30A300 ground is obtained through an external lead
which permits normal Glide Slope Coupler operation regardless of
Radio Coupler Mode.
28. Turn Power Supply "ON."
ISSUED: 11/25/74
ADJUSTING
POTENTIOMETER
Figure II-I. Glide Slope Coupler
29. Place the ON/OFF switch, located in the lower left corner of the Console Substitute Test
Box in the ON position. Depress RED BUTTON located at BOTTOM RIGHT corner of Power Section Test
Box labeled INPUT VOLTAGE. Test box needle should deflect to the right and read 12-14 or 24-28 volts
DC, whichever is applicable, on TOP SCALE.
30. Place the Selector Switch on the Power Section Test Box to the "Res" position.
31. On the Console Substitute Test Box, center the Altitude Control Knob and adjust the Pitch
Trim Knob to center the needle on the Power Section Test Box.
32. Pull OUT radio signal knob on Radio Coupler Tester, rotate COUNTERCLOCKWISE to
obtain 60% in the blue.
NOTE
With reference to the Glide Slope Coupler, blue is UP and yellow
is DOWN.
33. To ARM the Glide Slope Coupler, maintain 60% for 20 seconds.
34. Reduce radio signal slowly by rotating the Radio Signal Knob clockwise until "LOCK ON"
occurs. This can be determined by the green indicator light coming on. Also, an audible "click" will be
detected from the relay.
35. Push Radio Signal Knob OFF. (This keeps needle centered.)
ISSUED: 11/25/74
11-3
36. Rotate slot head potentiometer on glide slope coupler full clockwise. (Refer to Figure 11-1.)
37. With red button depressed, center output meter on Power Section Test Box by rotating the
large vernier knob clockwise. On the scale labeled "Pitch Degrees," record the degrees required to center
the needle.
38. Rotate slot head potentiometer on glide slope coupler full counterclockwise.
39. Depress red button on glide slope coupler and center output meter on Power Section Test
Box by rotating the large vernier knob counterclockwise. Onthe scale labeled "Pitch Degrees," record the
degrees required to center the needle.
40. The total separation between the reading obtained in Step 37 and the reading obtained in
000
Step 39 should be 6 -2 +3.
41. Center the Attitude Gyro Knob.
42. Adjust the Potentiometer on the Glide Slope Coupler to approximately MID POINT.
43. Depress red button on glide slope coupler. Pull out Radio Signal Knob and rotate it
counterclockwise to obtain 100% UP (blue). Zero the output meter by rotating the large vernier knob
clockwise. Record the degrees required to zero the output meter on the Power Section Test Box.
44. Continue to depress Red Button on Glide Slope Coupler. Rotate Radio Signal Knob to
deflect the Radio Signal Meter to 100% DOWN (yellow). Zero the output meter by rotating the large
vernier knob counterclockwise. Record the degrees required to zero the output meter on the Power Section
Test Box.
45. The total separation between the reading obtained in Step 43 and the reading obtained in
Step 44 should be 70 2.
46. With red button released and the Radio Signal Meter indicating 100% DOWN (yellow) rotate
the large vernier knob on the Gyro SUbstitute Test Box counterclockwise until the output meter is
centered. WAIT 90 SECONDS. Record the reading on the "Pitch Degrees" scale.
47. With red button released and the Radio Signal Meter indicating 100% UP (blue), rotate the
large vernier knob on the Gyro Substitute Test Box clockwise until the output meter is centered. WAIT 90
SECONDS.
48. The total separation between Step 46 and 47 should not exceed 10 2.
b. INTEGRATOR RATE TEST.
1. Push Radio Signal Substitute Knob "IN" and momentarily depress red button on glide slope
coupler.
2. Center the output meter on Power Section Test Box by rotating the large vernier knob on
the Gyro Substitute Test Box. WAIT 30 SECONDS after fmal rotation of kno b.
3. Pull Radio Signal Substitute Knob "OUT."
4. With button released, obtain 20% UP (blue) indication on Radio Signal Meter, allow 90
seconds for Integrator to stabilize. Reverse Radio Signal to 20% DOWN (yellow). IMMEDIATELY record
the time required for the needle on the Power Section Test Box to pass through zero from a right
deflection. Time should be 15 to 35 seconds, observe needle now deflects left.
5. Push Radio Signal Knob ''IN.''
6. Rotate the large vernier knob counterclockwise 2 nose down.
7. Depress Red Button on Glide Slope Coupler and adjust potentiometer on glide slope coupler
to center Output Meter on Power Section Test Box.
c. This completes Bench Set-Up.
11-4. WIRING DIAGRAMS. The following pages consist of wiring diagrams of the electrical harnesses and
mating connectors which pertain to the glide slope coupler. This information should be utilized when
troubleshooting the system for defective wiring. A continuity test of wiring can be performed with an
ohmmeter. This test will verify the harness is good and capable of carrying current. Should any wire or
connector fail to produce a reading on the ohmmeter, they are defective and must be repaired or replaced.
11-4
ISSUED: 11/25/74
CDsa
REVISED: 6/13/75

lOC29 I
"
o 1rr
CD
-62
0
CO. 18
(MALE)
A A
CD58
II II
A
C C
8
0 0
C
E E
0
F
H
CD-61 +14 voc
CD..IO GROUND
CD59 IND. LAMP
"
,...
+14 VOC
'------+---1 1 GNO
LOC.NORM
INO.L ...... P
II II
II
6 GiS .. ON
II
II II
II II

1
CO.IS
(FEMALE)
m."
11
'------------- 12 GNO
L-______________________________
II 14 I PITCH COMM.
Figure 11-2. Glide Slope Coupler Harness
CO.IO
(FEMALE)
H
o I---J--!-....J o

CO.IO
(MALE)
II
15 I PIKH SIlO. IN
v
16 I PITCH EX.
II
'------120 ALT ENG +14 VOC OUT
II
II I
'--------:--:---; 22 ALT ENG .. U VDC IN
II
O..lJ
(MALE'
11-5/11-6
o
MOTE:
THE MU"HR\ SHa-"M OM THE SO
"14 PLUG ah.CKET ,u FOR
REFEIEMCE owu.
Issued: 11/25/74
MAW 1 AND HAV 1
s.(LECTOR '''ITCM
11 17 .,
17
"
lua
U9'
un.
IIIIl.ne
....--______ --{ OZI.. )--________________ --,
150115J "" '" "" 0j.42 f"1,0]9 laIn 310 n ].4 II J2 llf10129121 27 26 U 23 22 21201191" 17 "liS 14: IJ 12'. ')5 4 ) .2 1 1
W U U U.
2 10 I
'--
-
f--
Ill---

"""""""-
"""""""-
r--
-
-
,......
I
-
,...-
I
I
I I r
I
1 I I
r" r I ill I" I E I .1.1 A I [!] H -I E I 0 I c lit A ill t1'J E \.\ c I" IA [!] \- lei_ 'I"IFIE 01 ill
o E FMC I. -I W " el-I- do ( " , ET.Te FT.1.I,1 N I-Ic[-I-I
I I
1 1112 I,ll 2021 2S
o
Figure 11-3. Plug Bracket Schematic for AltiMatic lIIC With Glide Slope Coupler, PA-31
11-7/11-8
SECTI'ON XII
GROUND CHECK AND FLIGHT SET -UP PROCEDURES
Paragraph Page
12-1. Ground Operational Check ..................................... 12-1
12-2. Flight Set-Up Procedures ...................................... 12-1
ISSUED: 11/25/74
xii-i
SECTION XII
GROUND CHECK AND FLIGHT SET-UP PROCEDURES
NOTE
Normally the Glide Slope Coupler logic circuit receives its ground
from Pin K (loc norm) of the Radio Coupler; however, when using
test cable 30A300 ground is obtained through an external lead
which permits normal Glide Slope Coupler operation regardless of
Radio Coupler Mode.
12-1. GROUND OPERATIONAL CHECK.
a. Remove aircraft harness connector CD-58 from glide slope coupler and connect test cable
30A300 CD-58 to glide slope coupler. Connect CD-34 end of the 30A300 test cable to the receptacle
labeled CD-34 (radio) on the coupler tester, 66DI4l-4. Attach the lead labeled "Ground" of the 30A300
test cable to the airplane ground.
b. On the 66D14l-4 Radio Coupler Tester, adjust the Lower Radio Signal Meter for 60% UP (blue).
c. Connect CD-18 of the Glide Slope Harness to the 66D 141-1 Gyro Substitute Test Box.
d. With the aircraft master switch ON engage the AltiMatic IIIC, make sure it is in the ALT Hold
Mode.
e. After 20 seconds slowly decrease the Radio Simulator Signal, the coupler should lock ON when
zero output is indicated on the Radio Signal Meter. The green light also indicates lock ON.
f. Alternately rotate the Radio Signal Substitute Knob to UP (blue) and DOWN (yellow) 60%
positions. Note that the stabilator or elevator moves accordingly.
NOTE
Response will not be immediate when reversing radio signal as it
will take time for the integrator to stabilize.
12-2. FLIGHT SET-UP PROCEDURES. The flight adjustment is provided for the purpose of establishing
the correct pitch attitude required to maintain the Glide Path Track. This minimizes the corrective action
required of the error integrator to maintain tracking with the Glide Slope Converter centered.
a. Remove the glide slope coupler by removing the two mounting screws which are located on the
mounting flange.
b. Connect one end of CD-63 extension cable to the 30C291 harness installed in the airplane.
Connect the other end of this extension cable to the CD-63 receptable on the glide slope coupler.
c. Connect CD-58 cable from glide slope coupler to CD-58 of the Mitchell P /N 30A300 Test Cable
(Piper PIN 757 874). Connect CD-34 of the Test Cable to CD-34 receptacle on the Radio Coupler Tester
66D14l-4. Connect the single lead of the 30A300 test cable to the airplane ground.
GROUND CHECK AND FUGHT SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
12-1
d. Fly to an area clear of traffic and off the airways. Also fly to an altitude sufficient to make a
simulated approach and descent.
e. With the autopilot operating, engage ALT Hold.
f. Establish approach speed with gear down and flaps set in accordance with appropriate Airplane
Flight Manual. (Not to exceed 15 ).
g. PULL Radio Signal Substitute Knob, on 66D141-4 Test Box, OUT and rotate it
counterclockwise to 100% blue indication. This is equivalent to being under the glide slope which is
necessary to arm the glide slope coupler.
h. Maintain 100% UP signal for approximately 20 seconds then slowly rotate the Radio Signal
Substitute Knob to center the needle.
i. As needle crosses center, glide slope coupler will "Lock ON," which can be noted by the green
indicator light coming on. The aircraft will pitch slightly to a nose down attitude.
j. Push Radio Signal Substitute Knob OFF (in). This is equivalent to Glide Slope Coupler Needle
being centered.
k. Adjust power to maintain approach airspeed.
1. Depress red button on glide slope coupler and adjust adjacent potentiometer to set a 500 feet per
minute descent. (Clockwise is UP.)
m. Repeat procedure to be sure adjustment is satisfactory.
n. Disconnect test cable 30A300 and connect Glide Slope Coupler CD-58 to Glide Slope Indicator
CD-58 connector.
o. Disconnect extension cable CD-63 and connect aircraft CD-63 to the glide slope coupler. Make a
coupled ILS approach.
12-2
p. Reinstall Glide Slope Coupler in the airplane.
GROUND CHECK AND FLIGHT SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
PART III
ALTIMATIC IIIC
, ELECTRONIC PITCH TRIM
REVISED: 10/16/81
SECTION XIII
Paragraph Page
13-1. Introduction.............................................. 13-1
13-2. Description .............................................. 13-1
ISSUED: 11/25/74 xiii-i
SECTION XIII
13-1. INTRODUCTION. This part of the service manual is divided into four sections. Section XIII,
contains a description of the AltiMatic mc Pitch Trim System. Section XIV, Theory of Operation, explains
the functional operation of the system. Section XV explains the proper ground check of the system, and
Section XVI provides a Troubleshooting Isolation Block Diagram.
13-2. DESCRIPTION. The AltiMatic mc Electronic Pitch Trim System has both a manual mode
of operation and an aHtomatic mode of operation. The manual mode is operational only when the autopilot
is disengaged or the r01l axis only is engaged, and the automatic mode is operational only when the pitch axis
of the autopilot is engaged.
a. MANUAL MODE. This mode applies to the trim system when the pitch portion of the autopilot
is disengaged. Trim may be accomplished by the human pilot electrically by use of the trim switch on the
pilot's control wheel. The disengage button is incorporated in the control wheel mounted trim switch and
must be depressed to make the electric trim switch effective. Also, the panel mounted Trim Master Switch
must be pushed to the ON position. When 'the trim switch is moved to the forward position with the disengage
button depressed, it completes a circuit to the servo motor, at the same time, power is applied to a solenoid
which engages the trim servo motor to the capstan through a set of gears. Since the trim system cables
are wrapped around the capstan, any rotation of the trim servo motor results in a change of position of the
airplane's trim system, thus deflecting the stabilator or elevator trim tab in the conventional manner. When
the human pilot releases the switch, it returns to the OFF position and power is then disconnected from the
trim servo motor and the engage solenoid which completely disengages the electric trim motor from the
airplane's trim system cables. If the switch is moved to the rear position, the same events occur except the
polarity of the servo motor is reversed insuring the opposite direction of rotation.
b. AUTOMATIC MODE. When the Roll and Pitch engage switches on the AltiMatic IIIC Console
are engaged, the trim switch on the pilot's control wheel becomes inoperative and electrical power is applied
to the electronic trim amplifier and pitch trim servo engage solenoid. The electronic trim amplifier elec-
tronicaJly senses trim requirements and adjusts the trim as required by providing electrical power sufficient
to drive the DC trim servo motor.
NOTE
The engage solenoid will maintain engagement of the servo motor
and capstan gears continuously while the pitch axis of the
Autopilot is engaged.
INTRODL'CTION AND DESCRIPTION
REVISED: 10/16/81
13-1
SECTION XIV
THEORY OF OPERATION
Paragraph Page
14-1. System Explanation ........................................ 14-1
REVISED: 10/16/81 XlV-l
PIPER ALTIMATlC HIC SERVICE MANUAL
SECTION XIV
THEORY OF OPERATION
14-1. SYSTEM EXPLANTION:
The AltiMatic mc Autopilot utilizes an Electronic Pitch Trim System in place of the electro-
mechanical system used in previous EDO / MITCHELL equipment. An Electronic Pitch Trim Amplifier takes
the place of the Mechanical Pitch Trim Sensor Assembly used to monitor sta bilator I elevator cable tension.
a. AUTOMATIC MODE. In the Automatic Mode (Autopilot pitch axis engaged), the Electronic
Pitch Trim Amplifier monitors the analog voltage being applied to the autopilot pitch servo. Depending on
the amount of voltage and the time period voltage is present and changing, the Electronic Trim Amplifier
pulses the pitch trim servo motor in either very slow pulses, for minute pitch trim charge, or higher
frequency pulses resulting in constant medium speed trim change.
b. MANUAL MODE. In the Manual Mode (Autopilot pitch axis dis-engaged), the Electronic
Pitch Trim Amplifer operates the pitch trim servo at maximum speed.
This design offers fail-safe runaway trim protection, and can withstand any type single failure,
without uncontrolled trim system results. Further, due to variable trim rates, the system is better suited to
higher performance aircraft fr0111 an operational standpoint.
REVISED: ]0/16/81
14-1
SECTION XV
GROUND CHECK - ELECTRONIC PITCH TRIM SYSTEM
Paragraph Page
\5-\. Ground Check - Electronic Pitch Trim System ................................ \5-1
ADDED: 10/16/81 xv-i
PIPER AL TIMA TIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
SECTION XV
GROUND CHECK - ELECTRONIC PITCH TRIM SYSTEM
NOTE
It is very important to never use a substitute trim system component
part, for an original design part, because the fail-safe characteristics
of the system might be compromised. Perform the following ground
checks before flight, when service has been performed. A trim
system running the wrong direction, is the same as a run-away. It
is possible to experience excessive pilot yoke forces in only 3-4
seconds under such conditions.
IS-\. GROUND CHECK OF ELECTRONIC PITCH TRIM SYSTEM.
\. MANUAL MODE.
a. Run engines to erect gyros on a level ramp.
b. Check - trim circuit breaker "IN".
MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM
When the AltiMatic mc is disengaged, the pilot can adjust pitch
trim electrically through a switch on the pilot's control wheel (see
Figure IS-I). The Master A/P Disconnect/Trim Interrupt Switch
(located on the pilot's control wheel) will disconnect the Autopilot
and Yaw Damper when pressed and released. When pressed and
held this switch will interrupt all electric trim operations.
ADDED: 10/16/81
ELECTRIC
PITCH TRIM
MASTER AlP
DISCONNECT/TRIM
INTERRUPT SWITCH
TRIM t:u ... rill'"
MAlTER
(,!=; ON PA-31 SERIES 8'
t[:J1 "U' Off
t OHIO""
TRIM 0"
PA-32 AND MASTER PA-23-250
PA.34.200T ONLY SWITCH
Figure 15-1
15-1
c. Turn ON TRIM MASTER SWITCH (Ref. Fig. IS-I).
d. ENGAGE ROLL on Autopilot Console and ROTATE ROLL COMMAND KNOB to stop
Control Yoke/ Aileron action.
e. PULL AND HOLD CONTROL YOKE to neutral/level flight position.
f. ENGAGE PITCH on Autopilot Console and ROTATE PITCH COMMAND DISK to
stop Control Yoke/Elevator-Stabilator action.
NOTE
It may be necessary to manually assist Pitch Servo to support
Elevator/Stabilator Weight on ground, due to clutch slip point
setting.
g. DEPRESS MASTER A/ P DISCONNECT /TRIM INTERRUPT SWITCH (Button-Ref.
Fig. 15-1) on pilot's control yoke, to verify this switch immediately disconnects Autopilot.
h. HOLD THIS MASTER A/P DISCONNECT/TRIM INTERRUPT SWITCH IN and
actuate AUTOPILOT/ELECTRIC PITCH TRIM SWITCH (Rocker-Ref. Fig. IS-I) on pilot's control
yoke to verify this rocker switch is now inoperative.
i. RELEASE MASTER A/P DISCONNECT BUTTON.
j. Repeat Steps d, e, and f above and DEPRESS AUTOPILOT /ELECTRIC PITCH TRIM
ROCKER SWITCH on pilot's control yoke; to verify this rocker switch, also, immediately disengages
Autopilot.
k. DO NOT RE-ENGAGE AUTOPILOT.
\. Again DEPRESS AUTOPILOT/ELECTRIC PITCH TRIM ROCKER SWITCH, AND
while Top Bar is depressed, move switch AFT - check that PITCH TRIM moves UP.
m. While continuing to depress AUTOPILOT/ELECTRIC PITCH TRIM ROCKER
SWITCH, move this rocker switch FORWARD - check that PITCH TRIM moves DOWN.
n. RELEASE PRESSURE on Top Bar of switch. Verify the AUTOPILOT/ELECTRIC
TRIM SWITCH is inoperative in both directions, if Top Bar of rocker switch is not depressed.
2. AUTOMATIC MODE.
In this mode there will be approximately a 3-second DELAYED Pitch Trim response, after a pitch
change is commanded on the Autopilot Console.
a. ENGAGE ROLL on Autopilot Console and rotate ROLL COMMAND KNOB to stop
Control Yokel Aileron motion.
b. PULL AND HOLD CONTROL YOKE to a neutral or level flight position.
c. ENGAGE PITCH on Autopilot Console, and ROTATE PITCH COMMAND DISK to stop
Control Yoke I E levator-Stabilator action.
NOTE
It may be necessary to manually assist Pitch Servo to support
Elevator / Stabilator Weight on ground due to clutch slip point
setting.
d. ROTATE PITCH COMMAND DISK for UP Command. Observe PITCH TRIM follows
with UP TRIM after approximately 3-second delay.
e. ROTATE PITCH COMMAND DISK for DOWN Command. Observe PITCH TRIM
follows with DOWN TRIM after approximately 3-second delay.
15-2
ADDED: 10/16/81
PIPER AL TIMA TIC HIC SERVICE MANUAL
NOTE
The Pitch Trim Servo response speed may not resemble'
earlier altimatic models. The Electronic Pitch Trim Amplifier
will determine if slow pulse or medium pulse trim servo speed
will occur. If very slow pulses of pitch trim appear before
higher pitch trim speed occurs - DO NOT MISINTERPRET
THIS OCCURANCE AS A FAULT.
f. This completes the ground checks of the Electronic Pitch Trim System.
ADDED: 10/16/81 15-3
SECTION XVI
TROUBLESHOOTING
I & Isolation Block Diagram ..................................... .
REVISED: 10/16/81
Page
16-1
xvi -i
SECTION XVI
INTRODUCTION
18 -/. INTRODUCTION. The AltiMatic IIlC Autopilot is equipped with Electronic Pitch Trim.
No special test equipment or adjustments are required with this system. For appropriate wiring diagrams of
the trim system refer to Section VI of this manual as the trim system is part of the autopilot. Utilize the wiring
diagrams to troubleshoot the system.
TROUBLE ISOLATION BLOCK DIAGRAM
START
1. Turn aircraft master switch on.
2. Engage autopilot pitch mode.
3. Move autopilot pitch command
wheel for a pitch up command.

Observe aircraft trim wheel movement
for pitch up trim.
,YES
Move autopilot pitch command wheel
for a pitch down command.
YES
for pitch down trim.
,YES
Disengage autopilot and operate man-
ual trim switch, on aircraft control
wheel, for pitch up trim.
, YES
for pitch up trim.
...... TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDED: 10/16/81

YES
TABLE XVI I
-
NO
Check trim servo and trim amplifier .. Check trim amplifier
output with 66D141-2 power section. A=(CD-45 Pin B)
I"
NO NO
Check to see if autopilot pitch servo
is running.
NO
Check manual trim switch and wiring.
NO

Operate manual trim switch for pitch

down trim.
for pitch down trim.
YES FINISH
16-1

Altimatic Iiic Service Manual

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Altimatic Iiic Service Manual

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

PIPER

2:7 - 'TO GIS REe (.UP)

Anda mungkin juga menyukai